22.10.2014 Views

a-safety-2005vol1 1..117 - University of South Africa

a-safety-2005vol1 1..117 - University of South Africa

a-safety-2005vol1 1..117 - University of South Africa

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

<strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion<br />

A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention<br />

JOURNAL AIMS AND SCOPE<br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion: A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention<br />

(ASP) is a forum for discussion and constructive debate among<br />

academics, policy-makers and practitioners active in the field <strong>of</strong> injury<br />

prevention and <strong>safety</strong> promotion. ASP seeks to promote research and<br />

dialogue around a central public health issue that affects <strong>Africa</strong>, namely<br />

injury and violence.<br />

SUBJECT COVERAGE<br />

Issues <strong>of</strong> the ASP's predecessor, the Institute for Social and Health<br />

Science's Monograph Series, addressed a variety <strong>of</strong> injury and<br />

violence related topics, such as:<br />

. injury surveillance methodologies<br />

. costing techniques<br />

. epidemiological research findings<br />

. health systems research<br />

. risks and resiliences associated with violence and injuries in low- to -<br />

middle income contexts<br />

. best practices for injury prevention and containment interventions<br />

ASP is administered by the Unisa Institute for Social and Health<br />

Sciences, and the Presidential Crime, Violence and Injury Lead<br />

Programme. The Crime, Violence and Injury Lead Programme was<br />

established in October 2001 and is jointly managed and developed by<br />

the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Medical Research Council (MRC) and the UNISA<br />

Institute for Social and Health Sciences (ISHS). The brief <strong>of</strong> this<br />

Programme is to contribute to injury prevention and <strong>safety</strong> promotion in<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> and more widely in <strong>Africa</strong>. The Programme thus seeks to<br />

contribute to and promote the continent's health status, <strong>safety</strong>, and<br />

quality <strong>of</strong> life, specifically through multidisciplinary public-healthorientated<br />

research aimed at preventing death, disability and suffering<br />

arising from crime, violence and unintentional injury.<br />

ASP seeks to promote multidisciplinary research and dialogue about<br />

injury and violence on the continent. The journal publishes on a<br />

spectrum <strong>of</strong> topics <strong>of</strong> interest to researchers, practitioners and policy<br />

makers in the injury and violence prevention sector. The ASP is an<br />

accredited <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Post Secondary Education (SAPSE) journal.<br />

All articles in the journal are subject to peer review. ASP is published<br />

biannually and features original full-length articles, theoretical papers,<br />

reviews, and short communications.<br />

EDITOR-IN-CHIEF<br />

Mohamed Seedat, MRC-Unisa Crime, Violence and Injury Lead<br />

Programme, and <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

ISSUE EDITORS<br />

Mohamed Seedat, MRC-Unisa Crime, Violence and Injury Lead<br />

Programme and <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

Shahnaaz Suffla, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Western Cape<br />

Lu-Anne Swart, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, Institute for Social and<br />

Health Sciences<br />

EDITORIAL ASSISTANT<br />

Victor Peteke, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

EDITORIAL COMMITTEE<br />

Richard Matzopoulos, Medical Research Council<br />

Garth Stevens, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

Shahnaaz Suffla, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Western Cape<br />

Martin Terre Blanche, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

Ashley van Niekerk, Medical Research Council<br />

EDITORIAL BOARD<br />

Mahomed Dada, forensic pathologist, Vereeniging<br />

Samuel Forjuoh, Texas Agricultural & Mechanical <strong>University</strong><br />

Olive Kobusingye, Ugandan Injury Control Centre<br />

Dinesh Mohan, Indian Institute <strong>of</strong> Technology<br />

Wilson Odero, Moi <strong>University</strong><br />

Babatunde Solagberu, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Irolin<br />

SUBSCRIPTION FEE<br />

ZAR 250 per individual subscription<br />

ZAR 500 per group or organisational subscription<br />

US$ 150 per international subscription<br />

Account and Payment Details: The payment must be made in favour<br />

<strong>of</strong>: Unisa ISHS/CPA; Bank Account: ABSA (Sunnyside, Pretoria, <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>, Branch Code, 334545 Account Number 010000114)<br />

Contact Details: Ms Lyndsey Lourie, <strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion: A<br />

Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention, PO Box 1087, Lenasia 1820,<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Tel: +27+11 857-1142. Fax: +27+11 857-1770.<br />

Email: lourilc@unisa.ac.za<br />

Copyright # 2005 <strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion: A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and<br />

Violence Prevention.<br />

All rights reserved. No part <strong>of</strong> this publication may be reproduced,<br />

stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form, or by any<br />

means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise,<br />

without the prior permission <strong>of</strong> the copyright owners.<br />

ISSN: 1728-774X<br />

Publisher: Published on behalf <strong>of</strong> the UNISA Institute for Social and<br />

Health Sciences, the MRC-UNISA Crime, Violence and Injury Lead<br />

Programme and the Injury Prevention Initiative for <strong>Africa</strong> (IPIFA).<br />

Disclaimer: The development, preparation, and publication <strong>of</strong> this work<br />

has been undertaken with great care. However, the publisher and<br />

editors <strong>of</strong> the <strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion: A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and<br />

Violence Prevention are not responsible for any errors herein or for the<br />

consequences that may ensue from the use <strong>of</strong> materials or information<br />

contained in this work. Opinions expressed by the authors(s) are not<br />

necessarily those <strong>of</strong> the publisher and editors <strong>of</strong> the journal.


<strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion<br />

A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury<br />

and Violence Prevention<br />

Vol 3, No 1 2005<br />

CONTENTS<br />

EDITORIAL<br />

Building cultures <strong>of</strong> peace: Contextual and discursive considerations<br />

Mohamed Seedat and Shahnaaz Suffla 1<br />

ORIGINAL CONTRIBUTIONS<br />

Understanding collective violence in apartheid and post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

Norman Duncan 5<br />

Truth, confessions and reparations: : Lessons from the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth<br />

and Reconciliation Commission<br />

Garth Stevens 23<br />

Non-violent conflict resolution and peacebuilding in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

Martin Terre Blanche 40<br />

Conflict, Reconciliation and Peacebuilding in the North-East region <strong>of</strong> India<br />

Rei Vashum 52<br />

Conflict management in the Indian subcontinent: The dimensions <strong>of</strong> Hindu-Muslim conflict<br />

Iqbal A. Ansari 63<br />

i


SHORT RESEARCH REPORTS<br />

Reflections on Truth and Reconciliation<br />

Hiren Gohain 76<br />

Caste and Class Violence in Central Bihar: Restructuring Social Order Towards Reconciliation<br />

Prakash Louis 83<br />

Satyagraha in Creative Society<br />

Manoranjan Mohanty 87<br />

SHORT COMMUNICATIONS<br />

International Collaborative Effort on Injury Statistics Meeting, 1-2 June 2005,<br />

Cuernavaca, Mexico<br />

Richard Matzopoulos 90<br />

Injury Prevention and Safety Promotion events held under the auspices <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Injury Prevention Initiative for <strong>Africa</strong>, 3-10 July 2005, Port-Said, Egypt<br />

Fatma Hassan, Wilson Odero and Ashley Van Niekerk 92<br />

Abstracts 95<br />

Call for submissions 106<br />

Contents <strong>of</strong> previous issues <strong>of</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion:<br />

A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention<br />

109<br />

Order form 114<br />

ii


Editorial<br />

BUILDING CULTURES OF PEACE:<br />

CONTEXTUAL AND DISCURSIVE<br />

CONSIDERATIONS<br />

Mohamed Seedat 1<br />

Institute for Social and Health Sciences, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

Shahnaaz Suffla<br />

Institute for Counselling, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Western Cape<br />

At a structural level, the history <strong>of</strong> at least the last five centuries suggests that violence is an inherent<br />

feature <strong>of</strong> governance and management <strong>of</strong> geopolitical configurations including empires, monarchies<br />

and nation states, and to the quest for freedom from physical, intellectual and cultural occupation.<br />

Between the 16th and 20th centuries an estimated total <strong>of</strong> 143.8 million people were killed due to<br />

violent conflicts (Sivard, 1991; Sivard, 1996; Zwi, Garfield & Loretti, 2002). Of these at least 6 million<br />

people were killed in the slave trade, and 10 million indigenous Americans were killed by European<br />

colonialists. Of the estimated 1.6 million people who died as a consequence <strong>of</strong> interpersonal, selfinflicted<br />

or collective acts <strong>of</strong> violence in 2000, estimates suggest that approximately 310 000 people<br />

died from war-related injuries, varying according to region and levels <strong>of</strong> economic development<br />

(Krug, Dahlberg, Mercy, Zwi & Lozano, 2002). The World Health Organization (WHO) <strong>Africa</strong>n region<br />

recorded the highest rates <strong>of</strong> war-related deaths at 32 deaths per 100 000 population, followed by 8.2<br />

per 100 000 for the Eastern Mediterranean region, 7.6 per 100 000 for the European region, and 4.4<br />

per 100 000 for the low-middle income (LMIC) <strong>South</strong>-East Asian region. Whereas the overall rate for<br />

high-income countries is 1 per 100 000, the rate for LMICs is 6.2 per 100.000. For the WHO <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

region war, alongside various communicable diseases (e.g. HIV/AIDS, tuberculosis) and noncommunicable<br />

diseases (e.g. ischaemic heart disease), is among the top 15 leading causes <strong>of</strong> death.<br />

Thus, when world history is read alongside injury and war mortality statistics, these may well<br />

corroborate the determinist view that violence is both necessary and intrinsic to human nature and<br />

societies' interpersonal and collective affairs.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Mohamed Seedat, Institute for Social and Health Sciences, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, P.O. Box 1087, Lenasia, 1820,<br />

Johannesburg, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>; Tel: +27 11 857 1142; Fax: +27 11 857 1770; E-mail: seedama@unisa.ac.za<br />

1


In stark contrast, a number <strong>of</strong> voices consciously contest the idea that war and collective violence,<br />

like other forms <strong>of</strong> violence, are necessary and an inevitable result <strong>of</strong> human nature and governance.<br />

Such voices include the World Report on Violence and Health (Krug et al., 2002), various United<br />

Nations declarations on peacekeeping, the peace psychology and <strong>safety</strong> promotion fraternities and<br />

faith-based groups (e.g. Catholic Bishops Conference, Psychologists for Social Responsibility),<br />

scholars and activists (e.g. Christie, Wagner & Winter, 2001; Crow, 2001; Khan, 2001; Noorani,<br />

2002). Despite their ideological and epistemological diversity, for the voices <strong>of</strong> peace and <strong>safety</strong><br />

violence is both predictable and preventable, and therefore its feasibility and utility as an instrument<br />

<strong>of</strong> social control and/or emancipation across different contexts and historical periods merit critical<br />

interrogation. Underlying this implicit call for interrogation is the idea that prevention and predictability<br />

may be discerned through a study <strong>of</strong> the determinants <strong>of</strong> violence and an enhanced articulation <strong>of</strong><br />

the psychosocial, structural, and contextual factors associated with the production <strong>of</strong> violence, and<br />

conversely peace.<br />

Whether the accent is on socio-political structures, individual pathology, learning, criminal intent or<br />

gender inequality, the voices <strong>of</strong> peace and <strong>safety</strong> promotion implicitly (though they may not wish to<br />

acknowledge) place violence and its prevention within the realms <strong>of</strong> human agency, reflexivity and<br />

ethico-normative considerations. In so far as collective violence is constructed as predictable and<br />

preventable, it is located within the realm <strong>of</strong> human agency. Likewise, the focus on the utility and<br />

consequences <strong>of</strong> violence positions violence within our reflexive and ethico-normative domains,<br />

which are not necessarily divorced from ideological and socio-economic issues. When, for instance,<br />

the human rights and anti-war movements opposing the American-British invasion <strong>of</strong> Iraq argue that<br />

the end does not justify the means and stress international rule <strong>of</strong> law, the importance <strong>of</strong> territorial<br />

integrity and self-determination, they tend to project war and violence as unethical, immoral and<br />

illegal.<br />

Ironically, as in other instances <strong>of</strong> war, the American and British governments, however hypocritical,<br />

also invoked principles related to freedom, human rights and democracy to justify the war morally<br />

and to mobilise the requisite public support, albeit limited. When the Anglo-American public began<br />

questioning their respective governments' claims that Iraq was associated with terrorism and<br />

weapons <strong>of</strong> mass destruction, the American government in particular shifted the focus from realpolitick<br />

to exalted moral principles, using catchy idioms and appeals to patriotism. As a self-appointed<br />

guardian <strong>of</strong> world freedom, America assumed moral responsibility to establish freedom, democracy<br />

and human rights even in lands such as Iraq, which are geographically distant from America.<br />

QUESTIONS ABOUT PEACE: UNIVERSALS AND SPECIFICS<br />

Such ethico-normative, dialectical and intra-psychic considerations that call for a rational and<br />

reflexive approach to the (non)deployment <strong>of</strong> violence presents a range <strong>of</strong> questions for peace<br />

promotion activists and researchers in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> and the Indian subcontinent. The First India-<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> Dialogue, held at the <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Delhi under the auspices <strong>of</strong> Delhi <strong>University</strong>'s<br />

Developing Countries Research Centre and <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s Institute for Social and<br />

Health Sciences, focused on interrogating the universals and contextually-bound specifics underlying<br />

the determinants <strong>of</strong> violence and genesis <strong>of</strong> peace, truth and reconciliation. In this issue we bring<br />

together some <strong>of</strong> the key papers that formed the kernel <strong>of</strong> the discussions at the Dialogue, which was<br />

2


centrally focused on ``exploring Afro-Indo solutions in a universal search for peace and <strong>safety</strong>''.<br />

Delegates examined recent and current forms and expressions <strong>of</strong> collective violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

and India; discussed and compared <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n and Indian social and scientific responses to<br />

collective violence; reviewed successes, challenges and lessons discerned from <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> and<br />

India's emerging peace and <strong>safety</strong> promotion cultures; and explored mechanisms for mutuallybeneficial<br />

long-term co-operation around peace and <strong>safety</strong> promotion work in India and <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

The Dialogue, encompassing an exchange <strong>of</strong> views and an attempt at discerning lessons for good<br />

practices for the prevention <strong>of</strong> collective violence and for peacebuilding, enabled a nuanced analysis<br />

<strong>of</strong> collective violence and its impact in both <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> and India (see Duncan and Louis in this<br />

issue). <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s relatively smooth transition to political democracy (see Terre Blanche) and<br />

associated structural mechanisms, such as the Truth and Reconciliation (see Stevens and Gohain),<br />

provided substantive material for comparative analysis. Indian academic and social activists,<br />

concerned about the incomplete project <strong>of</strong> democracy in the Indian subcontinent, generated a great<br />

deal <strong>of</strong> understanding <strong>of</strong> Satyagraha (see Manoranjan) and the violent conflicts in Bihar (see Louis),<br />

north-east India (see Vashum) and Indo-Pakistan and Hindu-Muslim tensions (see Ansari).<br />

These and other papers not included in this issue, which also focused on the struggle for selfdetermination<br />

in Kashmir, undoubtedly raised many questions about the nature and truth <strong>of</strong> conflict,<br />

reconciliation and truth itself. Mohanty, through a critical appropriation <strong>of</strong> Gandhi's Satyagraha,<br />

understood as a process to vindicate the truth and as a peacebuilding strategy on a larger societal<br />

level (Mayton II, 2001), furthers our search for the determinants <strong>of</strong> peace. Consonant with the overall<br />

focus <strong>of</strong> this ASP issue we also bring together a selection <strong>of</strong> abstracts summarising doctoral-level<br />

projects that challenge the public-health oriented researcher and practitioner to consider seriously the<br />

social sciences' and humanities' contributions to the body <strong>of</strong> knowledge focused on peace promotion.<br />

How ever we approach the study <strong>of</strong> violence and its prevention, or conversely peace and peace<br />

promotion, this collection <strong>of</strong> articles clearly points to the need for multi-sectoral engagement, crossglobal<br />

linkages and international collaboration. The crafting <strong>of</strong> peace is undoubtedly a global project<br />

that is responsive to the values <strong>of</strong> inclusiveness, diversity and equity. Accordingly, this issue <strong>of</strong> ASP<br />

is also an attempt to ensure that dominant knowledge traditions and practices are not privileged to<br />

the exclusion <strong>of</strong> those voices marginal to the public health oriented focus on <strong>safety</strong> promotion.<br />

Even though <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s emancipation from apartheid-capitalism remains an unfinished project,<br />

the dismantling <strong>of</strong> political apartheid through protracted negotiations and other modes <strong>of</strong> (in)direct<br />

dialogue and struggle, including cessation <strong>of</strong> violent hostilities, has produced a climate in which lives<br />

and resources otherwise lost in violence can now be invested towards meaningful and substantive<br />

socio-economic justice. The contributors to this issue seem to suggest that in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, as in<br />

India, new and innovative modes <strong>of</strong> engagement need to be found so that the vision <strong>of</strong> peace, justice<br />

and human rights becomes a reality for all, beyond the machinations <strong>of</strong> violence and pseudo-peace<br />

initiatives that are predicated on fear and domination.<br />

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT<br />

The editors thank Dr Manindra Thakur for providing the translations <strong>of</strong> Hindi terms in some <strong>of</strong> the<br />

articles in this issue.<br />

3


REFERENCES<br />

Christie, D.J., Wagner, R.V. & Winter, D.D. (Eds) (2001). Peace, conflict and violence: Peace psychology for<br />

the 21st century. New Jersey: Prentice Hall.<br />

Crow, K.D. (2001). Nurturing Islamic peace discourse. American Journal <strong>of</strong> Islamic Social Sciences, 17(3), 54-<br />

69.<br />

Khan, W. (2001). Islam rediscovered. Discovering Islam from its original sources. New Delhi: Goodword Books.<br />

Krug, E.G., Dahlberg, L.L., Mercy, J.A., Zwi, A.B. & Lozano, R. (Eds) (2002). World report on violence and<br />

health. Geneva: World Health Organization.<br />

Mayton II, D.M. (2001). Gandhi as peacebuilder: The social psychology <strong>of</strong> Satyagraha. In D.J. Christie, R.V.<br />

Wagner & D.D. Winter (Eds), Peace, conflict and violence: Peace psychology for the 21 st century (pp. 307-<br />

313). New Jersey: Prentice Hall.<br />

Noorani, A.G. (2002). Islam and Jihad. New Delhi: Leftwood Books.<br />

Sivard, R.L. (1991). World military and social expenditures (14th ed.). Washington DC: World Priorities.<br />

Sivard, R.L. (1996). World military and social expenditures (16th ed.). Washington DC: World Priorities.<br />

Zwi, A.B., Garfield, R. & Loretti, A. (2002). Collective violence. In E.G. Krug, L.G. Dahlberg, J.A. Mercy, A.B.<br />

Zwi & R. Lazano (Eds), World report on violence and health. Geneva: World Health Organization.<br />

4


Original contributions<br />

UNDERSTANDING COLLECTIVE<br />

VIOLENCE IN APARTHEID AND<br />

POST-APARTHEID SOUTH AFRICA<br />

Norman Duncan 1<br />

Department <strong>of</strong> Psychology, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Witwatersrand<br />

ABSTRACT<br />

The primary aim <strong>of</strong> this article is to explore some <strong>of</strong> the patterns <strong>of</strong> political violence that<br />

characterised the apartheid and post-apartheid periods in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n history, as well as the<br />

attempts to deal with the sequelae <strong>of</strong> these patterns <strong>of</strong> violence. Secondly, the article endeavours to<br />

illustrate how the statistics that we are wont to rely on in making sense <strong>of</strong> political violence, frequently<br />

only present a partial glimpse <strong>of</strong> and in the process lead to misrepresentations <strong>of</strong> the phenomenon.<br />

Thirdly, the article attempts to examine two <strong>of</strong> the key interventions initiated by the post-apartheid<br />

government to deal with the violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s past and present, namely the Truth and<br />

Reconciliation Commission and the Reconstruction and Development Programme. The article<br />

concludes with the observation that, despite their many merits, interventions such as these could not<br />

be adequate to deal with past and extant patterns <strong>of</strong> political violence.<br />

Most <strong>of</strong> the available statistics indicate that fatalities resulting from political violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

(which in this article is seen as one <strong>of</strong> the key forms <strong>of</strong> collective violence that has marred the social<br />

landscape over the last century) increased dramatically during the late 1980s, as well as during the<br />

mid-1990s when <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> was negotiating its transition from the apartheid order to non-racial<br />

democracy (cf. Alence, 1999; <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Institute <strong>of</strong> Race Relations, 2000). Furthermore, as<br />

illustrated in Table 1, the available statistics indicate that following <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s first non-racial,<br />

democratic elections and the installation <strong>of</strong> its first democratic government, instances <strong>of</strong> overt political<br />

violence decreased substantially.<br />

While these statistics embody a glimmer <strong>of</strong> hope to a country, which for a very long period <strong>of</strong> its<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Norman Duncan, Department <strong>of</strong> Psychology, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Witwatersrand, Private Bag X3, P. O. Wits, 2050, <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>; Tel. +27 +11 717-4545; Fax. +27 +11 717- 4559; E-mail: duncann@umthombo.wits.ac.za<br />

5


history has been brutalised and paralysed by all forms <strong>of</strong> collective violence, one should obviously<br />

not accept this and other similar portrayals <strong>of</strong> collective violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> at face value; for as<br />

will be argued in this article, these portrayals <strong>of</strong> collective violence are somewhat partial and<br />

therefore relatively deceptive, both in terms <strong>of</strong> their representation <strong>of</strong> the extent <strong>of</strong> collective violence<br />

during the apartheid period, as well as their representation <strong>of</strong> the actual and potential impact <strong>of</strong> this<br />

violence on contemporary <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society (cf. Simpson, 1993).<br />

Furthermore, it will be argued that the manner in which we recall, reconstruct, represent and deal<br />

with the extent and nature <strong>of</strong> the various forms <strong>of</strong> collective violence that characterised <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

society during the apartheid era, to some extent will determine the potential for new forms <strong>of</strong><br />

collective violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, both currently and in the future.<br />

TABLE 1<br />

Political fatalities<br />

YEAR<br />

TOTAL<br />

1985 879<br />

1986 1298<br />

1987 661<br />

1988 1149<br />

1989 1403<br />

1990 3699<br />

1991 2706<br />

1992 3347<br />

1993 3794<br />

1994 2476<br />

1995 1044<br />

1996 683<br />

1997 470<br />

1998 356<br />

23965<br />

Source: <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Institute <strong>of</strong> Race Relations (SAIRR) (2000)<br />

Before I present these arguments, however, it might be useful to firstly present the definitions <strong>of</strong><br />

violence and collective violence that inform this article.<br />

6


TOWARDS A DEFINITION OF COLLECTIVE VIOLENCE<br />

Indicative <strong>of</strong> the phenomenon's complex and quasi-impalpable nature, the humanities and social and<br />

health sciences have generated a multiplicity <strong>of</strong> definitions <strong>of</strong> violence. While this article <strong>of</strong>fers a<br />

social science analysis <strong>of</strong> collective violence, I have decided to utilise the World Health<br />

Organisation's (2002) definition <strong>of</strong> the phenomenon, even though this definition is located within a<br />

public health framework. This decision is based partly on the fact that this definition is fairly<br />

comprehensive, and partly also because the World Health Organisation (WHO) definition <strong>of</strong>fers a<br />

pragmatic point <strong>of</strong> departure for this article.<br />

In its World Report on Violence and Health, the World Health Organisation (2002) defines violence<br />

as:<br />

the intentional use <strong>of</strong> physical force or power, threatened or actual, against oneself, another<br />

person, or against a group or community, that either results in or has a high likelihood <strong>of</strong> resulting<br />

in injury, death, psychological harm, mal-development or deprivation (p. 4).<br />

Obviously, in the sense that it accommodates both harmful physical force as well as the abuse <strong>of</strong><br />

power (as expressed through coercion and domination) (Schutte, 1994), this definition extends the<br />

coverage <strong>of</strong> the term ``violence'' significantly beyond its earlier fairly narrow applications (cf. Bulhan,<br />

1985; Degenaar, 1990).<br />

Within the framework <strong>of</strong> this definition, the WHO (2002) distinguishes three broad categories <strong>of</strong><br />

violence, namely self-directed violence, interpersonal violence and collective violence. Collective<br />

violence, which constitutes the focus <strong>of</strong> this article, refers to:<br />

the instrumental use <strong>of</strong> violence by people who identify themselves as members <strong>of</strong> a group<br />

against another group ... in order to achieve [certain] political, economic or social objectives (p. 5).<br />

Against the backdrop <strong>of</strong> the broader definition <strong>of</strong> violence provided by the WHO, collective violence in<br />

effect would refer to ``physical force or power'', ``threatened or actual'', exercised with the aim <strong>of</strong><br />

privileging an in-group or in-groups at the expense <strong>of</strong> an out-group or out-groups. As implied in the<br />

latter definition, in terms <strong>of</strong> objectives collective violence can assume a predominantly (though<br />

obviously not exclusively) political, economic and social orientation.<br />

To a certain extent, this definition <strong>of</strong> collective violence overlaps with Bulhan (1985) and Galtung's (in<br />

Degenaar, 1990) notion <strong>of</strong> structural violence. According to Galtung, ``structural violence is present<br />

when human beings are being influenced so that their actual ... [functioning is] below their potential<br />

realizations'' (in Degenaar, 1990, p. 11). Structural violence is built into extant institutional structures,<br />

which through their functioning ensure that certain groups systematically obtain more power and<br />

privileges than others (cf. Bulhan, 1985; Galtung, in Degenaar, 1990). Furthermore, according to<br />

Bulhan (1985):<br />

... structural violence ... imposes a pattern <strong>of</strong> relations and practices that are deeply ingrained in<br />

and dominate everyday living. Individuals are born and socialized into it as victims or perpetrators<br />

and, in the absence <strong>of</strong> a fundamental social change, they play out their ascribed roles ... structural<br />

violence [is] hard to discern because it is very much part <strong>of</strong> social reality ... and everyday practices<br />

(p. 136).<br />

7


However, as will be argued later, and as world history has shown repeatedly, collective violence<br />

rarely goes unopposed by those against whom it is directed. As such, this violence itself can be<br />

considered an important determinant <strong>of</strong> reactive violence, including collective violence.<br />

MANIFESTATIONS OF COLLECTIVE VIOLENCE IN SOUTH AFRICA<br />

We now turn our attention to the anatomy and salient manifestations <strong>of</strong> collective violence during the<br />

apartheid and post-apartheid periods. However, before embarking on the description <strong>of</strong> these<br />

manifestations <strong>of</strong> collective violence, I wish to introduce two caveats.<br />

First, in view <strong>of</strong> the constraints inherent in an article <strong>of</strong> this nature and the divergent nature <strong>of</strong> the<br />

many manifestations <strong>of</strong> collective violence, I will focus only on political violence, and specifically, on<br />

specific manifestations <strong>of</strong> this form <strong>of</strong> collective violence:<br />

a) The attempts by the state to perpetuate or entrench social inequalities by means <strong>of</strong> legislation<br />

and institutional structures (particularly relevant for the discussion <strong>of</strong> the political violence during<br />

the apartheid era).<br />

b) The counter-violence embodied by attempts to challenge these inequalities, as well as the state's<br />

subsequent responses to this violence.<br />

c) Intra- and inter-community violence, motivated by, or resulting from, political factors (Duncan &<br />

Rock, 1997).<br />

Second, because this article departs from the assumption that the reader has a basic knowledge <strong>of</strong><br />

recent <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> history, but also due to space constraints, I will not discuss in any detail many <strong>of</strong><br />

the key historical events and processes that influenced the acts and processes <strong>of</strong> violence to be<br />

examined hereunder.<br />

Manifestations <strong>of</strong> collective violence in apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

State violence<br />

In and <strong>of</strong> itself, the system <strong>of</strong> apartheid embodied one <strong>of</strong> the most pernicious systems <strong>of</strong> political<br />

violence that the modern era has witnessed. As the eminent Somali-American psychologist Hussein<br />

Bulhan (1985) so succinctly put it, apartheid ``was brought into existence and ... maintained by dint <strong>of</strong><br />

violence'' (p. 131) (cf. Cassin, Cayla & Salazar, 2004).<br />

While its manifest objective <strong>of</strong> engendering and maintaining the dominance <strong>of</strong> a white minority over a<br />

black majority provided sufficient cause to typify it as a process <strong>of</strong> collective violence (i.e. in terms <strong>of</strong><br />

the definition <strong>of</strong> collective violence provided earlier), and more specifically, political violence, it is the<br />

political mechanisms and processes that were harnessed to give substance to this objective, which<br />

most powerfully evoke the full extent <strong>of</strong> the destructiveness <strong>of</strong> this system. I present a brief<br />

description <strong>of</strong> some <strong>of</strong> these mechanisms and processes below.<br />

Firstly, as Cassin et al. (2004) and Knox and Quirk (2000) observe, apartheid was vivified through an<br />

8


arsenal <strong>of</strong> laws that codified and bolstered all forms <strong>of</strong> racialised political violence in virtually every<br />

sphere <strong>of</strong> human activity in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. This arsenal included:<br />

a) The Population Registration Act <strong>of</strong> 1950, which allowed for the forced classification <strong>of</strong> people into<br />

one <strong>of</strong> the four so-called `races' identified by the National Party government (namely, `white',<br />

`Indian', `coloured' and `<strong>Africa</strong>n'), and which, moreover, would form the basis <strong>of</strong> the social, political<br />

and economic marginalisation <strong>of</strong> all people not categorised `white'.<br />

b) The Reservation <strong>of</strong> Separate Amenities Act <strong>of</strong> 1953, which reserved the best public amenities<br />

(paid for by taxpayers <strong>of</strong> all the designated `races') for the exclusive use <strong>of</strong> whites.<br />

c) The Group Areas Act <strong>of</strong> 1957, which made separate residential areas compulsory and which saw<br />

millions <strong>of</strong> people evicted from their homes and effectively banished to the notorious apartheidengineered<br />

ghettos and homelands.<br />

d) The Prohibition <strong>of</strong> Mixed Marriages Act <strong>of</strong> 1950, which prohibited marriages between people <strong>of</strong><br />

different `races'.<br />

e) The Extension <strong>of</strong> <strong>University</strong> Act <strong>of</strong> 1957, which effectively prevented blacks from attending all the<br />

national universities and banished them to a few under-resourced facilities reserved for members<br />

<strong>of</strong> their different `races'.<br />

These laws allowed for the development <strong>of</strong> a regime <strong>of</strong> excessive privilege for whites and a situation<br />

<strong>of</strong> utter destitution and hardship for the overwhelming majority <strong>of</strong> black 1 <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns. As Chikane<br />

(1986) observed in the mid-1980s, being black in apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> meant being subjected to<br />

one <strong>of</strong> the most pervasive systems <strong>of</strong> collective violence, which manifested itself in the squalid,<br />

crime-infested ghettos, widespread malnutrition, poor or non-existent health systems, poor education<br />

in ill-equipped and overcrowded schools, inadequate or non-existent social security, the constant<br />

threat <strong>of</strong> forced evictions, high levels <strong>of</strong> unemployment and quotidian experiences <strong>of</strong> racist prejudice<br />

and abuse (Duncan & Rock, 1997). The list is virtually endless. Nonetheless, for illustrative purposes<br />

it might be useful to briefly consider some <strong>of</strong> the consequences <strong>of</strong> the institutionalised violence <strong>of</strong><br />

apartheid more closely.<br />

It is estimated that by 1983 the lives <strong>of</strong> no fewer than 3.5 million people had been disrupted as a<br />

result <strong>of</strong> the forced removals ensuing from the state's endeavours to forcefully segregate <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n society (Simpson, 1993). Furthermore, in 1986, according to a study conducted jointly by the<br />

United Nations Children's Fund (UNICEF) and the National Children's Rights Commission (NCRC),<br />

while the child mortality was 0.9 per 1000 for whites, it was 7 per 1000 for <strong>Africa</strong>ns. Along similar<br />

lines, in 1994 it was reported that while the average infant mortality rate for whites was 10.8 per<br />

1000, it was 74 per 1000 for <strong>Africa</strong>ns (UNICEF & NCRC, 1993). Additionally, one study found that<br />

black children were between 14 and 15 times more likely to die before their fifth birthday, directly as a<br />

result <strong>of</strong> the harsh living conditions to which blacks were subjected in apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

(Dowdall, 1990). In a study completed during the early 1990s, Hickson and Kriegler (in Duncan &<br />

Rock, 1997) found that 50% <strong>of</strong> infant deaths in black communities were due to malnutrition-related<br />

diseases. Various studies also point to the fact that the stresses <strong>of</strong> apartheid oppression so severely<br />

compromised the functioning <strong>of</strong> black communities that many <strong>of</strong> these communities themselves<br />

became so pathogenically violent as to generally compromise the overall psychological wellbeing <strong>of</strong><br />

their members (Duncan & Rock, 1997; SAIRR, 1999).<br />

9


Counter-violence<br />

In essence, apartheid gave rise to and fed on the brutalisation <strong>of</strong> black communities. To a certain<br />

extent, this brutalisation can be seen as having been a precondition for the functioning and<br />

perpetuation <strong>of</strong> apartheid; because in order to perpetuate itself, this system had to orchestrate the<br />

creation <strong>of</strong> subaltern groups that were so brutalised and vulnerable that they could be threatened and<br />

cowed into accepting their own subordinate position in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society without too much protest<br />

(Duncan & Rock, 1997).<br />

However, if there is one characteristic that most forms <strong>of</strong> political violence have in common (no<br />

matter how extreme they are), it is that they inevitably provoke various forms <strong>of</strong> counter-violence from<br />

those whom they seek to subjugate. This was the case with apartheid as well. Since its inception this<br />

system was under constant attack (Duncan & Rock, 1997). As a noted <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n academic<br />

observed during the 1980s, the system <strong>of</strong> apartheid spawned ``a violent society with violent laws ...<br />

[that] invites violence'', a situation which he argued, served as sufficient justification by many for the<br />

use <strong>of</strong> various acts <strong>of</strong> physical counter-violence (Boesak, cited in Duncan & Rock, 1997, p. 57).<br />

Paradoxically, this violence had a pr<strong>of</strong>ound effect not only on the apartheid system against which it<br />

was aimed, but also on the lives <strong>of</strong> the victims <strong>of</strong> this system. For example, the social dislocation<br />

unavoidably provoked by this violence severely disrupted the schooling <strong>of</strong> many children, as well as<br />

their access to the meagre health and social services ordinarily at their disposal (Duncan & Rock,<br />

1997). Then too, until the late 1980s, it led to many young people leaving the country to undergo<br />

military training; and in the 1990s it resulted in many people, including countless children and<br />

adolescents, being inducted into various so-called self-defence units throughout the country (Duncan<br />

& Rock, 1997; Mlazi, 1994).<br />

State repression<br />

Like other systems <strong>of</strong> oppression, the apartheid system employed a range <strong>of</strong> repressive measures in<br />

order to control dissent. These included house arrest, imprisonment without trial, countless states <strong>of</strong><br />

emergency, and the routine military occupation <strong>of</strong> black residential areas (Duncan & Rock, 1997).<br />

It is estimated that over 80 000 people were imprisoned without trial between 1960 and 1994. Of<br />

these, over 10 000 were subjected to various forms <strong>of</strong> psychological and physical abuse or to outright<br />

torture (Coleman, 1994). Thousands eventually were tried in the apartheid state's courts <strong>of</strong> law and<br />

imprisoned. Many received life or death sentences.<br />

Furthermore, it is reported that from 1974 to 1989 some 300 attempted assassinations <strong>of</strong> various<br />

leading anti-apartheid activists by covert state-sponsored `hit squads' took place both within and<br />

beyond the borders <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. At least 100 <strong>of</strong> these assassination attempts were successful<br />

(Coleman, 1994).<br />

No one was exempt from these repressive measures Ð not even children (Human Rights<br />

Commission, 1993). Indeed, after the 1976 Soweto uprisings in which children emerged as important<br />

actors in the anti-apartheid struggle, the state's repression <strong>of</strong> children intensified to levels rarely<br />

witnessed in recent world history (Human Rights Commission, 1993; Straker, 1994), except perhaps<br />

in occupied Palestine (Punamaki, 1987). Research reveals that, until 1990, children consistently<br />

10


constituted between 25% and 46.5% <strong>of</strong> all awaiting-trial political prisoners held by the security forces.<br />

Of these, 25% were aged 16 years and younger and 6.13% were 14 years <strong>of</strong> age and younger.<br />

Some <strong>of</strong> these prisoners were as young as 7 years <strong>of</strong> age (Duncan & Rock, 1997).<br />

The interregnum <strong>of</strong> 1990 to 1994<br />

The apartheid state's use <strong>of</strong> repressive measures to deal with its opponents continued relentlessly<br />

until at least 1990, which in many respects was considered a watershed year in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s<br />

troubled history. It will be remembered that it was during this year that Nelson Mandela was released<br />

from prison, and that the <strong>Africa</strong>n National Congress (ANC), the Pan <strong>Africa</strong>n Congress (PAC) and<br />

various other restricted anti-apartheid organisations were unbanned (Duvenage, 1994; Knox & Quirk,<br />

2000). Furthermore, the year 1990 is generally regarded as the year that introduced the period <strong>of</strong><br />

transition between apartheid rule and the introduction <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s first non-racial democratic<br />

government.<br />

Importantly, however, 1990 also announced a fundamental shift in the nature <strong>of</strong> the predominant<br />

forms <strong>of</strong> political violence on the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n socio-political landscape. Whereas prior to 1990 the<br />

origins and nature <strong>of</strong> the predominant forms <strong>of</strong> political violence in large part were fairly clearly<br />

identifiable, after 1990 this was not readily the case. As Knox and Quirk (2000, pp. 153-154) so<br />

poignantly observe:<br />

Between 1990 and 1994 <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> roller-coastered between the highs <strong>of</strong> political agreements<br />

to the lows <strong>of</strong> countless massacres and levels <strong>of</strong> violence in a land already scorched by<br />

bloodshed [...] The nature <strong>of</strong> political violence was transformed from a primarily overt conflict<br />

between the regime and the forces <strong>of</strong> liberation, to a more entangled fight among a variety <strong>of</strong><br />

players with disparate motives, tactics and objectives.<br />

Indeed, during the early 1990s, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> experienced what many political commentators referred<br />

to as a low-intensity war within black residential areas, particularly in the Gauteng and KwaZulu-Natal<br />

provinces <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (cf. Coleman, 1994). Virtually on a daily basis the news media were filled<br />

with reports <strong>of</strong> bomb blasts, internecine battles in townships, and the assassination <strong>of</strong> influential<br />

political figures. Most <strong>of</strong> the victims <strong>of</strong> these incidents were black.<br />

It is frequently posited that the serious social and political dislocations caused by political violence<br />

(and for that matter, all forms <strong>of</strong> collective violence) allow for the expression <strong>of</strong> various other forms <strong>of</strong><br />

violence (Simpson, 1993). This certainly appears to have been the case in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> between<br />

1990 and 1994, with reports <strong>of</strong> dramatic increases in child abuse, homicide, violence against women<br />

and incidents <strong>of</strong> taxi violence, particularly within black communities (Duncan & Rock, 1997; Penn-<br />

Kekana, 1997; Simpson, 1993). For example, Simpson (1993) recorded an increase <strong>of</strong> nearly 6000<br />

criminally motivated murders from 1991 to 1992 (i.e. from 14 693 in 1991, to 20 135 in 1992).<br />

While the effects <strong>of</strong> the violence that came to characterise this period were certainly not any more<br />

pernicious than other forms <strong>of</strong> political violence that characterised <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> prior to the 1990s, the<br />

expression <strong>of</strong> this violence was so excessively brutal and unpredictable that it led many to fear that,<br />

just as the fruits <strong>of</strong> the extended struggle against apartheid (i.e. non-racial democracy) came within<br />

sight, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> was slipping inexorably into the abyss <strong>of</strong> civil warfare and anarchy. Moreover, the<br />

11


fact that the origins and logic <strong>of</strong> this wave <strong>of</strong> violence were not readily apparent (Simpson, 1993)<br />

reinforced fears that it would be impossible to arrest its escalation (Knox & Quirk, 2000).<br />

Many political analysts typified this wave <strong>of</strong> political violence as `black on black' violence.<br />

Furthermore, because it <strong>of</strong>ten involved members <strong>of</strong> the Inkatha Freedom Party (IFP) and the ANC, it<br />

was frequently characterised as a party political battle for supremacy on the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n political<br />

landscape. However, the fact that this violence spread beyond what were considered IFP and ANC<br />

strongholds called this characterisation into question (Knox & Quirk, 2000). Indeed, many analysts<br />

suggested that it was instigated by various right-wing groups, as well as by conservative elements<br />

within the apartheid government and its security establishment in an effort to ensure that white<br />

political domination would continue after the 1994 elections (Coleman, 1994; Knox & Quirk, 2000;<br />

Zulu, 1994). As Coleman (1994, p. 143) argued, the ``major players in this violence'' could only have<br />

been ``those who had most to lose the apartheid government [and] the security establishment''. To a<br />

certain extent, this perception in fact found some resonance and justification in the following<br />

observation contained in the Second Interim Report <strong>of</strong> the Goldstone Commission <strong>of</strong> Inquiry into<br />

Public Violence:<br />

A police force and army which, for many decades have been used as instruments <strong>of</strong> oppression<br />

by successive white governments in maintaining a society predicated upon racial segregation. A<br />

history over some years <strong>of</strong> state complicity in undercover activities which include criminal conduct.<br />

Those activities have enabled critics <strong>of</strong> the government and others, fairly or unfairly, to place the<br />

blame for much <strong>of</strong> the violence at the door <strong>of</strong> the security forces. That and the well-documented<br />

criminal conduct <strong>of</strong> members <strong>of</strong> the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Police and the KwaZulu Police exacerbate the<br />

perception <strong>of</strong> many <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns that the government or its agencies are active parties<br />

responsible for the violence (Goldstone, cited in Zulu, 1994, p. 154).<br />

However, other commentators have argued somewhat more persuasively that rather than being<br />

attributable to a single factor, this violence was more likely to have been a result <strong>of</strong> a complex<br />

interaction <strong>of</strong> sinister forces within the apartheid state, political brinkmanship, provocateurism from<br />

many quarters, the scarcity <strong>of</strong> resources, unemployment, and sheer criminal opportunism (Knox &<br />

Quirk, 2000; Simpson, 1993).<br />

Nonetheless, whatever the causes <strong>of</strong> this violence, the loss <strong>of</strong> human life and the physical and<br />

psychological scars that it gave rise to were staggering. According to the National Children's Rights<br />

Commission (NCRC) (1994), between 1990 and 1993, some 45 000 children were displaced as a<br />

result <strong>of</strong> political violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s Gauteng and KwaZulu-Natal provinces alone.<br />

Furthermore, during the period spanning 1990 and 1994, an estimated 12 000 people were killed 2 ,<br />

20 000 were injured and 30 000 were arrested as a result <strong>of</strong> political violence (Coleman, 1994;<br />

Duncan & Rock, 1997).<br />

Obviously, the figures provided above should not be allowed to shroud or play down the devastating<br />

impact <strong>of</strong> the various forms <strong>of</strong> political violence that characterised the period preceding 1990. In fact,<br />

disaggregating the violence <strong>of</strong> the interregnum <strong>of</strong> 1990 to 1994 from its socially disruptive historical<br />

antecedents would not only be a-historical, but also misleading. Very importantly too, we should<br />

guard against perceiving these statistics as <strong>of</strong>fering a sufficiently representative portrayal <strong>of</strong> the range<br />

and extent <strong>of</strong> the political violence that typified the early 1990s, for they do not (cf. Simpson, 1993).<br />

12


Statistics on pre-1994 political violence: Partial at best<br />

The statistics contained in this article, like the many other similar extant compendia <strong>of</strong> statistical data<br />

collected by various researchers over the years cannot even begin to convey the full extent and<br />

range <strong>of</strong> the collective violence that <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> witnessed during the pre-1994 era. This is partly a<br />

result <strong>of</strong> the fact that much <strong>of</strong> the statistical information on political violence during the pre-1994<br />

period, at best, merely presents informed approximations <strong>of</strong> the extent and nature <strong>of</strong> the political<br />

violence that characterised the apartheid order (Simpson, 1994). As many researchers will readily<br />

admit, it was virtually impossible to obtain reliable and comprehensive statistical information <strong>of</strong> any<br />

sort, particularly on political violence, during the apartheid era. There were many reasons for this, key<br />

<strong>of</strong> which are as follows.<br />

First, the `culture <strong>of</strong> secrecy' cultivated and perpetuated by the apartheid state, particularly prior to<br />

1990s, resulted in the routine concealment or suppression <strong>of</strong> what the state held out as `politically<br />

sensitive' information. This resulted in the distortion <strong>of</strong> much <strong>of</strong> the available statistical data on<br />

political violence (Duncan & Rock, 1997). Indeed, various researchers have demonstrated how<br />

<strong>of</strong>ficial statistics were routinely recorded and represented by the apartheid state in a manner that<br />

systematically underplayed or minimised the full extent <strong>of</strong> the impact <strong>of</strong> Ð state-inspired Ð political<br />

violence (Duncan & Rock, 1997). For example, Fourie (in Duncan & Rock, 1997) maintains that in<br />

the reports routinely released by the state on the numbers <strong>of</strong> child detainees in state facilities,<br />

statistics related to children detained for periods shorter than one month were regularly omitted,<br />

which significantly decreased the number <strong>of</strong> child detainees reflected in government records.<br />

The second reason for the inadequacy <strong>of</strong> pre-1994 statistics on political violence identified by Madela<br />

and Poggenpoel (in Duncan & Rock, 1997) is that <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n researchers generally were relatively<br />

reluctant to undertake any research which would have exposed the violence and other excesses <strong>of</strong><br />

the apartheid state, as this had the potential to expose them to the wrath <strong>of</strong> the state and its security<br />

apparatus. Cases such as that involving the cold-blooded assassination <strong>of</strong> the <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Witwatersrand academic, David Webster 3 (Amnesty International, 1992; Nott, 1994), indicates that<br />

the apartheid state and its agents dealt extremely ruthlessly with those researchers whom it<br />

considered to be a threat to the status quo.<br />

The third reason was linked to the extent <strong>of</strong> the violence that characterised the apartheid era.<br />

According to Mkhize (1993), the extremely high levels <strong>of</strong> collective violence in apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>,<br />

together with other forms <strong>of</strong> violence, led to fairly high levels <strong>of</strong> ``violence tolerance'' (p. 7) in <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n society. This desensitisation to and, to a certain extent, `naturalisation' <strong>of</strong> violence effectively<br />

led to significant under-reporting <strong>of</strong> the incidence <strong>of</strong> collective violence in general, and political<br />

violence specifically (Duncan & Rock, 1993).<br />

Nonetheless, no matter how comprehensive the available statistical information may be, and despite<br />

its proven utility, such information can never tell the full story; simply because it can never adequately<br />

describe the incalculable social and psychological costs <strong>of</strong> collective violence (Simpson, 1993). For<br />

example, statistics cannot describe the pain that many families endured on learning <strong>of</strong> the death <strong>of</strong><br />

one or more <strong>of</strong> their members at the hands <strong>of</strong> the apartheid government's security forces or vigilante<br />

groups, nor can it really describe the harm done to millions <strong>of</strong> black children who were condemned to<br />

a life <strong>of</strong> poverty and deprivation directly as a result <strong>of</strong> apartheid. Statistics can certainly not convey<br />

13


the despair experienced by parents forced to watch their children wasting away as a result <strong>of</strong><br />

preventable illnesses and malnutrition. Statistics also would not be able to capture the sense <strong>of</strong> loss<br />

and destitution that so many <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns must undoubtedly have experienced on witnessing their<br />

homes flattened by apartheid's bulldozers to make way for white residential areas. Statistical data<br />

alone would also not be able to capture the terror that many child political detainees must have<br />

experienced on being thrown into prison with hardened criminals for indefinite periods <strong>of</strong> time.<br />

Statistical data certainly also would not be able to describe the marks left on the psyche <strong>of</strong><br />

generations <strong>of</strong> people as a result <strong>of</strong> their quotidian exposure to the patent malignancy <strong>of</strong> the racist<br />

prejudice, vilification and persecution engendered by apartheid.<br />

Very importantly too, as Simpson (1993, p. 3) notes, as useful as statistical data may be:<br />

It could be argued that the picture which is painted in statistical terms has the ironic effect <strong>of</strong><br />

numbing us to the human suffering which statistics ostensibly convey Ð instead <strong>of</strong> guiding us in<br />

the development <strong>of</strong> the remedial and preventative steps which need to be taken.<br />

Manifestations <strong>of</strong> collective violence in post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

With its first non-racial democratic national elections in April 1994, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> entered a new period<br />

in its history. In the words <strong>of</strong> Knox and Quirk (2000, p. 177), these elections were not so much ``a<br />

victory for individual political parties'' as a triumph <strong>of</strong> democracy over the institutionalised and<br />

genocidal violence <strong>of</strong> the apartheid order.<br />

On reading this statement by Knox and Quirk (2000), we obviously have to ask ourselves whether we<br />

have really triumphed over the political violence intrinsic to apartheid. The inadequacy <strong>of</strong> the<br />

available statistical information makes an unequivocal response to this question difficult.<br />

Nonetheless, if by political violence, we are merely referring to the gruesome incidents <strong>of</strong> police,<br />

military, right-wing and vigilante violence that characterised <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society until 1994, then<br />

certainly <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, for the moment, has triumphed over the collective violence intrinsic to the<br />

apartheid order. For example, after 1994, instances <strong>of</strong> right-wing, vigilante and other forms <strong>of</strong> political<br />

violence decreased substantially (Alence, 1999; SAIRR, 1999). Specifically, Alence (1999) found that<br />

while, on average, 3000 people were killed per year directly as a result <strong>of</strong> political violence during the<br />

1990 to 1994 period, the average number <strong>of</strong> political fatalities for the period 1995 to 1997 was<br />

approximately 75% lower than the 1990 to 1994 period. While there was a brief upsurge in reported<br />

incidents <strong>of</strong> political violence at the time <strong>of</strong> the 1999 general elections, with various political leaders<br />

(particularly from the United Democratic Movement) losing their lives, in general, there has been a<br />

consistent downward trend in political violence since 1994 (Alence, 1999). Nonetheless, as was<br />

amply illustrated at the beginning <strong>of</strong> this century, the possibility <strong>of</strong> a resurgence <strong>of</strong> organised violence<br />

from white supremacist right-wing groups remains an ever-present threat (Nkuta & Boyle, 2002;<br />

Potgieter, 2002).<br />

Furthermore, the ongoing reports <strong>of</strong> vigilante violence in opposition to the high levels <strong>of</strong> crime that<br />

have come to characterise <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society speaks to <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns' easy resort to violence as<br />

a means to solving socio-political problems (Dixon & Johns, 2001; SAIRR, 1999). Certainly, vigilante<br />

action is most frequently represented (both by the media and the state) as fundamentally criminal in<br />

14


intent and consequence. However, the fact that, in this country, much <strong>of</strong> the criminal activity against<br />

which vigilante violence is directed is, in part, a result <strong>of</strong> past political practices; the fact that the<br />

perception exists that crime has reached the levels that it has because <strong>of</strong> the actions or inaction <strong>of</strong><br />

the political elite (Alence, 1999; Alence & Pimstone, 1999); as well as the fact that the current high<br />

levels <strong>of</strong> crime in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> are frequently harnessed as a rallying point by political parties<br />

(particularly on the right <strong>of</strong> the political spectrum), in essence, renders such vigilante violence<br />

potentially political in nature (Alence, 1999).<br />

Moreover, if our definition <strong>of</strong> political violence includes Bulhan's (1985) notion <strong>of</strong> structural violence,<br />

then certainly <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> has been less than successful in dealing with the violence <strong>of</strong> apartheid.<br />

Recent research indicates that the racialised poverty trends and institutionalised systems <strong>of</strong> privilege<br />

established under the apartheid order are still firmly entrenched. For example, research undertaken<br />

by May, Woolard and Klasen (2000) indicate that blacks, and particularly <strong>Africa</strong>ns, continue to be<br />

significantly over-represented amongst the poorest sectors <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society, with 61.7% and<br />

38.2% <strong>of</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns and `coloureds', respectively, being poor, as opposed to 1% <strong>of</strong> whites. Along<br />

similar lines, Foer (1997) found that, by the latter half <strong>of</strong> the 1990s, the income <strong>of</strong> the average black<br />

person was approximately one-sixth that <strong>of</strong> his or her white counterpart.<br />

In 1996, two years after the installation <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s first democratic government, more than 1<br />

million <strong>Africa</strong>n households were still accommodated in informal or squatter dwellings, as opposed to<br />

912 white households (SAIRR, 2000). Furthermore, available statistics indicate that while the infant<br />

mortality rate for whites currently stands at 7 per 100 000, it is 54 per 100 000 for <strong>Africa</strong>ns.<br />

Additionally, while the life expectancy for white women and men is 76 and 69 years, respectively, it is<br />

67 and 69 years for <strong>Africa</strong>n women and men, respectively (Budlender, 2000). Furthermore, May et<br />

al.'s (2000) research indicates that while whites score fairly high (and on a par with Canadians, for<br />

example) on the United Nations Development Programme's Human Development Index (HDI),<br />

<strong>Africa</strong>ns have a fairly low rating on the HDI Ð lower in fact than that <strong>of</strong> the national average <strong>of</strong> a<br />

country as poor as Swaziland. In effect, as <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s President, Thabo Mbeki, has so<br />

persuasively argued, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> comprises two nations, one enjoying standards <strong>of</strong> living<br />

comparable to those <strong>of</strong> many industrialised countries, and one enduring standards <strong>of</strong> living<br />

comparable to those <strong>of</strong> countries inordinately poorer than <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

Measures employed by the post-apartheid government to deal with political<br />

violence and its effects<br />

Following the euphoria <strong>of</strong> the 1994 elections, the newly installed government <strong>of</strong> national unity<br />

introduced various interventions aimed at addressing the political violence discussed in the preceding<br />

pages. I will very briefly consider two <strong>of</strong> these interventions here, namely, the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth and<br />

Reconciliation Commission (TRC) and the Reconstruction and Development Programme (RDP).<br />

Established by means <strong>of</strong> the Promotion <strong>of</strong> National Unity and Reconciliation Act (Act 34) <strong>of</strong> 1995<br />

(Cassin et al., 2004), the TRC's primary brief was to provide as ``complete a picture as possible <strong>of</strong> the<br />

nature, causes and extent <strong>of</strong> gross human rights violations committed during apartheid'' (Knox &<br />

Quirk, 2000, p. 178). One <strong>of</strong> the key implicit objectives <strong>of</strong> the TRC was to ``allow <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns to<br />

15


transcend the social divisions and tensions engineered by the past apartheid order'' (Magwaza,<br />

2001, p. 37), and thereby to add to initiatives aimed at national reconciliation and at minimising the<br />

possibility <strong>of</strong> future collective conflict and national instability.<br />

One <strong>of</strong> the RDP's primary objectives was to contribute to the elimination <strong>of</strong> some <strong>of</strong> the key racialised<br />

inequalities characteristic <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society (Knox & Quirk, 2000; Rabbani, 1994; RDP White<br />

Paper, 1994). Consequently, access to adequate housing, employment, educational and health care<br />

facilities, and the overall state <strong>of</strong> the economy featured amongst the key problem areas that the RDP<br />

was to address. For obvious reasons, most indigent and marginalised black communities welcomed<br />

the programme.<br />

Knox and Quirk (2000) point out that in the initial documentation on the RDP, the link between the<br />

racialised inequalities in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society and the potential for collective violence or instability<br />

was articulated as one <strong>of</strong> the key motives for the establishment <strong>of</strong> the RDP (cf. Rabbani, 1994;<br />

Tshotsho, 2005).<br />

To what extent have these interventions succeeded in dealing with the collective<br />

violence generated by apartheid?<br />

The Truth and Reconciliation Commission<br />

From the outset the conceptualisation, scope and functioning <strong>of</strong> the TRC were subjected to intense<br />

criticism from various quarters because <strong>of</strong> their inherent shortcomings (Derrida, 2004; Knox & Quirk,<br />

2000; Magwaza, 2001; SAIRR, 1999; see Stevens in this issue). In a critical reflection on the TRC,<br />

John Daniels (in Knox & Quirk, 2000), the TRC head <strong>of</strong> research in Durban, identified two <strong>of</strong> the<br />

more important <strong>of</strong> these shortcomings. The first was related to the time frame covered by the TRC,<br />

and the second to the definition <strong>of</strong> `gross human rights violations'.<br />

According to Daniels, the fact that the TRC's brief was limited to examining only those atrocities<br />

committed between 1960 and 1994, meant that some <strong>of</strong> the worst acts <strong>of</strong> political violence committed<br />

by the apartheid state effectively fell beyond the scrutiny <strong>of</strong> this institution. In the process, therefore, a<br />

sufficiently comprehensive examination and analysis <strong>of</strong> the extent and impact <strong>of</strong> the various forms <strong>of</strong><br />

political violence engendered by apartheid, for all intents and purposes, were precluded (cf. Cassin et<br />

al., 2004). Secondly, Daniels (in Knox & Quirk, 2000, p. 179) argues, the narrow definition <strong>of</strong> gross<br />

human rights violations as ``the killing, abduction, torture or severe ill-treatment <strong>of</strong> any person or any<br />

attempt, conspiracy, incitement, instigation, command or procurement to commit an act <strong>of</strong> killing,<br />

abduction, torture or severe ill-treatment'', precluded not only the examination <strong>of</strong> all the variants <strong>of</strong><br />

political violence spawned by apartheid, but also <strong>of</strong> the system <strong>of</strong> apartheid itself as a crime against<br />

humanity (cf. Cassin et al., 2004).<br />

Both these limitations, together with the widespread belief amongst many marginalised black<br />

communities (particularly those with less `sensational' or `mediatisable' stories to tell) that the TRC<br />

processes further marginalised them, obviously undermined the potential <strong>of</strong> the TRC to serve as a<br />

vehicle for reconciliation (Dixon & Johns, 2001). Furthermore, the perception on the part <strong>of</strong> many<br />

whites that the TRC was prejudiced against whites and persecutory (Knox & Quirk, 2000), obviously<br />

16


also substantially decreased the possibility that they would take ownership <strong>of</strong> and responsibility for<br />

their history, thereby decreasing the remembrance and reconciliatory functions <strong>of</strong> the TRC (cf.<br />

Duvenage, 1994; Simpson, 1994).<br />

Magwaza (2001) argues that the acknowledgement <strong>of</strong> the history <strong>of</strong> intense violence visited on<br />

blacks and opponents <strong>of</strong> the apartheid system for the benefit <strong>of</strong> whites was important, not only to<br />

signal a break with the ``ethos <strong>of</strong> secrecy and silence'' that was so viciously imposed on <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>ns by the former apartheid government, but also to prevent ``a recurrence <strong>of</strong> human rights<br />

violations to the horrific extent that we had witnessed during the apartheid era'' (Magwaza, 2001, p.<br />

37).<br />

Along similar lines, Knox and Quirk (2000) argue that the fact that the TRC did not allow for a full<br />

recovery or disclosure <strong>of</strong> past atrocities committed against large sectors <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society (cf.<br />

Dixon & Johns, 2001), to a certain extent, does in fact open the way for attempts to deny and distort<br />

the violence <strong>of</strong> apartheid. This then creates the possibility for many whites, who now defensively<br />

reason that nothing wrong had occurred in the past or that apartheid was `simply an ill-conceived<br />

political system that had gone wrong', to feel that current processes aimed at redressing the damage<br />

caused by apartheid are unfair to them (Duvenage, 1994; Simpson, 1993). Duvenage identifies a<br />

range <strong>of</strong> reasons for this ``evasiveness'' or defensiveness on the part <strong>of</strong> whites, including fear <strong>of</strong><br />

confronting the atrocities <strong>of</strong> the past and abject racism.<br />

Whatever the causes may be for this denial <strong>of</strong> the violence <strong>of</strong> apartheid, it is indisputable that it<br />

contributes significantly to a discursive context in which it becomes easy for political and social<br />

conservatism and white right-wing political violence (inter alia) to be justified, as was amply illustrated<br />

on various radio talk shows and in newspaper reports following the bombings in Soweto on the<br />

outskirts <strong>of</strong> Johannesburg, and Bronkhorstspruit in the province <strong>of</strong> Mpumalanga, allegedly<br />

perpetrated by right-wing supremacist groups at the end <strong>of</strong> 2002 (cf. Potgieter, 2002). Consider here,<br />

for example, the following article published by Associated Press (Nessman, 2002, n.p.):<br />

While the violence is condemned by all but the most extreme Afrikaners, many say it should send<br />

a message to the black-led government that it can no longer ignore their problems [...] ``There is a<br />

lot <strong>of</strong> frustration,'' said Pieter Mulder, leader <strong>of</strong> the right wing Freedom Front party. ``Slowly, we are<br />

losing out [...] I must be honest and say that we are moving in the wrong direction.'' [...] A poll<br />

published this year ... said 87 percent <strong>of</strong> Afrikaners felt racism against them was a serious<br />

problem.<br />

This leads to one <strong>of</strong> the principal arguments that I want to put forward here.<br />

The unwillingness and inability on the part <strong>of</strong> many <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns to acknowledge and deal with one<br />

<strong>of</strong> the most violent epochs in its history, namely the apartheid era, precludes any possibility <strong>of</strong><br />

genuine reconciliation amongst <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns, and consequently, allows for the perpetuation <strong>of</strong> the<br />

deep divisions in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society (Duvenage, 1994). In the process, the door is left wide open<br />

for the repetition or re-enactment <strong>of</strong> various forms <strong>of</strong> political violence. Yes, the statistics indicate that<br />

with the advent <strong>of</strong> the current democratic dispensation political violence had decreased substantially<br />

(Alence, 1999). However, through the amnesia that has been allowed to develop in respect <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong><br />

17


<strong>Africa</strong>'s violent past, a space has perhaps been created for such violence to be re-inflicted on this<br />

country. In the words <strong>of</strong> Desmond Tutu, the Chairperson <strong>of</strong> the TRC:<br />

The ... reason amnesia simply will not do is that the past refuses to lie down quietly. It has an<br />

uncanny habit <strong>of</strong> returning to haunt one ... the past [must be] properly dealt with for the sake <strong>of</strong> the<br />

future (in Grunebaum-Ralph, 2001, p. 202).<br />

The Reconstruction and Development Programme<br />

Knox and Quirk (2000) argue that from the outset, the RDP was hard pressed to balance the need to<br />

eliminate the racialised inequalities in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society, whilst ensuring minimal loss <strong>of</strong> economic<br />

privileges within the white community. Additionally, it had to satisfy the demands <strong>of</strong> global capital to<br />

limit social expenditure. By 1996, however, it became clear that, for a range <strong>of</strong> reasons, the<br />

government was not going to meet many <strong>of</strong> the RDP's targets within the envisaged time period; and<br />

during the same year, the RDP <strong>of</strong>fice was closed down (cf. Economist, 1996; Government Gazette<br />

No. 19403, 1998; Knox & Quirk, 2000). This was a heavy blow to the aspirations <strong>of</strong> many poor<br />

communities. Responding to the closure <strong>of</strong> the RDP <strong>of</strong>fice, Interfund (1996, in Knox & Quirk, 2000, p.<br />

187) noted:<br />

The symbolic importance <strong>of</strong> the RDP <strong>of</strong>fice as representative <strong>of</strong> the government's commitment to<br />

development has meant that the closure [<strong>of</strong> the <strong>of</strong>fice] is read as a signal that the government was<br />

now giving less visibility and focus to issues concerning development and more <strong>of</strong> a focus to the<br />

business <strong>of</strong> economics.<br />

The government's subsequent focus on its macro economic plan, namely, the Growth, Employment<br />

and Redistributive Strategy (GEAR), with its strong emphasis on fiscal conservatism and, therefore,<br />

on downscaling social spending, reinforced the growing impression that the basic developmental and<br />

corrective action values underlying the formulation <strong>of</strong> the RDP in fact had been relinquished (Knox &<br />

Quirk, 2000).<br />

With the apparent abandonment <strong>of</strong> the `equalising' principles <strong>of</strong> the RDP (Knox & Quirk, 2000), as<br />

well as the fact that the racialised poverty trends established during the apartheid era on the surface<br />

continue unaltered, it can be argued that the structural violence <strong>of</strong> apartheid remains firmly<br />

embedded in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society. Thus, even though the statistics indicate that incidents <strong>of</strong> overt<br />

physical acts <strong>of</strong> political violence had decreased, at the level <strong>of</strong> `everyday practices' (cf. Bulhan,<br />

1985), it is continuing unabated, and in the process, further entrenching the divisions within <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n society and laying the foundations for the re-emergence <strong>of</strong> the forms <strong>of</strong> overt political violence<br />

which this country hopes that it had buried in its past.<br />

Certainly, there is a range <strong>of</strong> noteworthy achievements that are associated with the TRC and the<br />

RDP. However, for the reasons outlined in this article and elsewhere (e.g. Knox & Quirk, 2000;<br />

Magwaza, 2001; SAIRR, 1999), these interventions have fallen short <strong>of</strong> what was required to address<br />

the ills inflicted by apartheid on <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society. Furthermore, the fact that the violence <strong>of</strong> the<br />

past has not been dealt with adequately obviously leaves this country vulnerable to various new<br />

manifestations <strong>of</strong> violence (particularly political violence) in the future. If the recent spate <strong>of</strong> violent<br />

protests against the shameful lack <strong>of</strong> accommodation and municipal services experienced by indigent<br />

18


communities is anything to go by (see, for example, Johnson, 2005; SAPA, 2005) we are already<br />

seeing concrete evidence <strong>of</strong> this.<br />

CONCLUSION<br />

In a first instance, this article has attempted to illustrate that the statistics that we are wont to rely on<br />

frequently only present a partial glimpse <strong>of</strong> the phenomena that we wish to analyse and lay bare.<br />

Second, the article has attempted to provide a cursory examination <strong>of</strong> the two key interventions<br />

initiated by the post-apartheid government to deal with the violence <strong>of</strong> this country's past and present.<br />

While the link between the two substantive strands in this article is perhaps not sufficiently clearly<br />

articulated, and while this article is still very much a `work in progress', I hope that it will in some way<br />

contribute to extant discussions and debate on issues <strong>of</strong> collective violence and, more specifically, <strong>of</strong><br />

political violence.<br />

NOTES<br />

1. In this article, the term ``black'' is used as a collective term designating all those groups classified<br />

as `Indian' `Bantu/<strong>Africa</strong>n' and coloured' and who, as a consequence, were relegated to a<br />

subaltern status by the apartheid state. Given the diversity <strong>of</strong> all human groups, it goes without<br />

saying that while it might be expedient to employ the term ``black'' here, the group designated by<br />

the term should not be considered homogeneous.<br />

2. Compared to an estimated 3500 political fatalities for the period 1984 to 1989.<br />

3. Shortly before his death, David Webster had published an article on government-sponsored<br />

`death squads' and other forms <strong>of</strong> covert repression in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (Amnesty International, 1992).<br />

REFERENCES<br />

Alence, R. (1999). The democratic transition and crime in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: The record <strong>of</strong> the 1990s.<br />

Nedbank ISS Crime Index, 3(2), 16-20.<br />

Alence, R. & Pimstone, G. (1999). Crime and the 1999 election: Perceptions <strong>of</strong> voters. Nedbank ISS<br />

Crime Index, 3(1), 1-4.<br />

Amnesty International (1992). <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: State <strong>of</strong> fear. Security force complicity in torture and<br />

political killings, 1990-1992. New York: Author.<br />

Budlender, D. (2000). Human development. In J. May (Ed.), Poverty and inequality in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>:<br />

Meeting the challenge (pp. 97-140). Cape Town: David Philip.<br />

Bulhan, H. A. (1985). Frantz Fanon and the psychology <strong>of</strong> oppression. New York: Plenum Press.<br />

Cassin, B., Cayla, O. & Salazar, P. (2004). PreÂsentation (Presentation). In B. Cassin, O. Cayla & P.<br />

19


Salazar (Eds), VeÂriteÂ, reÂconciliation, reÂparation (Truth, reconciliation and reparation) (pp. 13-26).<br />

Paris: Seuil.<br />

Chikane, F. (1986). Children in turmoil: The effects <strong>of</strong> unrest on township children. In S. Burman & P.<br />

Reynolds (Eds), Growing up in a divided society (pp. 333-344). Johannesburg: Ravan Press.<br />

Coleman, M. (1994). Analysis <strong>of</strong> research into the political violence <strong>of</strong> the apartheid state. In A.<br />

Minnaar, I. Liebenberg & C. Schutte (Eds), The hidden hand: Covert operations in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp.<br />

135-148). Pretoria: HSRC.<br />

Degenaar, J. (1990). The concept <strong>of</strong> violence. Centre for Intergroup Studies Occasional Paper<br />

Series, 13, 427.<br />

Derrida, J. (2004). VersoÈhnung, ubuntu, pardon: Quel genre? (Reconciliation, ubuntu, and<br />

forgiveness: In what form?) In B. Cassin, O. Cayla & P. Salazar (Eds), VeÂriteÂ, reÂconciliation,<br />

reÂparation (Truth, reconciliation and reparation) (pp. 111-156). Paris: Seuil.<br />

Dixon, B. & Johns, L. (2001). Gangs, PAGAD & the state: Vigilantism and revenge violence in the<br />

Western Cape. CSVR Violence and Transition Series, 2, 1-74. Accessed on 13 July 2003.<br />

Dowdall, T. (1990). Working with children and their families in civil conflict situations. Centre for<br />

Intergroup Studies Occasional Paper Series, 13, 87-96.<br />

Duncan, N. & Rock, B. (1997). Children and violence. Quantifying the damage. In B. Rock (Ed.),<br />

Spirals <strong>of</strong> suffering (pp. 43-68). Pretoria: HSRC.<br />

Duvenage, P. (1994). Rethinking the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n history <strong>of</strong> violence and covert operations. In A.<br />

Minnaar, I. Liebenberg & C. Schutte (Eds), The hidden hand: Covert operations in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp.<br />

125-134). Pretoria: HSRC.<br />

Economist, The (1996). Reconstruction and Development Programme abandoned. The Economist,<br />

n.p. Retrieved July 13, 2003, from http://www.ask.elibrary.com/login.asp.<br />

Foer, F. (1997). Post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Retrieved July 13, 2003, from http://www.slate.msn.com/<br />

id/ 1062.<br />

Government Gazette (1998). Republic <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> Government Gazette, Vol. 400, Number<br />

19403.<br />

Grunebaum-Ralph, H. (2001). Re-placing past, forgetting presents: Narrative, place, and memory in<br />

the time <strong>of</strong> the Truth and Reconciliation Commission. Research in <strong>Africa</strong>n Literatures, 32(3), 198-212.<br />

Human Rights Commission. (1993). Human rights review. Braamfontein: Author.<br />

Johnson, T. (2005). Mass protests against housing shortages in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. World Socialist<br />

Website. Retrieved July 7, 2005, from http://www.wsws.org/articles/2005/jun2005/safr-j14.shtml.<br />

20


Knox, C. & Quirk, P. (2000). Peace building in Northern Ireland, Israel and <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Transition,<br />

transformation and reconciliation. London: MacMillan.<br />

Magwaza, A. (2001). Submissions to the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth and Reconciliation Commission:<br />

Reflections <strong>of</strong> a commissioner on the culpability <strong>of</strong> psychology. In N. Duncan, A. van Niekerk, C. de<br />

la Rey & M. Seedat (Eds), Race, racism, knowledge production and <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n psychology (pp.<br />

37-44). New York: Nova.<br />

May, J., Woolard, I. & Klasen, S. (2000). The nature and measure <strong>of</strong> poverty and inequality. In J. May<br />

(Ed.), Poverty and inequality in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: Meeting the challenge (pp. 19-50). Cape Town: David<br />

Philip.<br />

Mkhize, H. (1993, September). Programme for mental health care for children exposed to violence: A<br />

case <strong>of</strong> the Children and Violence Project in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Paper presented at the Children, War and<br />

Persecution Congress, Hamburg.<br />

Mlazi, A. (1994, July 13). Bite the bullet if you want to drink in Vosloorust. The Star, p. 1.<br />

National Children's Rights Committee (NCRC) (1994). Voiceless victims: The impact <strong>of</strong> political<br />

violence on women and children. Braamfontein: Author.<br />

Nessman, R. (2002). Afrikaners feeling marginalized, disillusioned in the new<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Retrieved<br />

July 13, 2003, from http://aad.english.ucsb.edu/docs/ravinessman.html.<br />

Nkuta, Z. & Boyle, B. (2002). <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> hunts `race war' right-wingers after bombs.<br />

Forksherald.com. Retrieved July 13, 2003, from http://www.grandforks.com/mld/grandforks/<br />

4413608.htm. Accessed on 13 July 2003.<br />

Nott, G. (1994). The Webster Inquest and the CCB. In A. Minnaar, I. Liebenberg & C. Schutte (Eds),<br />

The hidden hand: Covert operations in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 49-66). Pretoria: HSRC.<br />

Penn-Kekana, L. (1997, September). Gender violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: Causes, effects and<br />

responses, Urbanisation and Health Newsletter, 34, 512.<br />

Potgieter, D. (2002). Wit bakkie was regses se groot motorbom vir L<strong>of</strong>tus (White pick-up: Rightwingers<br />

big car bomb for L<strong>of</strong>tus Sports Stadium). Net-Rapport, pp. 1-2. Retrieved March 28, 2003,<br />

from http://www.news24.com/rapport.<br />

Punamaki, R. (1987). Childhood under conflict. Research Report, 32. Tampereen: Tampere Peace<br />

Research Institute.<br />

Rabbani, F. F. (1994). The ANC's Reconstruction and Development Programme: A basic guide to the<br />

Reconstruction and Development Programme. Retrieved July 13, 2003, from http://www.sas.upenn.edu/<strong>Africa</strong>n_Studies/Govern_Political/ANC_Recon.html.<br />

RDP White Paper (1994). RDP White Paper. Retrieved July 7, 2005, from http://www.polity.org.za/<br />

html/govdocs/white_papers/rdpwhite.html.<br />

21


SAPA (2005, July 7). Protesters burn tyres, block freeway. The Star, p. 6.<br />

Schutte, C. (1994). How many third forces, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>? In A. Minnaar, I. Liebenberg & C. Schutte<br />

(Eds), The hidden hand: Covert operations in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 49-66). Pretoria: HSRC.<br />

Simpson, G. (1993). Explaining endemic violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Retrieved July 12, 2003, from<br />

http://www.csvr.org.za/papers/papendem.htm.<br />

Simpson, G. (1994). Business and endemic violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: Surviving the disaster or<br />

managing the transition? Retrieved July 12, 2003, from http://www.csvr.org.za/ papers/ papbugs.htm<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Institute <strong>of</strong> Race Relations (SAIRR) (1999). <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n survey. 1998/1999.<br />

Johannesburg: SAIRR.<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Institute <strong>of</strong> Race Relations (SAIRR) (2000). <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n survey. 1999/2000.<br />

Johannesburg: SAIRR.<br />

Straker, G. (1994). Integrating <strong>Africa</strong>n and Western healing practices in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. American<br />

Journal <strong>of</strong> Psychotherapy, 48(3), 455-467.<br />

Tshotsho, Z. (2005). The Reconstruction and Development Programme <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> and mental<br />

health <strong>of</strong> children. Retrieved July 7, 2005, from http://www.ispn-psych.org/html/what_s_africa2.html.<br />

UNICEF & NCRC (1993). Children and women in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: A situation analysis. Johannesburg:<br />

Authors.<br />

World Health Organisation (WHO) (2002). World report on violence and health. Geneva: WHO.<br />

Zulu, P. (1994). Third force operations in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. In A. Minnaar, I. Liebenberg & C. Schutte<br />

(Eds), The hidden hand: Covert operations in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 114-174). Pretoria: HSRC.<br />

22


TRUTH, CONFESSIONS AND<br />

REPARATIONS: LESSONS FROM THE<br />

SOUTH AFRICAN TRUTH AND<br />

RECONCILIATION COMMISSION<br />

Garth Stevens 1<br />

Institute for Social and Health Sciences, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

ABSTRACT<br />

Collective violence in the form <strong>of</strong> war, state-sponsored acts <strong>of</strong> terror and institutionalised human<br />

rights violations, continue to be centrally implicated in the high rates <strong>of</strong> death and disability across the<br />

globe in contemporary societies. Alongside this recognition we have witnessed the development <strong>of</strong><br />

ongoing economic, political and social initiatives aimed at preventing collective forms <strong>of</strong> violence and<br />

conflicts, and mediating against their long-term impacts and effects. To this end, post-conflict<br />

commissions have become a fairly well-established psychological, social and political institutional<br />

mechanism to address past atrocities; one <strong>of</strong> the most acclaimed exemplars is the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

Truth and Reconciliation Commission (TRC). This article reflects on the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n TRC, and<br />

highlights the challenges that it has faced in meeting three pivotal aims, namely the eliciting <strong>of</strong> truth,<br />

acting as a facilitating space for confessions related to human rights violations, and effecting<br />

reparative processes for the victims <strong>of</strong> such acts <strong>of</strong> violence. The article notes that while the TRC<br />

may be considered a success in the context <strong>of</strong> post-apartheid nation-building it falls short as a<br />

comprehensive strategy for just reconstruction in post-conflict contexts, since it tends to contribute to<br />

the construction <strong>of</strong> a notion <strong>of</strong> social healing without significant forms <strong>of</strong> social justice embedded<br />

within it.<br />

This article explores some <strong>of</strong> the salient lessons and challenges emerging from the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

Truth and Reconciliation Commission (TRC), as a strategy for peacemaking and peacebuilding in<br />

post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Given that a great deal has been written on the TRC, including a focus<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1 Please direct all correspondence to Garth Stevens, Institute for Social and Health Sciences, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, P.O. Box 1087, Lenasia, 1820,<br />

Johannesburg, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>; Tel: +27 11 857 1142; Fax: +27 11 857 1770; E-mail: Steveg@unisa.ac.za.<br />

23


on the psychology <strong>of</strong> the Commission (Hamber, 1995a, 1995b; SAJP, 2000), the complicity <strong>of</strong> various<br />

sectors <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society under apartheid (see Baldwin-Ragaven, de Gruchy & London, 1999,<br />

Magwaza, 2001), the methodologies employed within the process (Bundy, 2000), and reparations<br />

and nation-building after the TRC (James & van der Vijver, 2000; Motsemme & Ratele, 2002),<br />

several broad lessons can be drawn about the merits and limitations inherent to the TRC.<br />

As a broad social intervention the TRC represents, on the one hand, a successful approach to<br />

nation-building in the context <strong>of</strong> post-conflict transitionary societies (Villa-Vicencio, 2000). On the<br />

other hand, it could be argued that the TRC's contributions to constructing a homogenous national<br />

unity and a non-`racial' 1 democracy occurred at the expense <strong>of</strong> economic, social and psychological<br />

reparations to the majority <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns (van der Walt, Franchi & Stevens, 2003). While the<br />

extent to which the TRC was able to facilitate the revelation <strong>of</strong> gross human rights by individuals and<br />

various institutionalised sectors <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society during apartheid is a credit to this process,<br />

its ideological orientation, structure and procedural form, methodological approach and philosophical<br />

underpinnings <strong>of</strong>ten hamstrung its potential as a tool to comprehensively address social justice in<br />

post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. This article specifically explores the structural constraints <strong>of</strong> the TRC,<br />

the ambiguities related to subjective and objective understandings <strong>of</strong> memory and histories, and the<br />

challenges related to amnesty, reparations (or non-reparations) and social justice. Furthermore, I<br />

query the extent to which national unity has been forged by the TRC in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> since 1994, and<br />

examine whether the TRC has in fact contributed to the consolidation <strong>of</strong> a post-apartheid `racialised'<br />

social formation through structurally containing social blaming, demands for reparations and justice<br />

for atrocities committed during apartheid, and by avoiding issues related to the consequential<br />

inequalities and human rights violations <strong>of</strong> apartheid. Finally, the article argues that when such<br />

peacemaking and peacebuilding initiatives are adopted in other contexts, we need to be aware <strong>of</strong><br />

their ideological limitations and actively encourage that they operate within the frameworks <strong>of</strong><br />

international law, human rights and social justice in order to maximise their benefits for broad sectors<br />

<strong>of</strong> societies emerging from conflicts.<br />

THE TRC AS A PEACEMAKING AND PEACEBUILDING STRATEGY<br />

As one <strong>of</strong> the outcomes <strong>of</strong> the negotiated settlement between the dominant political powers that had<br />

reached a stalemate by 1990, the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n TRC emerged as a peacemaking and peacebuilding<br />

strategy. Suffla's work (2004) provides an instructive synopsis on the inter-related strategies <strong>of</strong><br />

peacemaking and peacebuilding and is reflected upon below. She argues that peacemaking is<br />

directed at reducing the occurrence and intensity <strong>of</strong> direct violence and involves a range <strong>of</strong><br />

preventative methods. Given that peacemaking is underpinned by the concept <strong>of</strong> conflict resolution, it<br />

is responsive to the values <strong>of</strong> peace, non-violence, empathy, utilises methods that promote dialogue,<br />

mutually beneficial outcomes, and acknowledges the influence <strong>of</strong> the social context within which<br />

conflict is located (see also Sanson & Bretherton, 2001; Wessells and Monteiro, 2001, cited in Suffla,<br />

2004). While peacemaking therefore appears to be unproblematic at a conceptual level, when<br />

applied to truth commissions as a broad socio-political and psychosocial intervention, it immediately<br />

raises certain tensions that may compromise the effectiveness <strong>of</strong> truth commissions to deliver on<br />

their implicit aims. Several authors (Crawford, 2000; de la Rey, 2001; Lederach, 1997) have noted<br />

24


that some <strong>of</strong> the key psychosocial imperatives that are identified as needing to be met in the<br />

aftermath <strong>of</strong> violent social conflict are the promotion <strong>of</strong> reconciliation and reconstruction. Here,<br />

reconciliation, truth, forgiveness and healing are foregrounded as being critical subjective elements to<br />

peacemaking, as they involve the recognition <strong>of</strong> victims' pain, an acknowledgement <strong>of</strong> wrongdoing by<br />

perpetrators, a willingness to acknowledge the truth, as well as a desire to <strong>of</strong>fer and accept<br />

forgiveness (Suffla, 2004). Some <strong>of</strong> the immediate political, ideological and philosophical questions<br />

that have however been raised by these assumptions are <strong>of</strong> course: Whose truth (and consequently,<br />

which history)? Reconciliation at what cost, especially if social justice and reconstruction are absent<br />

and if the balance <strong>of</strong> power is skewed between conflicting parties? Is forgiveness a social process or<br />

an individual process and can truth commissions facilitate this at a broad social level? Is the<br />

comprehensive attainment <strong>of</strong> these aims not dependent on the absence <strong>of</strong> a dominant hegemonic<br />

political discourse, or on political neutrality, and can truth commissions ever be politically neutral?<br />

Despite these questions and concerns, it is evident that the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n TRC did manage to fulfil<br />

some <strong>of</strong> these key imperatives associated with peacemaking, even if not fully.<br />

Suffla (2004) also suggests that unlike peacemaking, peacebuilding is the process that attempts to<br />

address structural violence in its various forms <strong>of</strong> social domination, political oppression and<br />

economic exploitation, and is therefore directed at the creation <strong>of</strong> material conditions conducive to<br />

social transformation, structural reconstruction, and the transformation <strong>of</strong> discourses that maintain<br />

oppression and exploitation. Through this process, a more critical discourse and consciousness is<br />

generated that not only challenges a conflictual status quo, but also squarely argues for peace to<br />

transcend the mere prevention and resolution <strong>of</strong> conflict, and to incorporate issues <strong>of</strong> social justice<br />

(Christie, 2001, cited in Suffla, 2004). More importantly, peacebuilding is ultimately directed at the<br />

creation <strong>of</strong> a social order that represents the antithesis <strong>of</strong> a conflictual status quo. Therefore, it is<br />

apparent that peacemaking and peacebuilding <strong>of</strong>ten occur simultaneously in their social application<br />

(Christie, Wagner & Winter, 2001). Peacebuilding efforts frequently begin to occur prior to<br />

peacemaking initiatives, and in fact <strong>of</strong>ten inform them. They may also occur during peacemaking<br />

initiatives, and continue to occur as an integral part <strong>of</strong> social transformation thereafter (Suffla, 2004).<br />

However, the construct <strong>of</strong> peacebuilding raises certain critical questions as to truth commissions'<br />

ability to fulfil such colossal social tasks. When peacebuilding discourses become formalised and<br />

embedded in newdispensations, to what extent can they retain critical independence or political<br />

neutrality? Can they be critical <strong>of</strong> the newor emergent status quo, or do they act in its service? To<br />

what extent is their ability to foster an alternative culture shaped by their emergence from a specific<br />

social and political context? While much <strong>of</strong> the TRC's work in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> can certainly be seen as<br />

peacemaking, the expanse <strong>of</strong> time over which it operated certainly served the function <strong>of</strong> shaping<br />

and consolidating a discourse <strong>of</strong> nation-building in post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, and thus can also be<br />

seen as a peacebuilding strategy. However, the degree to which it has successfully acted as a<br />

peacebuilding initiative is dealt with at length, later in the article.<br />

THE SOCIO-HISTORICAL CONTEXT OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN TRC<br />

While a great deal <strong>of</strong> international attention has focused on the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n TRC and its successes<br />

and/or failures, the actual concept <strong>of</strong> truth commissions emerged in the 1970s in Uganda, and gained<br />

25


greater prominence in Latin America in the 1980s. Generally, truth commissions are <strong>of</strong>ficial agencies<br />

that are sponsored by governments and/or international organisations to formally investigate and<br />

report on human rights violations that occur in specific countries or regions that have endured a<br />

period <strong>of</strong> social conflict. Truth commissions provide a forum for victims, relatives and even<br />

perpetrators wishing to give testimony and evidence <strong>of</strong> human rights abuses, thereby <strong>of</strong>fering<br />

psychological closure to those who experienced tragedies, and an account for past abuses. Truth<br />

commissions provide recommendations to prevent similar acts from recurring in future and aim to<br />

stimulate national reconciliation. After the first truth commission in 1974 in Uganda, several other<br />

countries employed this process, namely, the National Commission on the Disappeared in Argentina<br />

in 1983, the National Commission for Truth and Reconciliation in Chile in 1991, the Commission <strong>of</strong><br />

Inquiry in Chad in 1992, and the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth and Reconciliation Commission in 1998. While<br />

the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n TRC certainly drew on the Latin American examples to help shape its form and<br />

processes, there were various socio-historical factors and political imperatives that impacted on the<br />

choice, outcomes and effectiveness <strong>of</strong> the TRC as a peacemaking and peacebuilding strategy.<br />

The socio-political condition pre-dating the TRC in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> was one in which the ruling National<br />

Party, on the one hand, was unable to effect a victory over an increasingly militant resistance to the<br />

apartheid system from the liberation movement. In addition to this, the backdrop <strong>of</strong> sanctions and a<br />

flailing political economy rendered it impossible for the apartheid state to sustain its escalated<br />

oppression. The resistance movements, on the other hand, were unable to initiate a comprehensive<br />

revolution against the apartheid state for a range <strong>of</strong> objective and subjective political reasons.<br />

The National Party's choice <strong>of</strong> institutionalised racism, as embodied in the 1948 apartheid policy, was<br />

due to cumulative factors, but was extremely functional to the development <strong>of</strong> capitalism in <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>. The segregationist policies were partly a result <strong>of</strong> the historical development <strong>of</strong> `race' and<br />

class since the onset <strong>of</strong> colonialism in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, and directly related to the attempt to promote<br />

Afrikaner Nationalism and the interests <strong>of</strong> Afrikaner capital against international capital (Terreblanche<br />

& Nattrass, 1990). While the social impacts <strong>of</strong> these racist policies have been well-documented (see<br />

for example Terreblanche & Nattrass, 1990; Wolpe, 1988), the most important consideration for the<br />

segregationist choice in 1948 was clearly an economic one. As the largest producer <strong>of</strong> gold, <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong> was clearly able to compete on the international capitalist market. Nevertheless, it did not<br />

possess the technological expertise and capital goods necessary to compete with major<br />

industrialised countries, with regard to a wide range <strong>of</strong> commodities. The only option for <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n capital was therefore to compensate for this through the exploitation <strong>of</strong> cheap black labour.<br />

Apartheid policy was not only functional to capitalist development, but was imperative to its<br />

integration into the world capitalist economy. Protectionist strategies to realise the dream <strong>of</strong><br />

Volkskapitalisme became redundant, as Afrikaner capital and international capital became<br />

increasingly integrated (Callinicos, 1987; O'Meara, 1983).<br />

Apartheid capitalism flourished in the boom following the Second World War. Its incorporation into the<br />

world capitalist economy allowed it to benefit from the high growth rate experienced globally, but by<br />

the 1960s obvious signals appeared to highlight the fact that apartheid was becoming an obstacle to<br />

further capitalist development. Internal political instability and resistance from the liberation<br />

movements, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s exclusion from the Commonwealth and the United Nations Arms<br />

embargo, all resulted in an immense withdrawal <strong>of</strong> international capital from <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> in the mid-<br />

26


1960s (Saul, 1986). By the 1970s, international capitalism was in an ever-deepening recession, and<br />

this impacted on <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> as well (Alexander, 1985). An organic economic and social crisis arose<br />

internally in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, because <strong>of</strong> the contradictions existing between the systems <strong>of</strong> racist<br />

domination and capitalist exploitation. Even though racism had been functional, and imperative to<br />

capitalist accumulation in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, it had reached a ceiling in its utility. Apartheid policy could no<br />

longer ensure the long-term interests <strong>of</strong> both national and international capital (Saul, 1986). The<br />

social crisis <strong>of</strong> apartheid capitalism resulted in greater internal opposition to the system <strong>of</strong> racist<br />

domination by the liberation movements, as well as repressive state responses, and created a<br />

political climate <strong>of</strong> instability. In addition, the large black working class had begun to organise itself<br />

into significant trade unions, and had strong links to the liberation movements. Internationally, this<br />

was supported by the growing anti-apartheid and pro-sanctions lobbies, and international investors<br />

became more and more reluctant to gamble on the fragile <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n political economy<br />

(Alexander, 1985; Saul, 1986; Wolpe, 1988).<br />

Political reforms implemented by the apartheid state were met with intense opposition from the<br />

liberation movements in the 1970s and the 1980s. Student, trade union and community-based<br />

struggles all escalated during this time, and culminated in the period <strong>of</strong> ungovernability in the 1980s<br />

(Brecker, 1994).<br />

The Congress Alliance (i.e. the <strong>Africa</strong>n National Congress and its affiliates, the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

Communist Party and the Congress <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Trade Unions) had become hegemonic within<br />

the liberation movements, and their political strategy was aimed primarily at the dismantling <strong>of</strong> the<br />

apartheid political apparatus. This was partly a result <strong>of</strong> strong nationalist ideologies that dominated<br />

the political agenda <strong>of</strong> the Alliance and informed its perspective <strong>of</strong> the National Question in <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong> as being related to `race' and less so to the interface between `race' and class. However, an<br />

impasse between the liberation movements and the state occurred, as neither could gain an outright<br />

victory over the other. The collapse <strong>of</strong> the Soviet Union and the Eastern European Bloc represented<br />

an ideological victory for international capitalism. It was at this point that capital took the initiative, and<br />

through the National Party, entered into a Negotiated Settlement with the liberation movement Ð in<br />

particular, the Congress Alliance (Brecker, 1994). In addition, the resistance movements could no<br />

longer rely on sustainable funding and unconditional political assistance from international<br />

supporters, and their leadership found themselves dispersed nationally, in exile and languishing in<br />

apartheid jails.<br />

The settlement essentially involved the transition towards a non-`racial' democracy, through which<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n capitalism would be restructured without the structural obstacles <strong>of</strong> apartheid, and<br />

would be given a new lease <strong>of</strong> life. The result <strong>of</strong> this process was the first democratic elections in<br />

April 1994, which saw an overwhelming victory for the <strong>Africa</strong>n National Congress (Brecker, 1994).<br />

There was also an agreement to share power for the first five years <strong>of</strong> the transitional democracy,<br />

within a free-market framework. Minority rights were retained and white civil servants were allowed to<br />

retain their positions in the state bureaucratic structures. Amnesty was promised to all activists,<br />

politicians and soldiers, with the proviso that full disclosures be made with regard to their<br />

contributions to gross human rights violations and atrocities. It was out <strong>of</strong> this context that the <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n TRC was born.<br />

27


The TRC certainly acted as a public peacemaking strategy that facilitated the recall and mourning <strong>of</strong><br />

a repressive and oppressive history in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. It could also be argued that it was deeply<br />

embedded within the politics <strong>of</strong> negotiation, and allowed for a containing, structured environment and<br />

process for the victims <strong>of</strong> repression and oppression to voice their experiences without resorting to<br />

retributive justice <strong>of</strong>ten associated with purges and trials in post-conflict contexts. Perpetrators <strong>of</strong><br />

gross human rights violations were <strong>of</strong>fered amnesty in return for full disclosures <strong>of</strong> atrocities Ð a quid<br />

pro quo process in which perpetrators were protected from retributive justice in return for assistance<br />

in providing an account <strong>of</strong> atrocities that was likely to be initially contested, but would then hopefully<br />

become implicitly accepted as a collectively shared truth and history. Thus, the TRC represented<br />

itself as a structure that protected the rights <strong>of</strong> all groups in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> equally, if certain conditions<br />

were met, and was one embodiment <strong>of</strong> the political compromise <strong>of</strong> the political settlement. In this<br />

sense, the TRC may be characterised as attempting to fulfil a more restorative role that is<br />

interrogated later in this article. It was furthermore embedded in the politics <strong>of</strong> nationalism that had<br />

characterised both apartheid and hegemonic liberatory politics prior to the settlement. The TRC was<br />

infused with notions <strong>of</strong> nation-building, the new <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> and the rainbownation. It is therefore<br />

fairly clear that the TRC was not a politically neutral structure or process, but reflected the political<br />

histories <strong>of</strong> the major role players in the settlement, as well as the imperatives associated with the<br />

transition from apartheid to non-`racial' capitalist democracy.<br />

The TRC also acted as a peacebuilding strategy for those who envisaged the role <strong>of</strong> the new <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong> to become increasingly integrated into the regional, continental and international economic and<br />

political arenas. It was critical to develop a stable socio-political structure that would attract foreign<br />

investment, and <strong>of</strong>fer long-term stability through the avoidance <strong>of</strong> high pr<strong>of</strong>ile trials, purges and civil<br />

conflict. The state's self-imposed structural adjustment programme in the form <strong>of</strong> GEAR (Growth,<br />

Employment and Redistribution), strict fiscal discipline, the abandonment <strong>of</strong> the Reconstruction and<br />

Development Programme (RDP), a mechanism <strong>of</strong> aid to the poor, and the TRC helped facilitate the<br />

construction <strong>of</strong> a politically, socially and economically viable <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> ready for incorporation into<br />

the global economy. For those who viewed these elements as the key imperatives facing postapartheid<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, the TRC was certainly a critical peacebuilding element that avoided<br />

addressing the contentious issues <strong>of</strong> land and wealth redistribution. So the settlement was<br />

characterised by costly political compromises and, as Marais (1998) notes, by costly economic and<br />

social compromises as well. Bundy (2000) suggests that the <strong>Africa</strong>n National Congress (ANC)<br />

strategically retreated from addressing these and other contentious socioeconomic issues in order to<br />

ensure that the society could be sustained through the transition from apartheid to non-`racial'<br />

capitalism/democracy, while Adam and Adam (2000) argue that one <strong>of</strong> the reasons for consciously<br />

glossing over certain contentious issues is the desire to draw upon the infrastructure and skills <strong>of</strong> the<br />

previous regime for the benefit <strong>of</strong> the future (van der Walt et al., 2003).<br />

While it would be remiss to reflect exclusively on the TRC as a mere tool that was politically and<br />

ideologically manipulated, thereby denying its own agency and positive contributions, it is apparent<br />

that as a peacemaking and peacebuilding strategy, the TRC was rooted within a very particular<br />

political and ideological discourse that would ultimately influence its outcome and impact. This can be<br />

more carefully identified within the form and processes <strong>of</strong> the TRC, and it is to this that we now turn<br />

our attention.<br />

28


LEGALISED STRUCTURE AND PROCEDURAL FORM OF THE TRC<br />

The promulgation <strong>of</strong> the Promotion <strong>of</strong> National Unity and Reconciliation Bill in 1995 formalised a 17-<br />

member commission to facilitate a truth and recovery process aimed at reconciliation (Suffla, 2004).<br />

The mandate <strong>of</strong> the TRC, as a statutory agent <strong>of</strong> national unity and reconciliation, was to:<br />

. establish as complete a picture as possible <strong>of</strong> the nature, causes and extent <strong>of</strong> past gross human<br />

rights violations;<br />

. provide reparation and rehabilitation to victims <strong>of</strong> abuse;<br />

. grant amnesty to perpetrators <strong>of</strong> human rights abuses who <strong>of</strong>fered full disclosure about the crimes<br />

that they had committed;<br />

. formulate a set <strong>of</strong> recommendations to the President with respect to the creation <strong>of</strong> institutions<br />

conducive to a stable and fair society and measures to prevent future human rights violations; and<br />

. compile a report publicising the work and findings <strong>of</strong> the TRC.<br />

To assist in the implementation <strong>of</strong> these objectives, the legislation established three committees<br />

within the TRC:<br />

1. Committee on Human Rights Violations: to conduct public hearings throughout the country.<br />

2. Committee on Amnesty: to consider applications for amnesty from those who had committed<br />

political crimes.<br />

3. Committee on Reparation and Rehabilitation <strong>of</strong> Victims: to formulate recommendations on how to<br />

implement a reparations policy.<br />

Through an act <strong>of</strong> parliament, the TRC became a legitimised and legalised institution that focused<br />

specifically on gross violations <strong>of</strong> human rights during the period between March 1960 and 11 May<br />

1994. The focus on gross human rights violations was defined and narrowed to include only victims<br />

<strong>of</strong> killing, torture, abduction and severe ill-treatment (van der Walt et al., 2003). Two critical<br />

implications arise from this pragmatic approach. First, the consequences <strong>of</strong> apartheid as a systemic<br />

form <strong>of</strong> oppression and human rights violations was not addressed overtly, but rather, the focus was<br />

on violations that would have been considered illegal, even under apartheid. Socio-economic<br />

disparities, socio-political marginalisation and the effects <strong>of</strong> legalised racism were essentially not the<br />

focus <strong>of</strong> inquiry. In addition to allowing for a denial <strong>of</strong> responsibility on the part <strong>of</strong> those at the head <strong>of</strong><br />

the apartheid state apparatus, this particular focus had the effect <strong>of</strong> locating the blame for apartheid<br />

atrocities solely in the illegal activities <strong>of</strong> a minority <strong>of</strong> individuals. Consequently, the TRC process<br />

resulted in many foot-soldiers <strong>of</strong> apartheid being identified and questioned, rather than placing the<br />

system <strong>of</strong> apartheid and its leardership on trial. Such a limited scope accorded to the TRC further<br />

negates the persistent and comprehensive manner in which apartheid undermined and continues to<br />

undermine black <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns at social, political, economic and personal levels. Second, with<br />

regard to the specific time-frame, an entire layer <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society was essentially exonerated<br />

by default, and the foundations <strong>of</strong> the apartheid system received no overt attention by the TRC (van<br />

der Walt et al., 2003).<br />

With regard to the amnesty process, the TRC was specifically mandated to grant amnesty to<br />

perpetrators <strong>of</strong> human rights abuses who <strong>of</strong>fered full disclosure about the crimes that they had<br />

committed. While having the right to grant or deny amnesty, the TRC did not have the express<br />

mandate to prosecute in instances where amnesty was not granted. This matter was referred to the<br />

29


state prosecutorial services for further investigation and possible prosecution, and in effect the TRC<br />

then did not have a full and comprehensive judicial mandate. This left questions as to the ability <strong>of</strong><br />

the TRC to follow through on instances <strong>of</strong> gross human rights violations and the prosecution there<strong>of</strong>.<br />

In addition, where amnesty was granted, the Act expressly prevented any future civil cases or claims<br />

from being made by victims or the families <strong>of</strong> victims against perpetrators (e.g. the case <strong>of</strong> the Biko<br />

family that attempted to lodge civil proceedings against Steve Biko's self-confessed murderers).<br />

On a related note, many deponents who appeared in front <strong>of</strong> the TRC were angered by the inability<br />

<strong>of</strong> the TRC to act in regard to reparations. The government reserved the prerogative to act on the<br />

TRC's recommendations regarding reparations (Burton, 2000). The considered primary mode <strong>of</strong><br />

reparations had been <strong>of</strong> a monetary nature. In addition, community reparations and symbolic<br />

reparations (e.g. memorials) were also considered. While the financial reparations would be welcome<br />

for many, others have questioned the morality <strong>of</strong> such a process.<br />

Furthermore, while there have been suggestions as to how to archive the TRC material and to place<br />

it squarely in the public domain to acknowledge those who suffered under the yolk <strong>of</strong> apartheid,<br />

issues <strong>of</strong> social justice remain. Many perpetrators continue to function with absolute impunity in postapartheid<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> Ð an understandably sore point for victims, survivors and their families.<br />

UNSTATED AND IMPLIED MANDATES OF THE TRC<br />

Even though the stated intent <strong>of</strong> the TRC is clear from its mandate, there are several unstated<br />

intentions and consequences <strong>of</strong> this process.<br />

Facilitating hope and optimism<br />

van der Walt et al. (2003) argue that owing to the future-orientated strategies that had been<br />

employed in the transitional compromise, a discourse <strong>of</strong> hope and optimism had to be propagated.<br />

This discourse <strong>of</strong> national unity, that concealed socio-economic disparities (Bundy 2000), is captured<br />

by Desmond Tutu's (1997) rainbownation. Premised upon this compromise, the TRC needed to<br />

promote nation-building in a manner that served inadvertently (and at times advertently) as a<br />

concealment for the structural deficiencies <strong>of</strong> the political compromise. In the sense that this<br />

discourse needed to sustain a country through its transition, some writers have argued that the<br />

decision by the TRC to follow this path was both pragmatic and successful (Boraine, 2000, Villa-<br />

Vicencio, 2000) in so far as it delayed controversy and conflict, and allowed the nation to work<br />

through a difficult past.<br />

However, if these strategies prevented economic and social redress <strong>of</strong> apartheid inequalities by<br />

creating an amnesia, then the TRC can certainly be critiqued for being complicit in deferring and<br />

avoiding the trial and prosecution <strong>of</strong> those responsible for atrocities committed during apartheid on<br />

the one hand, and the redistribution <strong>of</strong> wealth and land on the other.<br />

Constructing memory and history<br />

At the level <strong>of</strong> memory and history, the TRC was not mandated with inscribing an <strong>of</strong>ficial history, but it<br />

30


certainly functioned as a mechanism to interpolate subjects into a process in which collective identity<br />

and collective memory could be contested, and then broadly consensually defined. So by<br />

symbolising the experience <strong>of</strong> discontent by the majority <strong>of</strong> black <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns in processes such<br />

as the TRC, in which there was an obsession with history-making and nation-building (van der Walt<br />

et al., 2003), the TRC process facilitated a context in which the `racial' and socio-economic inequities<br />

<strong>of</strong> the apartheid legacy that were to some extent negated in the transition from apartheid to<br />

democracy, could remain invisible. The process <strong>of</strong> writing history (whether <strong>of</strong>ficial or not) and<br />

constructing memory is political. In particular, an attempt to construct a so-called collective memory,<br />

speaks <strong>of</strong> the agenda to construct a collective identity. Under the rubric <strong>of</strong> reconciliation, a country<br />

divided by the social, economic, `racial' and political policy <strong>of</strong> apartheid was asked to forge a<br />

nationalism (and therefore a national identity) based on a consensus <strong>of</strong> how the apartheid past was<br />

to be remembered.<br />

Collective identity and memory speak to the dominant understandings <strong>of</strong> the past that are shared by<br />

the vast majority <strong>of</strong> those inhabiting a state. While Adam and Adam (2000) correctly point out that it is<br />

nonsensical to assume collective understandings to be absolute and homogenous, and that at best<br />

they can be figurative, this process <strong>of</strong> forging a homogenous collective understanding did occur to<br />

some extent within the TRC, becoming a factual commonplace among many in contemporary <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

However, at stake in collective remembering are subject positions <strong>of</strong> the diverse populace and for the<br />

TRC to successfully nationalise collective understandings <strong>of</strong> the past to some extent, <strong>of</strong>ten translated<br />

into enormous sacrifice at the individual level. What began as an exercise in the establishment <strong>of</strong> a<br />

collective memory also partially translated into distortions <strong>of</strong> personal memories or personal<br />

forgetting. Where the establishment <strong>of</strong> a collective memory was resisted, those who maintained the<br />

integrity <strong>of</strong> their identity and memories risked incomprehension in the new array <strong>of</strong> social<br />

relationships. The meta-communication embedded within the TRC implied a new form <strong>of</strong> social<br />

marginalisation because one either had to become a member <strong>of</strong> the new<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, or remain<br />

alienated within it (van der Walt et al., 2003).<br />

Authors such as Villa-Vicencio (2000) argue that the un<strong>of</strong>ficial construction <strong>of</strong> a collective memory<br />

and history was not the purview <strong>of</strong> the TRC. He suggests that the resultant report was an account in<br />

which multiple voices and narratives were represented in a contested manner, and deliberately<br />

served as an incomplete record that had a dialogical outcome in a social formation that sorely<br />

needed it. However, Bundy (2000) and Posel (1999) point out that these personal histories were not<br />

included at the time <strong>of</strong> the actual writing <strong>of</strong> the document, and it appears that while narrative, social<br />

and healing truths were used in the hearings, the TRC Final Report presented itself as a factually<br />

true document, devoid <strong>of</strong> these subjective elements (van der Walt et al., 2003).<br />

Accommodating subjective and objective disclosures<br />

Within the TRC process, subjective accounts <strong>of</strong> personal narratives and experiences were<br />

accommodated alongside more objective, pre-recorded, written statements. For Bundy (2000), the<br />

31


TRC process ``represents a structurally fragmented historical account, in which the contradictory pulls<br />

<strong>of</strong> the TRC's mandate exact a toll both epistemological and methodological'' (p.13).<br />

While this appears to be an appropriate assessment given the contradictory nature <strong>of</strong> the stated and<br />

unstated mandates <strong>of</strong> the TRC, it appears that this vacillation also became strategically useful as the<br />

TRC attempted to meet its tasks <strong>of</strong> peacemaking and peacebuilding. On the one hand, personal<br />

experiences <strong>of</strong> victims and perpetrators needed to be heard as part <strong>of</strong> a peacemaking strategy, but<br />

on the other hand, these needed to be contained in a manner that could be integrated into a coherent<br />

collective history that would promote nation-building.<br />

So the structure <strong>of</strong> the TRC straddled both judicial and reconciliatory procedures. This resulted in the<br />

quasi-judicial appearance <strong>of</strong> the hearings, in which the human faces <strong>of</strong> trauma were juxtaposed<br />

against the objective judicial process in a court-like setting. Antagonists to this process argued that<br />

this blurred the TRC's focus (van Zyl Slabbert, 2000) and that it failed to instill the respect for the law<br />

that was required in the new <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (Bundy, 2000; Jeffery, 1999; Neier, 1998). Those in favour<br />

<strong>of</strong> this compromise argued that it allowed for a human component to emerge in the hearings, and that<br />

this was what the country needed for reconciliation to occur (Boraine, 2000; Villa-Vicencio, 2000).<br />

However, this procedure within the TRC contributed to a silencing <strong>of</strong> the `racialised' macro-economic<br />

inequalities pervading <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, and the subjective experiences <strong>of</strong> the testifiers were partially<br />

foregrounded at points. The imperatives <strong>of</strong> addressing the macro-economic consequences <strong>of</strong> the<br />

systematised, socio-politically entrenched oppression <strong>of</strong> apartheid were subordinated to those <strong>of</strong><br />

producing a unifying national archive. Personal testimony was the primary mechanism through which<br />

this was attained, but only when such testimony appropriated the discourse <strong>of</strong> nation-building that<br />

permeated the TRC. When deponents deviated from this, certain constraints were <strong>of</strong>ten imposed<br />

upon them. van der Walt (1999) suggests that this forced testifiers to depart from the point <strong>of</strong> the<br />

experiences, and instead to speak in the language and discourse <strong>of</strong> the TRC. He examined the<br />

extent to which survivors <strong>of</strong> human rights violations were allowed to speak when operating outside <strong>of</strong><br />

the dominant discourses <strong>of</strong> truth and reconciliation, and found that when using the political rhetoric<br />

salient to the TRC's agenda <strong>of</strong> nation-building, testifiers were allowed to speak longer and with fewer<br />

interruptions than when they focused on other aspects <strong>of</strong> their subjective experience <strong>of</strong> the trauma.<br />

When victims grappled with the emotions engendered by their narratives, the TRC panel would<br />

frequently respond by cross-examining testifiers, and refer the victim to his or her recorded<br />

statement. While this may be accounted for in part by panelists acting clinically and callously in the<br />

interest <strong>of</strong> self-preservation when faced with the immense trauma <strong>of</strong> the testifiers, it is also apparent<br />

that documents such as the recorded statements were given greater validity than the testimony itself<br />

at certain points. The tensions between personalised and subjective testimonies and objective judicial<br />

truth mentioned above clearly represent one <strong>of</strong> the major challenges <strong>of</strong> the TRC process at a<br />

methodological and philosophical level.<br />

Beyond this, there appeared to be implicit attempts to institutionalise subjective and individualised<br />

processes and to re-package them as collective, objective strategies for reconciliation. Here the<br />

covert religiose underpinnings <strong>of</strong> the TRC are a case in point and are reflected in statements such as<br />

Revealing is Healing. Symbolically, the TRC became the confessional, and its commissioners the<br />

symbolic interceders who were able to grant absolution or suggest a certain level <strong>of</strong> penance. A<br />

32


similar psychological construction also pervaded the TRC process in which cathartic expressions <strong>of</strong><br />

atrocities committed were viewed as a step towards healing the nation. While the latter two<br />

underpinnings certainly have significant merit in peace promotion and reconciliation, the result in this<br />

instance is more complex, contributing to an obfuscation <strong>of</strong> the structural damages <strong>of</strong> apartheid at<br />

more insidious levels, and tend to bolster the notion that atrocities committed during apartheid were<br />

the acts <strong>of</strong> crazed individuals and that the effects were only felt by individual victims. In so doing, the<br />

system <strong>of</strong> apartheid was vilified, but essentially managed to remain scot-free. Associated with this,<br />

was the notion <strong>of</strong> forgiveness. While some authors argue that forgiveness can be enacted at a group<br />

level by a victimised social category if the perpetrating social group takes collective responsibility for<br />

their acts (Bhargava, 2000), several questions arise. Firstly, to what extent can and will groups take<br />

collective responsibility and likewise, grant forgiveness, especially given the heterogeneity <strong>of</strong> their<br />

lived experiences? Secondly, would such a polarisation have been consistent with the TRC's focus<br />

on creating sameness rather than difference in the context <strong>of</strong> post-apartheid nation-building? Thirdly,<br />

was it possible for the TRC in any way to structurally facilitate or impose such processes <strong>of</strong> collective<br />

responsibility and forgiveness? In each instance, the inherent difficulties with infusing forgiveness into<br />

such processes related to collective responsibility are apparent. This does not imply that forgiveness<br />

is not central to reconciliation, but there needs to be an acknowledgement that forgiveness is <strong>of</strong>ten<br />

premised on the personal motives and subjective interpretations <strong>of</strong> social experiences <strong>of</strong> individuals,<br />

and social categories in their entirety cannot simply be compelled through moral argument to take<br />

collective responsibility and <strong>of</strong>fer collective forgiveness. Morality <strong>of</strong> course is also socially<br />

constructed, embedded in political and ideological discourses, and may therefore be contested. In the<br />

case <strong>of</strong> the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n TRC, this problematic contributed to an emphasis on individuals to take<br />

responsibility and in turn, <strong>of</strong>fer forgiveness (e.g. the case <strong>of</strong> the parents <strong>of</strong> a white American<br />

exchange student, Amy Biehl, who was killed at a political rally, and whose parents publicly forgave<br />

her killers). Social processes resulting in repression, oppression and violence were proverbially let <strong>of</strong>f<br />

the hook.<br />

CONFESSIONS, AMNESTY, REPARATIONS AND SOCIAL JUSTICE<br />

The process <strong>of</strong> granting amnesty was contingent on full disclosures being made by those appearing<br />

in front <strong>of</strong> the TRC, with regard to gross human rights violations occurring in the context <strong>of</strong> political<br />

motivations (van der Vijver, 2000). However, this amnesty prevents any civil case or claim being<br />

made against perpetrators in future. Here, a case in point is the murder <strong>of</strong> the Black Consciousness<br />

leader, Steven Bantu Biko. While Biko's murderers confessed to the killing in all its gory detail, when<br />

the family attempted to institute civil action against them, this was denied. Monetary compensation in<br />

this instance was certainly not sufficient, and social justice appeared to be absent in this case. The<br />

process <strong>of</strong> amnesty granting could also have potentially been combined with other forms <strong>of</strong> censure,<br />

(if not prosecution), such as preventing those found to be involved in gross human rights violations as<br />

being unfit to stand for any <strong>of</strong>ficial <strong>of</strong>fice in the new dispensation. Rather, many self-confessed killers<br />

and torturers, or the leadership directing such acts, remain at large and in positions <strong>of</strong> authority in the<br />

new dispensation.<br />

A further example <strong>of</strong> the difficulties with the amnesty process can be seen in the challenges<br />

33


associated with Dr. Wouter Basson (Burger & Gould, 2002), the apartheid regime's most highlyranked<br />

chemical weapons expert. After repeated and failed attempts by the TRC to gain information<br />

from Dr. Basson on his activities during apartheid, the matter was eventually forwarded to the state<br />

prosecutorial services. Dr. Basson was put on trial, and despite compelling anecdotal evidence, he<br />

was acquitted <strong>of</strong> all charges after a 30-month long trial in which the state failed to conclusively prove<br />

his guilt. The cost <strong>of</strong> the trial was estimated at US$2 million at the time, and given the adverse<br />

international press coverage, the hefty costs and challenges facing prosecution teams in this area, a<br />

minimal number <strong>of</strong> successful trials have occurred for perpetrators <strong>of</strong> gross human rights violations<br />

(most <strong>of</strong> whom were low-level functionaries) who were not <strong>of</strong>fered amnesty.<br />

With regard to reparations, these were recently decided upon by the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n government. Of<br />

the US$375 million recommended by the TRC to be paid as reparations to the 22 000 testifiers, the<br />

government has only authorised the payment <strong>of</strong> US$74 million Ð less than 20% <strong>of</strong> the original<br />

recommendation (Michael, 2003). While symbolic and community reparations will be an important<br />

step beyond monetary compensation, these are occurring slowly and other forms <strong>of</strong> reparations have<br />

yet to be discussed. For example, given the levels <strong>of</strong> trauma excised through the TRC process, more<br />

comprehensive health and mental health strategies could certainly have been generated. While<br />

victim empowerment and <strong>of</strong>fender-victim dialoguing has been established in some instances, victim<br />

support services have not been established as a sustained effort (see for example, Stauffer and<br />

Hamber, 1995). In addition, even though the Reconstruction and Development Programme (RDP) <strong>of</strong><br />

the new <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n government was in part construed as a socio-economic measure aimed at<br />

reparations for the majority <strong>of</strong> the black population, its intentions were unattainable in the context <strong>of</strong><br />

the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n and global economy from the start (Stevens, 1996), and it has now effectively been<br />

abandoned. Finally, questions as to the success <strong>of</strong> the TRC in promoting lasting reconciliation<br />

through the process <strong>of</strong> restorative social justice remain, and this scepticism is supported by an array<br />

<strong>of</strong> empirical studies that have shown contrary findings (see for example, Hamber, 1997).<br />

A CRITICAL APPRAISAL<br />

At the level <strong>of</strong> its own internal mandate, the TRC certainly went a long way to meeting its stated<br />

objectives. Over 22 000 people testified in hearings before the TRC, and information pertaining to<br />

gross human rights violations that had occurred under apartheid emerged for the first time into the<br />

public domain. The extent <strong>of</strong> the accounts was in some way more than what many had ever<br />

anticipated and certainly helped to contribute to a more complex set <strong>of</strong> social histories that had until<br />

then not been acknowledged within the public sphere. Furthermore, more than 6000 people applied<br />

for amnesty within the framework <strong>of</strong> the TRC Ð certainly a significant number <strong>of</strong> people who<br />

acknowledged the need to take some degree <strong>of</strong> responsibility for their deeds during the apartheid<br />

years (SATRC, 1998).<br />

However, because peacemaking and peacebuilding strategies such as the TRC are embedded within<br />

and emerge out <strong>of</strong> pre-existing conflictual social conditions, they are themselves invariably politically<br />

and ideologically influenced. In the case <strong>of</strong> the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n TRC, the politics and economics <strong>of</strong><br />

negotiation and compromise became the hegemonic ideological discourse on which the TRC was<br />

premised and so severely constrained the potential impact <strong>of</strong> the TRC. For instance the issue <strong>of</strong><br />

34


eparations was heavily influenced by the economic imperatives <strong>of</strong> post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

Despite the TRC's valuable recommendations, the reduced one-<strong>of</strong>f payment to victims <strong>of</strong> apartheid<br />

can only be seen as a token form <strong>of</strong> economic reparation, and the ANC government also vehemently<br />

opposed the idea <strong>of</strong> imposing a wealth tax on business. Furthermore, attempts to lodge class action<br />

lawsuits against several multinationals have been met with absolute antagonism from the state,<br />

arguing that it is bad for business (Michael, 2003).<br />

While the TRC certainly contributed to forgiveness, healing and reconciliation for many individuals,<br />

and countless others probably benefited from the process vicariously, many <strong>of</strong> the structural<br />

inequities arising out <strong>of</strong> apartheid remain salient in contemporary <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society.<br />

Reconciliation is unlikely to be experienced as a widespread phenomenon when social relations<br />

remain fundamentally unequal in post-conflict contexts.<br />

As this article has attempted to draw out some <strong>of</strong> the most salient lessons and challenges <strong>of</strong> the<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n TRC, it is fair to state that as an institutionalised form <strong>of</strong> peacemaking and<br />

peacebuilding, the TRC has had mixed results and impacts, (depending on the ideological position<br />

that one holds in contemporary <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n society). However, despite the critique embedded in<br />

the above argument, there is no doubt that truth commissions have a potentially significant role to<br />

play in social transition from conflict to peace, and as such should be supported. Nevertheless, truth<br />

commissions only provide one partial strategy for peacemaking and peacebuilding in post-conflict,<br />

transitionary societies. Ash (2003) refers to purges, trials and history lessons (e.g. truth commissions)<br />

as potential tools to assist such societies. While this article has dealt with the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n TRC as a<br />

form <strong>of</strong> history lesson, the concept <strong>of</strong> social justice is likely to require elements <strong>of</strong> restorative,<br />

retributive and reparative mechanisms <strong>of</strong> justice. Even though truth commissions may have the<br />

potential to fulfil objectives related to restorative justice, trials may be necessary for those who have<br />

clearly committed crimes against humanity, and purges may be vital to prevent those complicit in acts<br />

<strong>of</strong> human rights violations from ever holding public <strong>of</strong>fice again. The success <strong>of</strong> truth commissions is<br />

also dependent upon historical adversaries holding similar levels <strong>of</strong> power within a society (i.e. where<br />

the balance <strong>of</strong> forces are more equitably distributed), and concrete strategies that provide social,<br />

economic and political redress for those who have been marginalised. In <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, despite the<br />

limited economic redress, the political and moral balance <strong>of</strong> forces had shifted to a level conducive to<br />

peacemaking and peacebuilding. Political and social consensus had been broadly attained in support<br />

<strong>of</strong> the TRC, thereby ensuring some degree <strong>of</strong> legitimacy for the process and its final outcomes,<br />

despite its limitations (e.g. even though historical accounts were contested during the hearings, the<br />

final report <strong>of</strong> the TRC appears to have generated minimal discontent from broad cross-sections <strong>of</strong><br />

the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n population). Wherever truth commissions do occur, they should not however be<br />

romanticised, but thoughtfully premised on the imperatives facing a particular social formation in<br />

nation-building, as well as on the universally accepted principles <strong>of</strong> social justice, international law<br />

and human rights (van der Vijver, 2000). So in the context <strong>of</strong> globalisation, wars and conflicts the role<br />

<strong>of</strong> international communities in ensuring that these universal principles are promoted within truth<br />

commissions will become increasingly important, especially as we attempt to hold all those<br />

responsible for wars, conflicts and human rights atrocities accountable on an international scale.<br />

35


ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS<br />

I would like to thank Clinton van der Walt and Vije Franchi, colleagues with whom I previously<br />

collaborated on a similar topic, and whose seminal ideas are reflected in this paper.<br />

NOTES<br />

1. The placing <strong>of</strong> words or concepts between single quotation marks generally indicates that its<br />

validity is being queried, and suggests that the meaning broadly ascribed to the concept or word<br />

is not accepted by the author. With reference to concepts related to racism, it is primarily a critical<br />

discursive strategy to avoid unwittingly reproducing essentialised notions <strong>of</strong> distinctly separate<br />

and unequal biological races and associated racialising processes.<br />

REFERENCES<br />

Adam, H. & Adam, K. (2000). The politics <strong>of</strong> memory in a divided society. In W. James & D. P. van<br />

der Vijver (Eds), After the TRC: Reflections on truth and reconciliation in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 32-47).<br />

Cape Town: David Phillip.<br />

Alexander, N. (1985). Sowthe wind. Johannesburg: Skotaville.<br />

Ash, T.G. (2003). Future <strong>of</strong> the past. Hindustan Times, April 11.<br />

Baldwin-Ragaven, L., de Gruchy, J. & London, L. (1999). An ambulance <strong>of</strong> the wrong colour. Health<br />

pr<strong>of</strong>essionals, human rights and ethics in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Rondebosch: UCT Press.<br />

Bhargava, R. (2000). Restoring decency to barbaric societies. In R. Kotberg & D. Thompson (Eds),<br />

The morality <strong>of</strong> truth commissions (pp. 45-66). New Jersey: Princeton <strong>University</strong> Press.<br />

Boraine, A. (2000). The language <strong>of</strong> potential. In W. James & D. P. van der Vijver (Eds), After the<br />

TRC: Reflections on truth and reconciliation in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp.73-81). Cape Town: David Phillip.<br />

Brecker, C. (1994). Left faces new challenge. International Viewpoint, 257, 6-12.<br />

Bundy, C. (2000). The beast <strong>of</strong> the past. In W. James & D. P. van der Vijver (Eds), After the TRC:<br />

Reflections on truth and reconciliation in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp.9-20). Cape Town: David Phillip.<br />

Burger, M. & Gould, C. (2002). Secrets and lies. Cape Town: Zebra Press.<br />

Burton, M. (2000). Reparation, amnesty and a national archive. In W. James & L. van der Vijver<br />

(Eds), After the TRC: Reflections on truth and reconciliation in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 109-114). Cape<br />

Town: David Philip.<br />

Callinicos, L. (1987). Working life 1886-1940. Johannesburg: Ravan Press.<br />

Christie, D.J., Wagner, R.V. & Winter, D.D. (2001). Peace, conflict and violence: Peace psychology<br />

for the 21st century. New Jersey: Prentice Hall.<br />

36


Crawford, N.C. (2000). The passion <strong>of</strong> world politics: Propositions on emotions and emotional<br />

relationships. International Security, 24(4), 116-156.<br />

de la Rey, C. (2001). Reconciliation in divided societies. In D.J. Christie, R.V. Wagner & D.D. Winter<br />

(Eds), Peace, conflict and violence: Peace psychology for the 21st century (pp. 251-261). New<br />

Jersey: Prentice Hall.<br />

Hamber, B. (1997). Reflecting on the truth: Has the media coverage <strong>of</strong> the TRC changed the way the<br />

public sees itself, its history and its responsibility? Paper presented at the TRC and Human Rights<br />

Journalism in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> Workshop, Rosebank Hotel, Johannesburg, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, 3 October.<br />

Hamber, B. E. (1995a). Dealing with the past and the psychology <strong>of</strong> reconciliation: A psychological<br />

perspective <strong>of</strong> the Truth and Reconciliation Commission. Occasional Paper. Johannesburg, <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>: The Centre for the Study <strong>of</strong> Violence & Reconciliation.<br />

Hamber, B. E. (1995b). Do sleeping dogs lie? The psychological implications <strong>of</strong> the Truth and<br />

Reconciliation Commission in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Occasional Paper. Johannesburg, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: The<br />

Centre for the Study <strong>of</strong> Violence & Reconciliation.<br />

James, W. & van der Vijver, L. (Eds) (2000). After the TRC: Reflections on truth and reconciliation in<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Cape Town: David Philip.<br />

Jeffery, A. (1999). The truth about the Truth Commission. Johannesburg: <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Institute <strong>of</strong><br />

Race Relations.<br />

Lederach, J.P. (1997). Building peace: Sustainable reconciliation in divided societies. Washington,<br />

DC: United States Institute <strong>of</strong> Peace.<br />

Magwaza, A. (2001). Submissions to the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth and Reconciliation Commission: The<br />

reflections <strong>of</strong> a commissioner on the culpability <strong>of</strong> psychology. In N. Duncan, A. van Niekerk, C. de la<br />

Rey & M. Seedat (Eds), Race, racism, knowledge production and psychology in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 37-<br />

44). New York: Nova Science Publishers, Inc.<br />

Marais, H. (1998). <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: Limits to change: The political economy <strong>of</strong> transition. Cape Town:<br />

UCT Press.<br />

Michael, M.T. (2003). Moment <strong>of</strong> truth. World Press ReviewOnline, May 2. Retrieved April 15, 2003,<br />

from http://www.worldpress.org/<strong>Africa</strong>/1077.cfm.<br />

Motsemme, N. & Ratele, K. (2002). Losing life and re-making nation: The Truth and Reconciliation<br />

Commission. In N. Duncan, P.D. Gqola, M. H<strong>of</strong>meyer, T. Shefer, F. Malunga & M. Mashige (Eds),<br />

Discourses on difference. Discourses on oppression (pp. 407-426). Cape Town: CASAS.<br />

Neier, A. (1998). War crimes: Brutality, genocide, terror and the struggle for justice. New York: Times<br />

Books.<br />

O'Meara, D. (1983). Volkskapitalisme. Braamfontein: Ravan Press.<br />

37


Posel, D. (1999). The TRC Report: What kind <strong>of</strong> history? What kind <strong>of</strong> truth? Paper presented at the<br />

Wits History Workshop and the Centre for the Study <strong>of</strong> Violence and Reconciliation Conference,<br />

TRC: Commissioning the Past, June 1999, Johannesburg, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

SAJP (2000). Perspectives on the Truth and Reconciliation Commission. <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Journal <strong>of</strong><br />

Psychology, Special Issue, 30(1), 1-59.<br />

Sanson, A. & Bretherton, D. (2001). Conflict resolution: Theoretical and practical issues. In D.J.<br />

Christie, R.V. Wagner & D.D. Winter (Eds), Peace, conflict and violence: Peace psychology for the<br />

21st century (pp. 193-209). New Jersey: Prentice Hall.<br />

Saul, J.S. (1986). Introduction: The revolutionary prospect. In J.S. Saul & S. Gelb (Eds), The crisis in<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 9-52). New York: Monthly Review Press.<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth and Reconciliation Commission (SATRC) (1998). Truth and Reconciliation<br />

Commission <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> Report. Cape Town: Author.<br />

Stauffer, C. & Hamber, B. (1995). Putting a face on the past: Survivor-<strong>of</strong>fender mediation and the<br />

Truth and Reconciliation Commission. Occasional Paper. Johannesburg, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: The Centre for<br />

the Study <strong>of</strong> Violence & Reconciliation.<br />

Stevens, G. (1996). The `racialised' discourses <strong>of</strong> a group <strong>of</strong> black parents and adolescents in a<br />

Western Cape community. Unpublished masters thesis. <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Western Cape, Bellville,<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

Suffla, S. (2004). Peacemaking and peacebuilding. In L. Swartz, C. de la Rey & N. Duncan (Eds),<br />

Psychology (pp. 313-322). Cape Town: Oxford <strong>University</strong> Press.<br />

Terreblanche, S. & Nattrass, N. (1990). A periodisation <strong>of</strong> the political economy from 1910. In N.<br />

Nattrass & E. Ardington (Eds), The political economy <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 6-23). Cape Town: Oxford<br />

<strong>University</strong> Press.<br />

Tutu, D. (1997). Foreword. In A. Boraine, J. Levy & R. Scheffer (Eds), Dealing with the past: Truth<br />

and reconciliation in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. vii-viii). Cape Town: IDASA.<br />

van der Vijver, L. (2000). The amnesty process. In W. James & L. van der Vijver (Eds), After the<br />

TRC: Reflections on truth and reconciliation in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 128-139). Cape Town: David Philip.<br />

van der Walt, C., Franchi, V. & Stevens, G. (2003). The <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth and Reconciliation<br />

Commission: `Race', historical compromise and transitional democracy. International Journal <strong>of</strong><br />

Intercultural Relations, 27(2), 251-267.<br />

van der Walt, C.M. (1999). The trauma <strong>of</strong> telling: An examination <strong>of</strong> testimony in the Truth and<br />

Reconciliation Commission. Unpublished honours thesis, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> the Witwatersrand,<br />

Johannesburg, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

van Zyl Slabbert, F. (1999). Tough choices: Reflections <strong>of</strong> an Afrikaner <strong>Africa</strong>n. Cape Town: Tafelberg<br />

Publishers.<br />

38


Villa-Vicencio, C. (2000). On the limitations <strong>of</strong> academic history: The quest for truth demands both<br />

more and less. In W. James & D. P. van der Vijver (Eds), After the TRC: Reflections on truth and<br />

reconciliation in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp.21-31). Cape Town: David Phillip.<br />

Wolpe, H. (1988). Race, class and the apartheid state. Addis Ababa: Organisation for <strong>Africa</strong>n Unity.<br />

39


NON-VIOLENT CONFLICT<br />

RESOLUTION AND PEACEBUILDING<br />

IN SOUTH AFRICA<br />

Martin Terre Blanche 1<br />

Department <strong>of</strong> Psychology, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

ABSTRACT<br />

In this article I use two recent media events to consider the history <strong>of</strong> and prospects for peaceful<br />

transformation in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. First, I use the cricket World Cup to dramatise the post-colonial global<br />

context within which modern-day <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n subjectivities have come into being. I argue that while<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns, and in particular black <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns, are constrained by discourses <strong>of</strong> exoticism,<br />

they also make positive use <strong>of</strong> the ``double consciousness'' which is thus foisted on them to forge<br />

newforms <strong>of</strong> personal and national identity. Second, I use local opposition to the war against Iraq as<br />

emblematic <strong>of</strong> the role played by civil society and peaceful protest in bringing about <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s<br />

political transformation. However, I argue that the social capital built up before, during and<br />

immediately after the apartheid years is nowbeing eclipsed by the global predominance <strong>of</strong> private<br />

capital.<br />

Much <strong>of</strong> the discussion during the Indo-<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n dialogue, at which this article was presented,<br />

revolved around a particular <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n peacebuilding institution, namely the Truth and<br />

Reconciliation Commission (TRC). This is perhaps not surprising as, for many, the TRC continues to<br />

represent the essence <strong>of</strong> what is special about the emergence <strong>of</strong> democracy in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Over<br />

the past two decades, more than 24 countries have followed <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s example and created<br />

<strong>of</strong>ficial truth commissions (Wilson, 2003), and prominent figures in the TRC, such as archbishop<br />

Desmond Tutu, continue to be popular figures on the international conference circuit (Kretzmann &<br />

Mjekula, 2003).<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Martin Terre Blanche, Department <strong>of</strong> Psychology, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, P.O. Box 392, UNISA, 0003, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>;<br />

Tel. +27 +12 429-8085; Fax. +27 +12 429-3414; E-mail: terremj@unisa.ac.za<br />

40


However, an important purpose <strong>of</strong> the Indo-<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n dialogue was to examine not only specific<br />

and highly publicised institutions such as the TRC, but also the broader peace process in <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>. Accordingly, various mappings <strong>of</strong> the wider <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n political landscape are provided in<br />

this issue (see Duncan, and Stevens), each <strong>of</strong> which in a different way helps to place initiatives such<br />

as the TRC in context. Inevitably, each <strong>of</strong> these mappings glosses over some <strong>of</strong> the significant<br />

intricacies and paradoxes <strong>of</strong> the peace process, but collectively they hopefully do provide a useful<br />

overview <strong>of</strong> the politics <strong>of</strong> peace and violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

The map I draw in this article is not, as it were, executed from the top down, but instead tries to<br />

suggest the general contours <strong>of</strong> peacebuilding in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> from the bottom up Ð by highlighting<br />

two recent quintessentially <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n events in which I participated.<br />

A GAME OF CRICKET<br />

I experienced the first event vicariously, as part <strong>of</strong> the estimated 1.2 billion cricket enthusiasts<br />

worldwide who viewed the opening ceremony <strong>of</strong> the 2003 cricket World Cup on television. The<br />

ceremony, and the World Cup as a whole, were very much a product <strong>of</strong> global media culture, but at<br />

the same time also typically <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n. Apart from the obligatory speeches, it consisted mostly <strong>of</strong><br />

an elaborately staged and choreographed pageant showcasing <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s `rainbow nation' and<br />

natural beauty. Like the rugby World Cup in 1995, what was being presented was, in the words <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n novelist, J.M. Coetzee (1995), ``a de-historicized vision <strong>of</strong> Tourist <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>''. The<br />

pageant was therefore, at one level, fairly straightforwardly just another symptom <strong>of</strong> what Said (1978)<br />

calls orientalism. Orientalism describes a world in which Euro-American culture has become so<br />

pervasive that other cultural and political realities have become thinkable and doable only as<br />

something exotic Ð not only by Euro-Americans, but also by the very people who have been<br />

positioned as exotic foils to the West.<br />

At best those who are considered exotic, and who have learned to consider themselves as such, will<br />

be made to parade, or will themselves willingly parade, before Western eyes as an interesting<br />

entertainment. At worst non-Westerners will, as occurred again in the war against Iraq, be<br />

constrained to take on the mantle <strong>of</strong> wretchedness, incompetence and savagery.<br />

The cricket World Cup opening ceremony, and the tournament as a whole, were conditioned as much<br />

by willing acquiescence with exoticism-as-entertainment as by an attempt to dispel the image <strong>of</strong><br />

exoticism-as-horror. It was as important for <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns, and for those who were watching us, that<br />

the pageant should show us at our exotically entertaining best, and that everything should go <strong>of</strong>f<br />

smoothly. There should be no power failures, no unexpected strikes, and <strong>of</strong> course no violence.<br />

In both the `developed' and the `developing' world, `the power failure' is more than an inconvenience<br />

Ð it is metonymic <strong>of</strong> having been left behind by modernity, <strong>of</strong> being unable to maintain the requisite<br />

technological and organisational efficiency to run a modern technocratic state. As Mitter (2003, n.p.)<br />

puts it: ``nothing says Third World quite like a power outage''. Thus, the most memorable sound bite<br />

from the massive electricity blackout that struck the North-East <strong>of</strong> the United States and Canada in<br />

August 2003 was the remark by New Mexico governor, Bill Richardson, a former energy secretary<br />

41


during the Clinton administration, that the United States was ``a global superpower with a Third World<br />

electricity grid''.<br />

For North Americans the blackout was an anomaly that threatened to disrupt the familiar categories<br />

<strong>of</strong> `First World' and `Third World' Ð as much an ideological as a practical crisis. In Middle America,<br />

newspaper editors, intellectuals and politicians scrambled to discursively manage this threat to the<br />

First World's image <strong>of</strong> itself. Thus, the Belleville Intelligencer (2003) quickly pointed out that things<br />

are even worse in the `Third World' (``we think the Haitians wouldn't mind a grid like ours''); a group<br />

called ``Citizens for Pennsylvania's Future'' (2003, n.p.) rushed to the nation's defence with a press<br />

release insisting that ``the electric system is highly reliable, though not perfect''; while the journal<br />

Nature had physicist Benjamin Carreras explaining how the blackout was in fact a sign <strong>of</strong> the high<br />

quality <strong>of</strong> the American system as reliable systems are prone to occasional large failures, whereas in<br />

less robust systems, such as is in India for example, ``the tension in the network gets released in<br />

many small jolts'' (Suellentrop, 2003, n.p.).<br />

Susan Douglas (2003, n.p.), writing in InTheseTimes, perhaps most straightforwardly expressed the<br />

nature <strong>of</strong> the crisis: ``How, like, totally embarrassing''.<br />

In <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, during the cricket World Cup, there were no such embarrassments. Things did go<br />

smoothly. For Ali Bacher, the chief executive <strong>of</strong> the cricket World Cup company, as perhaps for most<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns, the great achievement <strong>of</strong> the Cup was that we managed to stage a ``world-class<br />

event'' with the same level <strong>of</strong> competence as any <strong>of</strong> the <strong>of</strong>ficially ``world-class'' countries such as the<br />

UK, the USA or Australia would have. In particular, security issues were handled to perfection. As<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n commentators have been repeating ad nauseam, not even a single violent incident <strong>of</strong><br />

any significance was reported during the entire tournament. <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> previously staged a similar<br />

``world-class'' event, the rugby World Cup in 1995, with equal success, but for countries outside the<br />

Western mainstream it is <strong>of</strong> course necessary to prove again and again that they are still safely<br />

ensconced on the entertaining side <strong>of</strong> exoticism and have not regressed towards its more abject side.<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> has to show, and keep on showing, that it has arrived at the blessed state <strong>of</strong> late<br />

capitalist development where, in the words <strong>of</strong> Francis Fukuyama (1992), history has ended.<br />

This, in essence, is what <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s non-violent revolution has achieved. We have positioned<br />

ourselves, at least for the moment, and perhaps only in our own eyes, as the `other' who can be<br />

regarded fondly, even if with some puzzled amusement. We will play the role <strong>of</strong> friendly, smiling<br />

natives to the world's media, and to ourselves, and will not become that other who must be feared or<br />

pitied.<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> is <strong>of</strong> course not the only country to have arrived at this juncture, but now merely joins a<br />

throng <strong>of</strong> other `developing' countries (perhaps including India) who have been striving for many<br />

decades to run themselves as modern, technocratic states with an eye on the tourist industry. The<br />

same kinds <strong>of</strong> dynamics that exist between `developing countries' and `the West' also play<br />

themselves out in the internal politics <strong>of</strong> these countries. In <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, poor provinces try to live up<br />

to the standards <strong>of</strong> rich provinces; black <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns look at themselves through white eyes; poor<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns judge themselves by the yardstick <strong>of</strong> affluence.<br />

42


A century ago W.E.B. DuBois (1903, pp. 2-3) described how this kind <strong>of</strong> double consciousness<br />

operates for <strong>Africa</strong>n Americans:<br />

After the Egyptian and Indian, the Greek and Roman, the Teuton and Mongolian, the Negro is a<br />

sort <strong>of</strong> seventh son, born with a veil, and gifted with second-sight in this American world Ð a<br />

world which yields him no true self-consciousness, but only lets him see himself through the<br />

revelation <strong>of</strong> the other world. It is a peculiar sensation, this double-consciousness, this sense <strong>of</strong><br />

always looking at one's self through the eyes <strong>of</strong> others, <strong>of</strong> measuring one's soul by the tape <strong>of</strong> a<br />

world that looks on in amused contempt and pity.<br />

This double consciousness, <strong>of</strong> being simultaneously the other and the one doing the othering, was<br />

described by Frantz Fanon (1965, 1967) as a kind <strong>of</strong> psychic disfigurement from which colonised<br />

people can recover only by consciously embracing exoticism-as-horror, choosing violence over<br />

peaceful docility. It was also neatly dramatised in the cricket World Cup opening ceremony by the<br />

device <strong>of</strong> including in the pageant, a safari vehicle full <strong>of</strong> ``foreign'' tourists, with local comedian Mark<br />

Lottering as tour guide. These tourists acted in exactly the kinds <strong>of</strong> silly, camera-wielding ways<br />

tourists are supposed to Ð dutifully consuming the various pieces <strong>of</strong> exoticism-as-entertainment<br />

being put on display for them and even flirting with the idea <strong>of</strong> exoticism-as-horror by pretending to<br />

be afraid <strong>of</strong> some <strong>of</strong> the more extravagant stage effects.<br />

A first reading <strong>of</strong> spectacles such as the cricket World Cup is therefore that they are precisely the<br />

kind <strong>of</strong> symptom one would expect to see in the aftermath <strong>of</strong> a non-violent revolution; as such, a<br />

revolution can at best represent an accommodation between the oppressors and an elite group<br />

among the formerly oppressed. The elite are those who have essentially taken on the language and<br />

mentality <strong>of</strong> the oppressor, and are therefore able to negotiate a settlement in terms intelligible to the<br />

oppressor while at the same time clinging to a romanticised, exotic vision <strong>of</strong> themselves as somehow<br />

other-than-the-oppressor. This kind <strong>of</strong> analysis <strong>of</strong> the current <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n situation, as a peaceful<br />

accommodation between ruling elites at the expense <strong>of</strong>, say, the poor is now extremely common, and<br />

one which I personally find highly seductive.<br />

However, a somewhat more positive reading is also possible. Although post-apartheid, 21st century<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> clearly finds itself constrained by the discursive field created by Western concepts <strong>of</strong><br />

exoticism, I would like to think that it (along with other countries in a similar position) is far from being<br />

inextricably caught in this field. The inclusion <strong>of</strong> tourists and a safari vehicle in the cricket World Cup<br />

pageant in fact symbolises, in a small way, one <strong>of</strong> the escape routes still available to us. The pageant<br />

was not straightforwardly only about putting on a show <strong>of</strong> exoticism, but also about showing up the<br />

spectators as something <strong>of</strong> a spectacle themselves, and perhaps even about looking at ourselves<br />

looking at others looking at us. There is a certain knowingness in the way people in the `Third World'<br />

can position themselves simultaneously as part <strong>of</strong> and other to the global mainstream Ð a certain<br />

sophistication and tolerance <strong>of</strong> apparent contradictions Ð which cannot be achieved in the more unidimensional<br />

cultural and political circumstances that now obtain in much <strong>of</strong> the `West'.<br />

While large sections <strong>of</strong> the American and British public have fallen under the spell <strong>of</strong> war-mongering<br />

extremists who perceive the world monochromatically, in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, nobody seems to find it<br />

remarkable that at the time <strong>of</strong> my writing this article our minister <strong>of</strong> finance was a former trade union<br />

activist or that our deputy minister <strong>of</strong> defence was a Quaker pacifist. At some level, such members <strong>of</strong><br />

43


the new governing elite have indeed sold out and taken on the outer trappings and authoritarian<br />

attitudes <strong>of</strong> their former masters. However, they are also, I would like to believe, able to reflect on and<br />

recognise the creative possibilities <strong>of</strong> the contradictory positions they find themselves in as postcolonial<br />

subjects. For example, according to Nozizwe Madlala-Routledge, the deputy minister <strong>of</strong><br />

defence at the time <strong>of</strong> writing this article, her vision was ``to transform military culture, reduce<br />

weapons proliferation, confront the arms industry and provide the leadership in the region for a stable<br />

and lasting peace'' (Moix, 1999, n.p.). Although Madlala-Routledge has not exactly made good on<br />

these promises (she has been party to a large arms procurement deal signed by the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

government), it is certainly not the kind <strong>of</strong> rhetoric one would expect <strong>of</strong> a `Western' minister <strong>of</strong><br />

defence.<br />

It may be true, as DuBois (1903, p. 3) puts it, that the history <strong>of</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Americans (and, one could<br />

argue with Fanon, <strong>of</strong> colonised people all over the world) is conditioned by a single longing Ð ``to<br />

attain self-conscious manhood, to merge his double self into a better and truer self''. However, while<br />

DuBois (1903, p. 3) talks about double consciousness as a form <strong>of</strong> psychic disfigurement, it is<br />

simultaneously also a form <strong>of</strong> consciousness that goes beyond the ordinary `black folk' are ``gifted<br />

with second-sight''.<br />

When <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> increasingly operates as a would-be `First World' state, when it uses the<br />

quintessentially Western concept <strong>of</strong> ``renaissance'' to try and cajole other <strong>Africa</strong>n countries into doing<br />

the same, it is easy to portray what is happening as simply another case <strong>of</strong> selling out to the financial<br />

and ideological status quo. And when this process is presented, as I attempt to do in this article, as<br />

having been essentially peaceful, it seems obvious not only that there has been a sell-out, but that it<br />

is based on historical duplicity. As Homi Bhabha (2002, n.p.) puts it:<br />

Here was an instance <strong>of</strong> liberation through liberalism, liberation apparently facilitated by the<br />

rational forces <strong>of</strong> the market, by a democratic social movement, by the good <strong>of</strong>fices <strong>of</strong><br />

international institutions ... Hidden, sometimes not so hidden, in the process was a great degree <strong>of</strong><br />

brutality, a civil war in fact, fomented by the apartheid state; a reign <strong>of</strong> terror now fading into the<br />

recesses <strong>of</strong> memory except among those who suffered its bombs and bullets and beatings.<br />

However, Bhabha (1990, p. 85), like DuBois, recognises that what emerges is much more than<br />

rejection or appropriation <strong>of</strong> colonial cultural goods, or even simply a form <strong>of</strong> subjectivity tragically<br />

split between these two poles, but instead the colonial experience ``<strong>of</strong>ten produces a text rich in the<br />

traditions <strong>of</strong> trompe-l'oeil, irony, mimicry and repetition''. Even a relatively commercial group such as<br />

the Soweto String Quartet (who don zebra-striped suits to play a mixture <strong>of</strong> `classical', jazz, and<br />

traditional Afrikaans music to predominantly white audiences) are clearly engaged in a far more<br />

complex game than simply capitulating to, or being split in two by, the colonial gaze.<br />

OUTSIDE THE AMERICAN EMBASSY<br />

The second quintessentially <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n event I participated in was also to a large extent staged for<br />

Euro-American consumption, but rather than an entertainment it was intended as a peaceful protest.<br />

As it turned out, it was never televised Ð so rather than 1.2 billion participants there were only about<br />

120 <strong>of</strong> us. The event was a candle-lit vigil outside the American embassy in Pretoria on the first night,<br />

44


and on every subsequent night, <strong>of</strong> the war against Iraq. The embassy is in a leafy suburb on the<br />

same street as the Indian embassy, but whereas the latter operates from an elegant colonial<br />

mansion, the US embassy resembles nothing more than a heavily fortified steel and reinforced<br />

concrete bunker.<br />

The protest was staged by the Anti-War Coalition which, as is usual in this kind <strong>of</strong> protest politics,<br />

consists <strong>of</strong> a loose amalgamation <strong>of</strong> highly disparate organisations. Here is a partial list <strong>of</strong> the motley<br />

crew <strong>of</strong> organisations forming the coalition, giving something <strong>of</strong> the flavour <strong>of</strong> the kinds <strong>of</strong> micro and<br />

macro issues around which civic society in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> organises:<br />

Anti-Eviction Campaign, Anti-Privatisation Forum, Athlone Concerned Civic Residents Association,<br />

Azanian Peoples' Organization, Black Consciousness Forum, Bophelong Community Service<br />

Forum, Botshebelo Palestine Solidarity Committee, Ceasefire Campaign, Concerned Citizens<br />

Forum, Delft Concerned Residents Movement, Democratic Socialist Movement, Environmental<br />

Justice Networking Forum, Free Burma Campaign, Freedom <strong>of</strong> Expression Institute, Guguletu<br />

Anti-Privatisation Forum, Human Rights Foundation, Ikageng Crisis Committee, Indymedia, Inner<br />

City Anti-Eviction Campaign, Ironside Civic Movement, Islamic Action, Johannesburg Palestine<br />

Solidarity Committee, Jubilee <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, Kanana Community Development Forum, Kathorus<br />

Concerned Residents, Keep Left, Khanya College, KTC Concerned Residents Movement,<br />

Lakeside, Landless Access Movement <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, Landless Peoples Movement, Lavender<br />

Hill Anti-Eviction Campaign, Lekoa-Vaal Community Forum, Mabuluka Vukuzenzele Ð Pretoria,<br />

Malboro/Alex, Mandela Park Action Youth Housing Committee, Mandela Village Durban Deep,<br />

Media Review Network, Mfuleni Anti-Eviction Campaign, Mohideen Civic Ð Potchestroom,<br />

Mothers for Services, Muslim Students Association, Muslim Youth Movement, Orange Farm Water<br />

Crisis Committee, Palestine Solidarity Committee, Pan-<strong>Africa</strong>n Congress, Riverpark Residents<br />

Committee Rural Development Services Network, Smallfarm Community Forum, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

Catholic Bishops Council, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n NGO Coalition, Social Movement Indaba, Socialist Party<br />

<strong>of</strong> Azania, Socialist Students Movement, Soldiers Forum, Soweto Electricity Crisis Committee,<br />

Squatter Families <strong>of</strong> Faure Road, Strand Concerned Group, Tafelsig Anti-Eviction Campaign,<br />

Tafelsig Concerned Parents, Tambo Square Concerned Residents Movement, Thembelihle Crisis<br />

Committee, Trust for Community Outreach and Education, Tshakane Residents Committee,<br />

United Civics <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, Valhalla Park United Civic Front, Vukuzenzele Residents Committee<br />

Ð Alex, Waterless Community <strong>of</strong> Fisantekraal, Workers' Organisation for Socialist Action,<br />

Workers' Party, Working Class Coordinating Committee Ð Vaal, Youth for Work, Zamdela<br />

Palestine Solidarity Committee.<br />

Together with larger umbrella groupings such as the Congress <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Trade Unions, the<br />

Azanian People's Organisation (AZAPO), the Pan <strong>Africa</strong>n Congress (PAC), the <strong>Africa</strong>n National<br />

Congress (ANC), the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Communist Party and the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Council <strong>of</strong> Churches,<br />

these are the types <strong>of</strong> organisations that were at the forefront <strong>of</strong> the struggle against apartheid. Preliberation<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> is now <strong>of</strong>ten imagined in terms <strong>of</strong> a protracted period <strong>of</strong> low-intensity armed<br />

struggle, followed by a brief period <strong>of</strong> high-level negotiations from 1990 to 1994. What is underplayed<br />

in such accounts is the fact that most <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s liberation history was not characterised either<br />

by overt violence or by peace negotiations between leaders, but by large- and small-scale, nonviolent,<br />

grassroots attempts at bringing the regime to a fall.<br />

45


Indeed, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> has a long history <strong>of</strong> non-violent struggle. Shortly after <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> was united<br />

as a country in 1910, Gandhi led a series <strong>of</strong> passive resistance campaigns against the pass laws. In<br />

1923, the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Indian Congress was formed and used passive resistance to protest against<br />

many discriminatory laws. The <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Indian Congress also cooperated with the ANC in the<br />

Defiance Campaign <strong>of</strong> 1952, and was present at the signing <strong>of</strong> the Freedom Charter in 1955.<br />

Historically, it was only after all other avenues <strong>of</strong> protest had been closed that organisations such as<br />

the ANC and PAC turned to violence. The Programme <strong>of</strong> Action <strong>of</strong> 1949, and the Defiance Campaign<br />

<strong>of</strong> 1952 used boycotts, strikes, civil disobedience and non-cooperation to show opposition to the<br />

apartheid system. Smaller groups, such as the Federation <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Women (Fedsaw) and the<br />

Black Sash also made use <strong>of</strong> demonstrations and protest marches.<br />

During the late 1960s and 1970s, student movements like the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Students Organisation<br />

and the Black People's Convention utilised the Black Consciousness philosophy to instil pride and<br />

psychologically undermine the apartheid system. During the 1970s and 1980s, various other groups<br />

were formed to resist apartheid, many <strong>of</strong> them growing out <strong>of</strong> the legacies <strong>of</strong> the Black<br />

Consciousness Movement. For example, in 1978, the Azanian People's Organisation (AZAPO) was<br />

formed, while in 1983 the United Democratic Front (UDF) was established as an umbrella body<br />

representing about 600 anti-apartheid organisations. In 1984 the National Forum, another umbrella<br />

body, was founded to oppose the new constitution, and this body organised a boycott <strong>of</strong> the August<br />

1984 elections. On the labour front, the formation <strong>of</strong> the Congress <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Trade Unions<br />

(Cosatu) in 1985 heralded the beginning <strong>of</strong> a long series <strong>of</strong> strikes and other forms <strong>of</strong> peaceful<br />

economic activism.<br />

Internationally, there was also a vast network <strong>of</strong> small and large organisations, and individuals who<br />

had anti-apartheid activism as one <strong>of</strong> their goals. Among the major peacefully achieved victories <strong>of</strong><br />

this network were the sports boycott and economic sanctions instituted against <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> by the<br />

United Nations. Although the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n regime, in part thanks to covert aid provided by<br />

governments and corporations in Europe and America, was not brought down by these measures, it<br />

created a climate in which it became clear even to them that the apartheid state had no long-term<br />

viability. The international anti-apartheid network was also instrumental in channelling hundreds <strong>of</strong><br />

millions <strong>of</strong> dollars in aid to democratically oriented <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n non-governmental organisations.<br />

Among many other countries, India was vociferous in its opposition to apartheid, attacking it in the<br />

General Assembly <strong>of</strong> the United Nations, for example, and strongly objecting to <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

remaining in the commonwealth while implementing apartheid policies.<br />

Internally, many <strong>of</strong> the civil society organisations (civics, trade unions, non-governmental<br />

organisations, political parties and churches) supported the armed struggle, but in practice,<br />

expressed their opposition to the state through non-violent means. In many cases, this may have<br />

been for the sake <strong>of</strong> expediency (to avoid arrest), direct oppression (many were in fact arrested and<br />

tortured or had elaborate legal constraints placed on them), or because they simply did not have the<br />

means for violent insurrection. There were also a fair number <strong>of</strong> well-publicised violent clashes with<br />

the police and the army. Nevertheless, for the most part, the anti-apartheid struggle in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

was characterised not by gunfire, but by peaceful protest. When overt anti-state violence did occur it<br />

was usually presented as a reaction to police provocation rather than as a deliberate strategy.<br />

46


As is <strong>of</strong>ten the case in situations <strong>of</strong> oppression, organisations claiming to represent or to be working<br />

on behalf <strong>of</strong> the oppressed seemed at times to spend as much time plotting and politicking against<br />

each other as against the state, but here too conflict was mostly <strong>of</strong> the peaceful variety. Major<br />

exceptions to this were the ongoing violence between UDF/ANC supporters and Inkatha Freedom<br />

Party (IFP) supporters among Zulu-speakers in the province <strong>of</strong> KwaZulu-Natal, and sporadic violence<br />

in Vaal triangle townships in Gauteng province, including so-called ``hostel violence'' and ``train<br />

violence''. All <strong>of</strong> these forms <strong>of</strong> violence were suspected at the time to be, and have since largely<br />

been shown to have been, instigated and sponsored by the state's security apparatus (Haysom,<br />

1992). With the exception <strong>of</strong> the violence in KwaZulu-Natal, which had been fostered over a lengthy<br />

period by the apartheid state, and which still continues to simmer, this violence rapidly disappeared<br />

with the coming <strong>of</strong> democracy, to be replaced by a variety <strong>of</strong> forms <strong>of</strong> criminal violence.<br />

Anybody who participated in one way or another in the workings <strong>of</strong> civil society organisations during<br />

the apartheid years will know that the predominant feeling was not one <strong>of</strong> optimism. Non-violent<br />

protest was the order <strong>of</strong> the day, but there was no great faith in its efficacy. The power imbalance<br />

between the regime and its opponents seemed too extreme ever to be overcome, and at times it<br />

seemed as if anti-apartheid organisations had fallen into a sterile routine <strong>of</strong> boycotting and registering<br />

outrage; that they had become institutionalised in a protest role which did not hold out any real<br />

prospect <strong>of</strong> bringing about change.<br />

Many were therefore caught by surprise when then State President, F.W. de Klerk, suddenly<br />

indicated, at the opening <strong>of</strong> the (mainly white) parliament in February 1990, that liberation<br />

movements would be unbanned, and that his government would enter into negotiations with them<br />

(address by the State President, F.W. de Klerk on 2 February 1990):<br />

[There is] a growing realisation by an increasing number <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns that only a negotiated<br />

understanding among the representative leaders <strong>of</strong> the entire population is able to ensure lasting<br />

peace. The alternative is growing violence, tension and conflict. That is unacceptable and in<br />

nobody's interest. The well-being <strong>of</strong> all in this country is linked inextricably to the ability <strong>of</strong> the<br />

leaders to come to terms with one another on a new dispensation. No-one can escape this simple<br />

truth.<br />

The ``simple truth'' proclaimed by De Klerk in 1990 is one which had been at the heart <strong>of</strong> the antiapartheid<br />

struggle from the outset, and to many, it therefore seemed like some sort <strong>of</strong> miracle that it<br />

should suddenly dawn on him in 1990, after he and most other white politicians had denied it for a<br />

century and more. A minor industry has since been established in presenting the non-violent<br />

resolution <strong>of</strong> the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n conflict as a miracle: De Klerk's supposed Damascus experience;<br />

Nelson Mandela's surprising lack <strong>of</strong> bitterness and conciliatory attitude towards white <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns;<br />

and a host <strong>of</strong> other minor miracles, such as Kenyan pr<strong>of</strong>essor, Washington Okumo's last-minute<br />

coup in getting IFP leader Mangosotho Buthelezi to sign up to the settlement.<br />

A more mundane explanation <strong>of</strong> the transition, and one which is all but explicitly acknowledged in De<br />

Klerk's 1990 speech, is that it happened for the following reasons:<br />

a) The international situation had altered to such an extent that there was no longer a danger that<br />

post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> would become part <strong>of</strong> the ``communist'' sphere <strong>of</strong> influence.<br />

47


) An ideological climate had been systematically created over a period <strong>of</strong> many decades in which<br />

the idea <strong>of</strong> a minority government simply no longer seemed tenable.<br />

In terms <strong>of</strong> ``internal'' conditions, it is therefore largely the (mainly peaceful) ideological struggle<br />

against apartheid which brought about its demise. As a result <strong>of</strong> this struggle the apartheid regime<br />

was on the ideological defensive almost from the outset Ð very quickly, for example, having to<br />

jettison the term apartheid, followed in quick succession by the abandonment <strong>of</strong> many forms <strong>of</strong> petty<br />

racism and increasingly baroque attempts at co-opting `coloured' and `Indian' <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns. F.W. de<br />

Klerk's predecessor, P.W. Botha, who is now mainly remembered for the severity <strong>of</strong> the repressive<br />

measures he instituted during the 1980s and for the shrillness <strong>of</strong> his anti-communist rhetoric, was in<br />

fact much preoccupied with desperate attempts at convincing a sceptical world that his regime was in<br />

no way anti-democratic or racist (Schrire, 1991). Thus, by the time De Klerk emerged on the scene,<br />

all that remained to legitimate the white <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n regime, also in the eyes <strong>of</strong> its own electorate,<br />

was the now mythical ``communist onslaught'', and when that fell away, nothing remained to prop up<br />

its ideological edifice.<br />

Let us pause at this point, with the struggle against apartheid having emerged victorious through<br />

largely peaceful ideological means, and return to the candle-lit vigil outside the US embassy in March<br />

2003. Here we have <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n civil society attempting to return the favour afforded to them by the<br />

international anti-apartheid movement, not by joining directly in the war against American<br />

imperialism, but through peaceful means Ð by showing up the ideological bankruptcy <strong>of</strong> the<br />

American position. Here we also have something <strong>of</strong> an advertisement for the kind <strong>of</strong> country <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong> has become as a result <strong>of</strong> many decades <strong>of</strong> painstaking peacebuilding.<br />

The gathering was extremely diverse, with all shades <strong>of</strong> political opinion, religions, ages and races<br />

represented. A Quaker woman read a poem about pacifism. Two young Muslim men held up a<br />

banner: ``Death to Bush!'' A group <strong>of</strong> young children sang: ``All we are saying, is give peace a<br />

chance''. All chanted: ``Forward with international solidarity! Forward!'' Passing cars hooted their<br />

support. There was a spirit <strong>of</strong> tolerance, an unspoken assumption that the gathering would be<br />

peaceful, and an eagerness to listen to different voices. Even the large contingent <strong>of</strong> policemen was<br />

<strong>of</strong> the new <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n variety Ð remaining in the background and pointedly avoiding<br />

confrontational behaviour. In the back <strong>of</strong> one armoured vehicle I noticed a group <strong>of</strong> young policemen<br />

whiling away the time with, <strong>of</strong> all things, a game <strong>of</strong> Monopoly.<br />

The diversity <strong>of</strong> the gathering and the open, participatory manner in which it was conducted reflected<br />

well on the depth <strong>of</strong> `social capital' (Coleman, 1988; Putnam, 1995) built up in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> during the<br />

struggle, the four transitional years, and in the decade <strong>of</strong> post-apartheid reconstruction. In contrast to<br />

the USA, where social capital has been actively depleted (as seen in the steadily lower frequency<br />

and greater shallowness <strong>of</strong> social interaction, and in the declining sense <strong>of</strong> mutual trust among<br />

citizens) in order to amass ever-larger hoards <strong>of</strong> private financial capital, in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, a strong<br />

tradition has been established <strong>of</strong> actually talking things through, <strong>of</strong> confronting differences in open<br />

debate and <strong>of</strong> having the patience to find consensus.<br />

But as I looked more closely at the gathering outside the American embassy, it became clear that<br />

something was wrong with that idyllic picture <strong>of</strong> a tolerant, civic-minded post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

First, there were only 120 <strong>of</strong> us. By my calculation that is precisely 0,0000001% <strong>of</strong> the number <strong>of</strong><br />

people who watched the cricket World Cup pageant. In other capital cities Ð London, Sydney,<br />

48


Amman Ð there were hundreds <strong>of</strong> thousands <strong>of</strong> protesters. Second, the gathering was not quite as<br />

diverse as it at first seemed Ð there were relatively few <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>ns <strong>of</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n descent; very few<br />

working class people; nobody confessed to being Jewish. In fact, the majority <strong>of</strong> participants were<br />

Muslim, and as the war dragged on, fewer and fewer non-Muslims pitched up for the nightly vigil.<br />

Gradually the policemen seemed to become more aggressive. I later read in the newspaper that they<br />

had started arresting hooting motorists Ð apparently because local homeowners complained that<br />

they were disturbing the peace.<br />

In post-apartheid capitalist <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, peace, like violence, has become privatised. It is no longer a<br />

shared achievement, to be collectively fostered and enjoyed by the people, but something to be<br />

bought and insisted on if you are rich enough to afford a home in a security complex, or to hold on to<br />

in the privacy <strong>of</strong> your living room as you watch the cricket World Cup or the war on Iraq. Since 1995,<br />

house prices in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> have, in real terms, increased by 127% Ð the second highest growth<br />

rate in the world (Van Rooyen, 2003). It seems unlikely that in the post-apartheid years social capital<br />

has increased at the same rate, and more probable that it has in fact declined.<br />

CONCLUSION<br />

In this article I have presented two emblematic moments from life in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> in the early 21st<br />

century and tried to use them as a lens to look upwards towards the larger ideological struggles<br />

around conflict and conflict resolution, which created the conditions for these moments to occur.<br />

In the first case I started with a somewhat pessimistic reading <strong>of</strong> a colonised elite trying to liberate<br />

themselves from their colonial masters while simultaneously trying to be just like them, but concluded<br />

with the more optimistic possibility that the double consciousness <strong>of</strong> the colonised may be a truer<br />

reflection <strong>of</strong> life in the 21st century than the uni-dimensional cultural fantasies still pursued by the<br />

George Bushes <strong>of</strong> this world. In the second case, I started at the more optimistic end <strong>of</strong> the scale,<br />

claiming that the downfall <strong>of</strong> apartheid was due to the slow, peaceful, participatory creation <strong>of</strong> a<br />

certain ideological climate by <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n civil society and our international allies, and that this<br />

democratic spirit and passion endure into the present. However, I ended on a negative note,<br />

suggesting that perhaps the real ideological force which brought about the end <strong>of</strong> apartheid and<br />

which now determines the shape <strong>of</strong> post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> is not civil society but international<br />

capitalism.<br />

I cannot say with any certainty if an optimistic or a pessimistic reading is more useful in trying to<br />

understand how our peaceful transition came about and what kind <strong>of</strong> society we have transformed<br />

into, but suspect that an honest account <strong>of</strong> where we are now and <strong>of</strong> how we got here needs to<br />

include both these possibilities.<br />

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS<br />

My thanks to my wife, Helen Terre Blanche, for helping to formulate some sections <strong>of</strong> this article, and<br />

to Manoranjan Mohanty for inviting me to present a paper at the Indo-<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n dialogue.<br />

49


REFERENCES<br />

Belleville Intelligencer. (2003, September 5). Third world quality? Really... Editorial.<br />

Bhabha, H. (1990). Nation and narration. London: Routledge.<br />

Bhabha, H. (2002). Speaking <strong>of</strong> postcoloniality, in the continuous present: A conversation / Homi<br />

Bhabha, John Comar<strong>of</strong>f. In D. T. Goldberg & A. Quayson (Eds), Relocating Postcolonialism (pp. 15-<br />

46). Oxford: Blackwell.<br />

Citizens for Pennsylvania's Future. (2003, August 26). PennFuture: 5 wrong answers and 5 smart<br />

solutions to reduce blackouts. Press Release. Retrieved August 25, 2005, from http://<br />

www.prnewswire.com/cgi-bin/stories.<br />

Coetzee, J.M. (1995, July/August). Retrospect: The world cup <strong>of</strong> rugby. <strong>South</strong>ern <strong>Africa</strong>n Review<strong>of</strong><br />

Books, 38.<br />

Coleman, J.C. (1988). Social capital in the creation <strong>of</strong> human capital. American Journal <strong>of</strong> Sociology,<br />

94, 95-120.<br />

Douglas, S.J. (2003, September 5). Third world, here we come. InTheseTimes. Retrieved August 24,<br />

2005, from http://www.inthesetimes.com/site/main/article/470/.<br />

DuBois, W.E.B. (1903/1989). The souls <strong>of</strong> black folk. New York: Penguin.<br />

Fanon, F. (1965). The wretched <strong>of</strong> the earth. New York: Grove.<br />

Fanon, F. (1967). Black skin, white masks. New York: Grove.<br />

Fukuyama, F. (1992). The end <strong>of</strong> history and the last man. New York: Free Press.<br />

Haysom, N. (1992). The total strategy: The <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n security forces and the suppression <strong>of</strong> civil<br />

liberties. In J. Dugard (Ed.), The last years <strong>of</strong> apartheid: Civil liberties in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> (pp. 55-93).<br />

USA: Ford Foundation.<br />

Kretzmann, S. & Mjekula, L. (2003, September 4). Ubuntu can teach US how to deal with global<br />

terrorism says Tutu. East Cape News.<br />

Mitter, S. (2003). Third world: The sweet blackout blues. Comment posted on <strong>Africa</strong>na website<br />

(gateway to the Black World). Retrieved June 15, 2004, from http://www.africana.com/.<br />

Moix, B. (1999, December). Conscientious engagement: A Quaker Deputy Defense Minister. Quaker<br />

Life. Retrieved August 24, 2005, from http://www.fum.org/QL/issues/9912/moix.htm.<br />

Putnam, R. D. (1995). Bowling alone: America's declining social capital. Journal <strong>of</strong> Democracy, 6(1),<br />

65-78.<br />

Said, E. (1978). Orientalism. New York: Pantheon Books.<br />

Schrire, R. (1991). Adapt or die: The end <strong>of</strong> white politics in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. USA: Ford Foundation.<br />

50


Suellentrop, C. (2003, August 15). This was a first world blackout. Slate. Retrieved August 24, 2005,<br />

from http://slate.msn.com/id/2087036/.<br />

Van Rooyen, D. (2003, March 30). Eiendomme styg vinniger as oorsee. Rapport, p. 18.<br />

Wilson, S. (2003, September 7). Seeking justice for past evil: Peru probing political crimes.<br />

Washington Post.<br />

51


CONFLICT, RECONCILIATION AND<br />

PEACEBUILDING IN THE NORTH-EAST<br />

REGION OF INDIA<br />

Rei Vashum 1<br />

School <strong>of</strong> Social Sciences, Indira Gandhi National Open <strong>University</strong><br />

ABSTRACT<br />

Reconciliation and peacebuilding is a multifaceted process, and one much sought after by various<br />

communities, particularly in the high conflict North-East region <strong>of</strong> India. Most <strong>of</strong> the complex nature <strong>of</strong><br />

conflict in this region is rooted in the past and so, in the absence <strong>of</strong> a rigorous understanding <strong>of</strong> the<br />

basis <strong>of</strong> the conflict, attempts to resolve the conflict are likely to be unsuccessful. The failed efforts <strong>of</strong><br />

the Government <strong>of</strong> India (GoI), and various organisations and groups to address the conflict thus call<br />

for an innovative approach, which takes into account the various contours <strong>of</strong> conflicts in the quest to<br />

build peace. The ongoing peace process in Nagalim (Nagaland) is a valuable opportunity for the GoI<br />

and the Nagas, as well as the people <strong>of</strong> the North-East, to solve a major and enduring problem <strong>of</strong> the<br />

region. Accordingly, this article reflects on the conflict situation, and the processes <strong>of</strong> reconciliation<br />

and peacebuilding in the North-East region <strong>of</strong> India, with special reference to the Indo-Naga peace<br />

process. The article will also address the implications <strong>of</strong> the peacebuilding process.<br />

The North-East region <strong>of</strong> India comprises <strong>of</strong> seven sister-states 1 : Arunachal Pradesh, Assam,<br />

Manipur, Meghalaya, Mizoram, Nagaland and Tripura. The region is a conglomeration <strong>of</strong> various<br />

ethnic groups, cultures and `races'. The main constituents <strong>of</strong> the region are the mongoloids <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Sino-Tibetan linguistic family and the Caucasoids belonging to the Aryan linguistic family; the two<br />

groups are not homogeneous in terms <strong>of</strong> sociocultural and political aspects. Thus identity crises,<br />

alienation and under-development are some <strong>of</strong> the main issues that continue to trouble the North-<br />

East region. While many <strong>of</strong> the problems in the region have historical roots, the mishandling <strong>of</strong> issues<br />

in the region by the post-independent Indian state, and ignorance <strong>of</strong> the situation in the North-East<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Rei Vashum, Faculty <strong>of</strong> Sociology, School <strong>of</strong> Social Sciences, Indira Gandhi National Open <strong>University</strong>, Maindan Garhi,<br />

New Delhi 110068, India; E-mail: reivashum@hotmail.com.<br />

52


egion on the part <strong>of</strong> policymakers and administrators are among the major contributory factors<br />

stemming resolution <strong>of</strong> the conflict. It appears that the Indian state is most concerned with defence<br />

and national security, as the region borders four neighbouring sovereign states: China in the north,<br />

Myanmar (erstwhile Burma) in the east, Bangladesh in the south and Bhutan in the north-west. In<br />

fact, the link between the North-East region and the rest <strong>of</strong> India is through a narrow strip (also called<br />

``chicken neck'') in northern West Bengal.<br />

This article will accordingly focus on the following three core issues: (1) the nature <strong>of</strong> the conflict<br />

situation in the North-East region <strong>of</strong> India; (2) reconciliation and peacebuilding, and their implications;<br />

and (3) prospects for Indo-Naga peacemaking.<br />

CONFLICT SITUATION IN THE NORTH-EAST<br />

The conflict in the North-East region has been characterised by: (1) an identity crisis and a sense <strong>of</strong><br />

alienation; (2) conflict with the Indian state; (3) inter-community conflict; (4) under-development; and<br />

(5) conflict arising from a policy <strong>of</strong> language imposition. To these some might add `intra-community<br />

conflict' to the list. I review each <strong>of</strong> these in turn below.<br />

Identity crisis, nationality issues and alienation<br />

The people <strong>of</strong> the North-East region have been facing an immense crisis <strong>of</strong> identity and a sense <strong>of</strong><br />

alienation over the last few decades. A strong sense among the North-East people <strong>of</strong> being foreign to<br />

the Indian union, a distinct history, the geographical isolation <strong>of</strong> the region, and coercion by the Indian<br />

state on the indigenous peoples <strong>of</strong> the region to participate in the Indian Union without their consent<br />

are among the many factors that account for the ongoing sense <strong>of</strong> alienation. Thus, many North-East<br />

people feel that they are Indian by historical accident and not by choice.<br />

A pervasive sense <strong>of</strong> being historically, culturally, linguistically, politically and even racially different<br />

from the rest <strong>of</strong> the population <strong>of</strong> India has thus prompted the creation <strong>of</strong> various ``external'' 2 peoples'<br />

self-determination movements in the North-East region (see Alexander & Friedlander, 1980;<br />

Cassese, 1981; Chen, 1976; Cobban, 1969; Cobo, 1986; Hannum, 1992; Sanajaoba, 1994; Sanders,<br />

1993; Vashum, 1996, 1999, 2000). Many groups in the region have accordingly been agitating for<br />

independent nation-states since the 1940s and have set up parallel governments in their own way;<br />

the Naga movement for self-determination (``sovereignty'') 3 , to be discussed later in the article, is a<br />

good example <strong>of</strong> the cessationist movement.<br />

In parallel to the calls for self-determination by various groups in the North-East region there is also<br />

the struggle for autonomous status within the Constitution <strong>of</strong> India. This struggle centres around<br />

demands for the creation <strong>of</strong> new state/s, including calls for the establishment <strong>of</strong> Boroland (Bodoland)<br />

to be carved out <strong>of</strong> the State <strong>of</strong> Assam, and various demands for implementation <strong>of</strong> the ``VIth<br />

Schedule'' 4 in the Hills <strong>of</strong> Manipur and other states <strong>of</strong> the region.<br />

In contrast to the groups' call for self-determination and/or autonomy, there are also some ethnic<br />

groups in the North-East region (e.g. Arunchal Pradesh) who are complacent about the status quo.<br />

53


Such groups do not call for sovereignty. Instead, they tend to favour certain provisions and rights<br />

enshrined within the existing Constitution <strong>of</strong> India. These groups have been criticised for being<br />

unaware <strong>of</strong> their historical independent political existence and their lack <strong>of</strong> capacity to organise or<br />

form self-determination movements on a large scale. The common denominator characterising all<br />

three groups has been the identity crisis and a sense <strong>of</strong> alienation from their Indian counterparts.<br />

Conflict with the Indian state: Militarisation and neocolonialism in the region<br />

In the North-East, the Union <strong>of</strong> India is largely represented by paramilitary and army personnel, who<br />

are <strong>of</strong>ten responsible for the violation <strong>of</strong> human rights in the region. Human rights violations have<br />

been perpetrated in the name <strong>of</strong> providing protection and security to the people <strong>of</strong> the region, thereby<br />

compounding the sense <strong>of</strong> alienation and North-Eastern people's difficulty in identifying with so-called<br />

mainland India. The militarisation <strong>of</strong> the GoI's presence in the North-East is thus directly or indirectly<br />

linked to the resurgence <strong>of</strong> insurgency movements in the region.<br />

Neocolonialism has also been a cause for great concern in the North-East. Even though the Indian<br />

state, as the successor to British colonialism, is responsible for the administration <strong>of</strong> the North-East<br />

region, today the North-East people are apprehensive about the danger <strong>of</strong> the continued siphoning <strong>of</strong><br />

resources by the GoI from the region. Petroleum, forest resources and various minerals are among<br />

the many resources siphoned by the GoI.<br />

Inter-community conflict and the issue <strong>of</strong> foreign influx<br />

The influx <strong>of</strong> foreigners into the North-East has become alarming. It appears that the region has<br />

become a ``dumping ground'' for refugees and foreign nationals. In some areas, such as Tripura and<br />

parts <strong>of</strong> Assam, the influx <strong>of</strong> foreigners, particularly from Bangladesh, has dramatically altered the<br />

population demographics. The other states, namely Mizoram (influx <strong>of</strong> Hajongs mainly from<br />

Bangladesh), Nagaland (Miyas-Muslim mainly from Bangladesh via Assam), Manipur (Burmese<br />

nationals mainly <strong>of</strong> Chin-Kuki groups), and Arunachal Pradesh (Chakmas mainly from Bangladesh),<br />

have also experienced the burden <strong>of</strong> uncontrolled and unregulated influx <strong>of</strong> foreigners. Since there is<br />

no clear policy for responding to foreigners and their associated concerns and integration, the<br />

potential for inter-community conflict continues to grow. In fact, historically ethnic conflicts in the<br />

North-East region have also represented a significant obstacle for peaceful co-existence among the<br />

region's people. Most <strong>of</strong> the causal factors for these conflicts are deep-seated and historically<br />

situated. For instance, the ethnic conflict in Assam between the Boros (earlier called Bodos) and the<br />

Santhals (immigrant adivasis from Jharkhand in Eastern India) 5 , was initiated by the British for their<br />

own dubious reasons. Similarly, conflict between the Nagas, the indigenous people <strong>of</strong> the region and<br />

the Kukis began after the British located the Kukis in Manipur 6 and other parts <strong>of</strong> the North-East in<br />

the 19th century. In another case, due to the partition <strong>of</strong> Bengal and the chauvinism <strong>of</strong> the Bengalee<br />

settlers in Tripura, the indigenous people <strong>of</strong> Tripura have been reduced to just about 29%. Ethnic<br />

conflicts in the North-East region tends to be related to ethnic chauvinism, exploitation and<br />

discrimination <strong>of</strong> subordinated tribes by the dominant groups across the advanced plains peoples <strong>of</strong><br />

Assam, Manipur and Tripura.<br />

54


Under-development, lack <strong>of</strong> infrastructure and conflict<br />

Under-development and the lack <strong>of</strong> infrastructure are serious problems in the North-East. Except for<br />

some parts <strong>of</strong> Assam, signs <strong>of</strong> varying levels <strong>of</strong> under-development are evident throughout the<br />

region. The hill peoples or tribes are the victims <strong>of</strong> discrimination and exploitation by the so-called<br />

dominant and more advanced plains peoples. The dominance <strong>of</strong> the plains peoples, especially in the<br />

realm <strong>of</strong> government and politics, and the location <strong>of</strong> all the main public administration <strong>of</strong>fices in the<br />

plains (respective capital cities) entrenches the exploitation <strong>of</strong> the hill peoples.<br />

The lack <strong>of</strong> an education system is also a major problem in the North-East. Although there is at least<br />

one university 7 , in each <strong>of</strong> the seven sister states, the hill peoples (in plains-dominated states) do not<br />

have access to universities, or sufficient colleges and schools in their areas. In Manipur, even though<br />

hill areas constitute 90% <strong>of</strong> the total area <strong>of</strong> the state, no university has been provided for the<br />

extensive tribal areas. Furthermore, tribal students, teachers and administrative staff are poorly<br />

represented at Manipur <strong>University</strong> and colleges.<br />

High levels <strong>of</strong> politicisation, nepotism and the politics <strong>of</strong> hatred directed at the disfranchised tribes<br />

seem to be part <strong>of</strong> the schemes employed by the so-called dominant plain's people. Similarly, the<br />

tribal communities in Assam that qualify for at least two or three central state universities in view <strong>of</strong><br />

their substantial population do not have a university. If such minimum infrastructure is not provided by<br />

the central or state government, then one can well imagine the lack <strong>of</strong> scope for local communities in<br />

the undeveloped and `backward' tribal areas <strong>of</strong> the region.<br />

Conflicts resulting from politics <strong>of</strong> language imposition<br />

Exploitation and discrimination <strong>of</strong> subordinated groups is also associated with the imposition <strong>of</strong><br />

language in the North-East. Even though Assam has only recently been divided into several states,<br />

Assamese linguistic and cultural hegemony and the continued imposition <strong>of</strong> the Manipuri 8 language<br />

on the tribes compromises the identity and cultural heritage <strong>of</strong> the minorities, thereby undermining<br />

prospects for peace and reconciliation.<br />

INDO-NAGA CONFLICT<br />

Following the preceding overview <strong>of</strong> the nature <strong>of</strong> the conflict in the North-East region, in this section<br />

I focus on one case study, namely Indo-Naga conflict, and consider the crucial associated issues <strong>of</strong><br />

conflict and peacebuilding.<br />

I have chosen the Indo-Naga conflict and peace process for six main reasons:<br />

(1) The current peace process has resulted in casualties, security-related violence and human rights<br />

violations in the states <strong>of</strong> Nagaland and Manipur.<br />

(2) The current peace process was launched on the basis <strong>of</strong> non-violence and bilateral dialogue and<br />

negotiation.<br />

(3) This peace process involves the GoI and the National Socialist Council <strong>of</strong> Nagalim (NSCN),<br />

which is considered to be the `mother' <strong>of</strong> all people's movements for self-determination in the<br />

55


egion. The current Indo-Naga peace process has been re-launched after the deadlock <strong>of</strong> the first<br />

peace process (1964-1972).<br />

(4) The peace process is viewed by other groups seeking self-determination in the region as a<br />

potential model for conflict resolution.<br />

(5) The current dialogue is free <strong>of</strong> any preconditions; involves the highest level (at the Prime<br />

Ministerial level); and is held in a third country, outside India.<br />

(6) The involvement and support <strong>of</strong> the various civil society groups (both national and international)<br />

and other world communities.<br />

Nature and history <strong>of</strong> the Indo-Naga conflict<br />

The Indo-Naga conflict is sociocultural, economic, historical and political in nature. The main<br />

contesting issue is that the Nagas define themselves as an independent nation, requiring the GoI not<br />

to interfere with their affairs. Historically the Nagas were independently governed people in their<br />

present homeland, which is located in the hilly confluence <strong>of</strong> India, China and Myanmar 9 . Every Naga<br />

village was an independent self-governing system run by the villagers themselves according to<br />

democratic principles.<br />

According to recorded history, the first outsiders the Nagas encountered were the Ahoms, sometime<br />

in 1228 AD (see Vashum, 2000). Although the encounter was fierce, the two gradually became good<br />

neighbours, with the relationship lasting for about 600 years. The second foreign group the Nagas<br />

encountered was the British in 1832 when the British sought to link their base in Burma (now<br />

Myanmar) with Assam. By 1890 the British had conquered most <strong>of</strong> the Naga country; only about onethird<br />

remained unconquered 10 . Despite this history the GoI claims that Nagas are part <strong>of</strong> the Union <strong>of</strong><br />

India since areas inhabited by the Naga (presumably Naga areas currently in the Indian Union) are<br />

part <strong>of</strong> what India inherited from the British at independence. Following such claims the Indian<br />

leaders wanted to incorporate the Naga areas 11 and other areas <strong>of</strong> the region into the Union <strong>of</strong> India.<br />

Some initiatives for arriving at consensus were undertaken by both the leaders <strong>of</strong> the GoI and the<br />

Naga, represented by the Naga National Council, in 1946. According to the Nine-Point Agreement <strong>of</strong><br />

1947 12 , the Nagas would have an interim arrangement for ten years with maximum autonomy (see<br />

Vashum, 2000). The Governor <strong>of</strong> Assam was to take responsibility for the observance <strong>of</strong> the terms <strong>of</strong><br />

the Agreement. Although the Nagas were aware that the Agreement was short on sovereignty, it was<br />

largely viewed as a good beginning for Naga nation-building and peacemaking with the GoI.<br />

However, the GoI immediately withdrew from the Agreement to the humiliation <strong>of</strong> the Nagas. The<br />

Nagas then unilaterally declared independence on 14 August 1947 (a day before the declaration <strong>of</strong><br />

Indian independence) with the blessing <strong>of</strong> Mahatma Gandhi, the father <strong>of</strong> the Indian nation. On 14<br />

August 1947 the Nagas also made their decision known to India, the United Kingdom and the United<br />

Nations. Thus, the foundation for the Indo-Naga conflict was created.<br />

At the heart <strong>of</strong> the conflict we discern a contradiction between the principles <strong>of</strong> `voluntary<br />

participation' and `people's consent' that guided the formation <strong>of</strong> the Indian Union in 1947 and the<br />

tendency <strong>of</strong> the GoI to co-opt princely states (including the Nagas) through coercion.<br />

56


The conflict escalated into a war between India and the Nagas in 1954 when hundreds <strong>of</strong> thousands<br />

<strong>of</strong> Indian army troops assumed control <strong>of</strong> the Naga Hills (see Mullick, 1972; Nibedon, 1983; Vashum,<br />

2000). The Nagas, under the aegis <strong>of</strong> the Naga National Council (NNC), formed their own<br />

government (called the Federal Government <strong>of</strong> Nagaland) by drawing up their own Constitution<br />

called Yehzabo. The GoI enacted an extraordinary armed law called the Armed Forces (Special<br />

Powers) Act (AFSPA) in 1958 in order to suppress the Naga movement for self-determination. This<br />

Act accorded the GoI extraordinary powers that were not possible through the lapsed Terrorist and<br />

Disruptive Activities (Prevention) Act <strong>of</strong> 1987 (TADA) and the Prevention <strong>of</strong> Terrorism Act <strong>of</strong> 2002<br />

(POTA) (see Vashum, 2002). The AFSPA is still operating in many parts <strong>of</strong> the North-East region.<br />

This war was followed by the creation <strong>of</strong> the Nagaland state in 1963. The state was not acceptable to<br />

the NNC and larger sections <strong>of</strong> Naga society. Thus, a peace initiative, which spanned from 1964 to<br />

1972, was launched to address Indo-Naga conflict, (see Aram, 1974; Gundevia, 1975; Haksar<br />

Horam, 1988; Iralu, 1999; Ramunny, 1993; Vashum, 2000). Despite several rounds <strong>of</strong> talks, including<br />

engagement at Prime Ministerial level, the negotiations failed. The main stumbling block remained<br />

the divergence between the GoI's and the NNC's respective positions. The NNC insisted on complete<br />

sovereignty/independence, while the GoI resisted the proposal <strong>of</strong> the Nagas. Subsequently, the Indo-<br />

Naga war was resumed. In November 1975 there was a national emergency in India, and the GoI<br />

had a few NNC leaders to sign an accord called the Shillong Accord 13 under duress (see Vashum,<br />

2000). The Accord represented an instrument <strong>of</strong> surrender <strong>of</strong> NNC cadres to the GoI. Thus, the<br />

NSCN was mandated in 1980 to spearhead the Naga struggle for self-determination under the<br />

leadership <strong>of</strong> Isak Swu (then Vice-President <strong>of</strong> the NNC), Th. Muivah (then General Secretary <strong>of</strong> the<br />

NNC) and S.S. Khaplang, a veteran leader <strong>of</strong> the NNC from eastern Nagaland (situated in Myanmar).<br />

However, since the mid-1980s the GoI has made several attempts to launch dialogue with the Naga<br />

leaders. After many attempts and gestures, P.V. Narasimha Rao, former Prime Minister <strong>of</strong> India,<br />

made a breakthrough by winning the goodwill <strong>of</strong> the Naga (NSCN) leaders and so re-launched<br />

another peace initiative in 1995. The formal ceasefire and peace process began on 1 August 1997.<br />

As the previous dialogue, three terms were agreed on as the basis for peace talks: (1) the talks were<br />

to be unconditional; (2) the talks were to engage the highest level <strong>of</strong> leadership, including the Prime<br />

Minister <strong>of</strong> India; and (3) the venue <strong>of</strong> the talks was to be outside India. A Ceasefire Monitoring<br />

Group (CMG or CFMG) was also constituted to oversee and guide the efficient functioning <strong>of</strong> the<br />

agreed ceasefire and associated ground rules.<br />

The dialogue gained significant support through the involvement <strong>of</strong> successive Prime Ministers <strong>of</strong><br />

India, the involvement <strong>of</strong> national and international civil society movements, and the overall moral<br />

support <strong>of</strong> the world community.<br />

In July 2004, the peace process was seven years old. So it would be pertinent to ask: What has been<br />

achieved thus far? While there is no substantive answer, it is apparent that there are elements <strong>of</strong><br />

`insincerity' and so-called `compulsions', especially on the part <strong>of</strong> the GoI, that have impacted<br />

negatively on the course <strong>of</strong> the current peace process.<br />

57


RECONCILIATION, THE PEACEBUILDING PROCESS AND ITS IMPLICATIONS<br />

Reconciliation and peacebuilding<br />

Although reconciliation may seem irrelevant in the context <strong>of</strong> the peace process in the North-East<br />

region, the Indo-Naga peace process will ultimately need to embrace elements <strong>of</strong> `reconciliation' and<br />

goodwill. But can the Nagas `forgive' the Indians for killing thousands <strong>of</strong> Nagas, and torturing and<br />

humiliating many more in the process <strong>of</strong> suppressing the Naga movement for self-determination?<br />

Can the Indians in turn forgive some <strong>of</strong> the excesses committed by the Nagas against the innocent<br />

civilians in the process <strong>of</strong> defending their right to self-determination?<br />

The recent encouraging statement that the ``Government <strong>of</strong> India recognises the unique history and<br />

situation <strong>of</strong> Nagas'' 14 (Vashum, 2002, p.93) represents a new development in the history <strong>of</strong> the peace<br />

process between the GoI and the Nagas, since in itself it contains a process <strong>of</strong> admitting the `truth',<br />

the basis for reconciliation. The statement reflects a growing commitment by the GoI to understand<br />

the complexities and Naga claims in the Indo-Naga engagement. The Naga leaders' readiness ``to<br />

understand ten times more if the Indians are willing to understand the situation <strong>of</strong> the Nagas'' 15 , will<br />

perhaps boost the prospects for truth and reconciliation and ultimately peacebuidling.<br />

Despite several hiccups and misunderstandings in the peace process, the negotiating parties seem<br />

to have been investing their best efforts to address the hurdles.<br />

PROSPECTS OF THE PEACEBUILDING PROCESS<br />

By way <strong>of</strong> conclusion I <strong>of</strong>fer comments on the conditions required to increase the prospects for<br />

success in the Indo-Naga peace process. The success <strong>of</strong> the peace talks will depend a great deal on<br />

the following factors.<br />

Sincerity, political will and commitment: The importance <strong>of</strong> these factors in peace initiatives has been<br />

frequently noted and reported in the media, with good reason. Accordingly, it is imperative for the GoI<br />

to demonstrate that it is seriously committed to the peace process. Certain measures need to be<br />

implemented to boost the peace talks, and to ensure that actions and policies that would jeopardise<br />

the peace process, such as the GoI backtracking on the Bangkok Agreement on ceasefire coverage,<br />

should not be repeated. The impact <strong>of</strong> the GoI backtracking on the Bangkok Agreement almost led to<br />

the NSCN's withdrawal from peace talks. The timely intervention <strong>of</strong> civil society groups, particularly<br />

Naga civil society groups, facilitated the NSCN's continued involvement in the peace talks.<br />

On their part, the Nagas should demonstrate their commitment to solving the 55-year-old Indo-Naga<br />

conflict even though there has been some misunderstanding between the GoI and the Nagas in the<br />

course <strong>of</strong> the peace process.<br />

Confidence building: The GoI and the Nagas should give due importance to confidence building. The<br />

Nagas, for example, have experienced many instances <strong>of</strong> GoI betrayal, beginning with the Nine-Point<br />

Agreement in June 1947.<br />

58


Trust: Trusting each other is a great challenge for the two parties involved in peace talks. In other<br />

words, they should be able to overcome the `mistrust' that could destroy the peace process.<br />

Sensitivity and understanding: The parties concerned should be sensitive to, and uphold the agreedupon<br />

principles, ground rules and issues under discussion.<br />

Restraint: The negotiating parties should demonstrate maximum restraint. Any act or opinion that<br />

could have a damaging effect on the peace dialogue should be avoided at all costs.<br />

Creating an appropriate and peaceful situation: The GoI and the Nagas should consider the<br />

importance <strong>of</strong> maintaining an appropriate atmosphere for continuing the peace talks. No matter how<br />

difficult the challenges are in the course <strong>of</strong> the talks, the two parties, with the cooperation and support<br />

<strong>of</strong> the public, should be determined to proceed until the goal <strong>of</strong> peace is achieved.<br />

Addressing the core issues <strong>of</strong> conflict: The prospects <strong>of</strong> the peace process will depend on whether<br />

the negotiating parties can sincerely address the core issues <strong>of</strong> the conflict. The success <strong>of</strong> the talks<br />

will depend greatly on the ability <strong>of</strong> the negotiating parties to settle differences by accommodating the<br />

difficulties and interests <strong>of</strong> both sides.<br />

Role <strong>of</strong> political parties: The politicians have a major role to play in supporting the success <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Indo-Naga peace process. The goodwill and cooperation <strong>of</strong> the various political parties will give the<br />

process for settling the conflict a great boost. The political parties need to reach a broad consensus<br />

on the peace process being a national issue that needs to be considered above party politics and<br />

petty politicking. Hence, any political statements or actions that will jeopardise the peace process<br />

should be avoided at all costs.<br />

Involvement <strong>of</strong> civil society groups: Involvement <strong>of</strong> civil society groups, be it at local, regional,<br />

national and/or international levels, will be <strong>of</strong> immense benefit to the ongoing peace process.<br />

However, the involvement <strong>of</strong> civil society groups from Naga society and mainland India will be most<br />

crucial. This process will involve creating a democratic space for the involvement <strong>of</strong> civil society<br />

groups by the GoI on the one hand and the NSCN on the other.<br />

Civil society groups are to act as facilitators, and to sensitise the population to the nature <strong>of</strong> the<br />

conflict. Civil society groups could also be involved in the mobilisation <strong>of</strong> people's participation in the<br />

peace process. The people should be kept informed on the development <strong>of</strong> the peace process<br />

through documentation and dissemination <strong>of</strong> information. Civil society groups can also help maintain<br />

peace and assist in the functioning <strong>of</strong> the ceasefire monitoring process. Civil society groups in the<br />

North-East may also consider initiating inter-community dialogue to resolve problems in a peaceful<br />

manner.<br />

Role <strong>of</strong> the media: The media has been a very controversial player in the North-East conflict.<br />

Misreporting by the media, distortion <strong>of</strong> information and/or providing partial information on relevant<br />

issues and situations has <strong>of</strong>ten compounded the conflict in the North-East. The media has <strong>of</strong>ten<br />

spawned suspicion among the people in the North-East by making unsubstantiated statements and<br />

reports. The media needs to be more responsible in writing about the issues <strong>of</strong> the North-East,<br />

59


particularly sensitive issues such as the ongoing Indo-Naga peace process. It should not succumb to<br />

pressures from interest groups or its own prejudices.<br />

Role <strong>of</strong> the intelligentsia: The role <strong>of</strong> the intelligentsia in building society or in conflict resolution has<br />

always been crucial. However, not much has been done so far in this regard in the Indo-Naga peace<br />

process. A few recent writings by Indian scholars on the Indo-Naga peace process have been largely<br />

based on distorted sources, or the writers are themselves ignorant <strong>of</strong> the hard reality, or are not<br />

addressing the core issues. The reluctance to follow the history and development <strong>of</strong> the Indo-Naga<br />

peace process has been one <strong>of</strong> the main problems with most <strong>of</strong> the so-called scholars who claim to<br />

be experts on North-East issues. Consequently, the mainland Indian intelligentsia is regarded with<br />

suspicion by the North-East people. The intelligentsia therefore needs to undertake confidencebuilding<br />

exercises in order for the people to consider the constructive and facilitative roles scholars<br />

may play in the situation <strong>of</strong> conflict resolution and peacemaking.<br />

NOTES<br />

1. Recently, Sikkim has come to be considered part <strong>of</strong> the North East region. I have not mentioned<br />

this in the article for technical reasons.<br />

2. In the North-East, the concept <strong>of</strong> `self-determination' presents as multi-layered. The movements<br />

in the region can be classified into two broad categories <strong>of</strong> self-determination Ð internal (those<br />

struggling for autonomy and certain status within the framework <strong>of</strong> the Constitution <strong>of</strong> India), and<br />

external (those struggling outside the framework <strong>of</strong> the Constitution <strong>of</strong> India).<br />

3. The Nagas would also call it a `war <strong>of</strong> resistance' against the coercive occupation <strong>of</strong> Nagalim<br />

(Naga Land) by India and Myanmar (erstwhile Burma).<br />

4. The VIth Schedule to the Constitution <strong>of</strong> India <strong>of</strong>fers some protective power and authority to the<br />

districts coming under it. Such status is so far applicable to some <strong>of</strong> the North-East states <strong>of</strong><br />

India. The tribes <strong>of</strong> Manipur have been demanding such limited autonomy for over a decade.<br />

Ironically, the Government <strong>of</strong> Manipur (Meitei/Manipuri dominated state) has not been willing to<br />

concede this minimum demand, to the disappointment <strong>of</strong> the tribes. The tribes <strong>of</strong> Manipur have<br />

now gone a step ahead by demanding the status <strong>of</strong> Union Territory.<br />

5. Jharkhand state was formed in 2001. The region was previously part <strong>of</strong> Bihar state.<br />

6. Manipur was once a princely state and merged with the Indian Union in October 1949, two<br />

years after the formation <strong>of</strong> the Indian Union. Today, some sections <strong>of</strong> the Manipuris (Meiteis)<br />

are up in arms against the merger <strong>of</strong> Manipur into the Union <strong>of</strong> India. According to them, the<br />

then Maharaja (head <strong>of</strong> the Manipur princely state) signed the Merger Agreement in 1949 under<br />

duress.<br />

7. Assam has four conventional universities (including two central universities), Manipur has two<br />

(including one agricultural university), Meghalaya has one (central university), Tripura has one<br />

(state university), Nagaland has one (central university), Mizoram has one (central university)<br />

and Arunachal Pradesh has one (state university).<br />

8. Manipuri is also called Meiteilon in local dialect, which is language <strong>of</strong> the dominant Manipuri/<br />

Meitei ethnic group.<br />

9. The homeland is about 1 000 000 sq km and is situated in the Patkai range between longitude<br />

60


938 E and 978 E and latitude 23 1/28 N and 288 N. Today, the Nagas are located within two<br />

sovereign states Ð India (about 2/3 <strong>of</strong> the Naga population) and Myanmar (about 1/3 <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Naga population). Even within India the Nagas are located in four administrative states, namely<br />

Nagaland, Manipur, Arunachal Pradesh and Assam.<br />

10. The Nagas refer to the unconquered Naga country as `Free Nagaland'. It is located mainly on<br />

the north-western border <strong>of</strong> Myanmar.<br />

11. The Naga areas referred to here represent just two-thirds <strong>of</strong> the Naga's territory. About one-third<br />

<strong>of</strong> the Naga areas are located in Myanmar.<br />

12. The Nine-Point Agreement was signed between the GoI, represented by the then Governor <strong>of</strong><br />

Assam, Sir Akbar Hydari, and the Nagas, represented by the Naga National Council. It was<br />

agreed on during their meeting from 27-29 June, 1947.<br />

13. The Shillong Accord was mainly an instrument <strong>of</strong> the Nagas' surrender to India. According to<br />

the so-called Naga leaders who signed the Accord, the Accord was signed under duress.<br />

14. The Indo-Naga Joint Communique was signed at Amsterdam on 11 July 2002.<br />

15. The statement has been repeatedly made by Th. Muivah, the General Secretary <strong>of</strong> the NSCN,<br />

and the chief Naga negotiator <strong>of</strong> the Indo-Naga dialogue, in his interviews with the press and<br />

consultations with various concerned civil society groups.<br />

REFERENCES<br />

Alexander, Y. & Friedlander, R.A. (1980). Self-determination: National, regional, and global<br />

dimensions. Boulder, Colo.: Westview.<br />

Aram, M. (1974). Peace in Nagaland: Eight-year story 1964-72. New Delhi: Arnold-Heinemann.<br />

Cassese, A. (1981). The self-determination <strong>of</strong> peoples. In L. Henkins (Ed.), The international bill <strong>of</strong><br />

rights: The covenant <strong>of</strong> civil and political rights (n.p.). New York: Columbia <strong>University</strong> Press.<br />

Chen, L.C. (1976). Self-determination as a human right. In M. Reismann & B. Weston (Eds), Toward<br />

world order and human dignity (pp. 198-262). New York: Free Press.<br />

Cobban, A. (1969). The nation state and national self-determination. New York: Thomas Y. Cromwell.<br />

Cobo, J.R.M. (1986). Study <strong>of</strong> the problem <strong>of</strong> discrimination against indigenous populations. UN Doc.<br />

E/CN. 4/Sub. 2/1996/7/Add. 4, 29, paras 378-80.<br />

Gundevia, Y.D. (1975). War and peace in Nagaland. New Delhi: Palit and Palit.<br />

Haksar, N. & Luithui, L. (1984). Nagaland file: A question <strong>of</strong> human rights. New Delhi: Lancer<br />

International.<br />

Hannum, H. (1992). Autonomy, sovereignty, and self-determination: The accommodation <strong>of</strong><br />

conflicting rights. Philadelphia, USA: <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Pennsylvania Press.<br />

Horam, M. (1988). Naga insurgency: The last thirty years. New Delhi: Cosmo.<br />

61


Iralu, N. (1999). A critical analysis <strong>of</strong> the Naga political struggle. In G.A. Ghevarghese (Ed.), Patkai<br />

Christian College: The twenty fifth anniversary souvenir (n.p.). Chumukedima-Seithekema<br />

(Nagaland): Patkai Christian College.<br />

Mullick, B.N. (1972). My years with Nehru: 1948-1964. Bombay: Allied.<br />

Nibedon, N. (1983). Nagaland: The night <strong>of</strong> the guerrillas. New Delhi: Lancers Publishers.<br />

Ramunny, M. (1993). The world <strong>of</strong> Nagas. New Delhi: Northern Book Centre.<br />

Sanajaoba, N. (1994). Right <strong>of</strong> nations to self-determination: Principles and practices. In N.<br />

Sanajaoba (Ed.), Human rights: Principles, practices & abuses (pp. 38-65). New Delhi: Omsons.<br />

Sanders, D. (1993). Indigenous peoples in the international stage. In W. Fernandes (Ed.), The<br />

indigenous question: Search for an identity (n.p.). New Delhi: Indian Social Institute.<br />

Vashum, R. (1996). Self-determination: Principles, meanings and practices. Indian Anthropologist,<br />

26(1), 63-76.<br />

Vashum, R. (1999). Nationality question in India: The Naga case. Social Action, 49(4), 413-430.<br />

Vashum, R. (2000). Nagas' right to self-determination: Anthropological-historical perspective. New<br />

Delhi: Mittal.<br />

Vashum, R. (Ed.) (2002). The Indo-Naga Joint CommuniqueÂ. Naga Journal <strong>of</strong> Indigenous Affairs,<br />

2(1).<br />

62


CONFLICT MANAGEMENT IN THE<br />

INDIAN SUBCONTINENT: THE<br />

DIMENSIONS OF HINDU-MUSLIM<br />

CONFLICT<br />

Iqbal A. Ansari 1<br />

Minorities Council and Human Rights Today<br />

ABSTRACT<br />

The Indo-Pak-Bangladesh subcontinent presents a particularly challenging case for the study and<br />

development <strong>of</strong> appropriate models <strong>of</strong> conflict management for those who want to promote durable<br />

peace and stability in the volatile Indian sub-continent where both India and Pakistan house nuclear<br />

arms. In this article, I will provide a brief outline <strong>of</strong> some <strong>of</strong> the dimensions <strong>of</strong> the present communal<br />

and regional conflict, and will highlight selected and salient features <strong>of</strong> a model for conflict<br />

management as located within a human rights framework.<br />

THE ROOTS AND NATURE OF THE INDO-PAK CONFLICT<br />

In spite <strong>of</strong> the universally acknowledged fact that India fought a non-violent war <strong>of</strong> independence and<br />

Indian claims to being inheritors <strong>of</strong> long-established traditions <strong>of</strong> spirituality and peace, that are<br />

defining characteristic <strong>of</strong> their civilisation, the region has witnessed holocausts, wars and massacres<br />

involving colossal loss <strong>of</strong> life, and the migration and internal displacement <strong>of</strong> millions <strong>of</strong> people. This<br />

violence has characterised partition in 1947, Indo-Pak wars, the secession <strong>of</strong> Bangladesh in 1971,<br />

and during periodic communal clashes in each country, especially in India where the threat <strong>of</strong> civil<br />

war has been held out by those responsible for crimes against humanity in the west Indian Gujarat<br />

state in February and March 2002. This discrepancy between the collective self-image <strong>of</strong> Indians,<br />

especially Hindus, and the history <strong>of</strong> unpalatable violence constitutes one <strong>of</strong> the difficulties to be<br />

surmounted in any attempt at building durable structures <strong>of</strong> peace.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Iqbal A. Ansari, Minorities Council and Human Rights Today, 20, Jaswant Apartments, Okhla, New Delhi-110025, India;<br />

Tel. + 0991 11 26324452; E-mail: iqbalansari2001@hotmail.com<br />

63


Unlike <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, which was able to keep its territorial integrity intact, India at the moment <strong>of</strong><br />

liberation had to undergo the tragic experience <strong>of</strong> an irrational partition, which did not neatly divide<br />

people into a Muslim Pakistan and a Hindu India. Muslims who continued to live in India constituted<br />

about 10% <strong>of</strong> India's population in 1947, and are now more than 12%, unevenly distributed over<br />

almost every part <strong>of</strong> India.<br />

Some kind <strong>of</strong> Indo-Pak Truth and Reconciliation Commission (IP-TRC) would possibly have been<br />

attempted if Mahatma Gandhi had not been assassinated. Such an IP-TRC may have dealt with a<br />

focus on wider terms with the complex reality in the region and the discrepancies between self-image<br />

and history. Gandhi's assassination resulted from his perceived appeasement <strong>of</strong> Muslim Pakistan,<br />

and so was executed by a person associated with a Hindu nationalist militant organisation which<br />

resented Gandhi's insistence that the Indian government grant Pakistan its due share <strong>of</strong> funds. Such<br />

an IP-TRC might also have had the mandate to evolve ways and means <strong>of</strong> healing the wounds <strong>of</strong><br />

partition and to probe why and how things went wrong. Why, for example, was the idea <strong>of</strong> a loose<br />

federation, or even confederation, not accepted, and why was any consociational model <strong>of</strong> power<br />

sharing not given a chance?<br />

The conditions under which Pakistan came into existence made its leadership apprehensive <strong>of</strong><br />

India's plans for its liquidation. Both the champions <strong>of</strong> Hindu Akhand Bharat and secular democratic<br />

leaders <strong>of</strong> the Indian National Congress, including Nehru, failed to make Pakistanis feel that India<br />

had wholeheartedly accepted them, and had stakes in the country's stability. Nehru is reported to<br />

have said in defence <strong>of</strong> his acceptance <strong>of</strong> partition that ``may be in this way we shall reach that united<br />

India sooner than otherwise'' (Mosley, 1961, p. 248; also see Menon, 1957). The ongoing sense <strong>of</strong><br />

threat and vulnerability Ð real or perceived among Pakistanis Ð caused by the physical and ethnic<br />

separation <strong>of</strong> Pakistan's eastern wing, and the dispute over Jammu and Kashmir that also lead to<br />

armed hostilities, caused the Pakistani elite to seek military aid. Consequently, Pakistan entered into<br />

regional defence alliances such as the <strong>South</strong>east Asia Treaty Organisation (SEATO) and Central<br />

Treaty Organisation (CENTO). Nehru in turn raised the alarm over these Pakistani responses,<br />

characterising them as acts <strong>of</strong> war against India.<br />

These adversarial relations were exacerbated by the superpower politics <strong>of</strong> the Cold War. Even<br />

though Pakistani leaders <strong>of</strong>fered common defence to India in its military confrontation with China in<br />

1962, India waged war against Pakistan in 1965. Aside from the military costs, the Indo-Pak war<br />

intensified the Indo-Pak national and Hindu-Muslim communal divide throughout the entire region.<br />

The most affected victims were Indian Muslims who were, un<strong>of</strong>ficially and on occasions <strong>of</strong>ficially,<br />

treated as a suspect community in spite <strong>of</strong> the Indian Constitution guaranteeing equal rights to all<br />

citizens, and minorities a collective right to a distinct cultural identity.<br />

The hostilities intensified when India actively supported the dismemberment <strong>of</strong> Pakistan in 1971<br />

through the formation <strong>of</strong> Bangladesh. For the Pakistani elite, especially its military, the humiliating<br />

defeat in Dhaka, Bangladesh wounded its psyche because <strong>of</strong> its perception <strong>of</strong> India as the chief<br />

architect <strong>of</strong> the secession. The Simla Agreement <strong>of</strong> 1972 <strong>of</strong>fered an opportunity to Pakistan to rethink<br />

its very ideological basis <strong>of</strong> existence in terns <strong>of</strong> religion-based nationalism, to escape the obsession<br />

<strong>of</strong> completing the agenda <strong>of</strong> partition by acquiring control over Kashmir, and to normalise relations<br />

with its neighbour. The year 1971 had the potential <strong>of</strong> becoming a turning point in the history <strong>of</strong> the<br />

64


subcontinent, as the Hindu elite <strong>of</strong> all shades had felt reassured by what had been characterised as<br />

the surrender <strong>of</strong> the Pakistani army in Bangladesh and as the weakening <strong>of</strong> Islamic militancy in India.<br />

However, the path <strong>of</strong> reconciliation was not taken primarily because Pakistan at the time was ruled by<br />

a leader who was inspired with the ambition <strong>of</strong> resisting perceived Indian hegemonic designs, and <strong>of</strong><br />

seeking parity with India, as was evident in the eloquent speech he delivered in the UN General<br />

Assembly during the 1965 Indo-Pakistan war. In 1972 Bhutto prepared the blueprint <strong>of</strong> what he<br />

characterised, in civilisational terms, as an Islamic bomb. He was partly led into this course by his<br />

desire to escape being blackmailed by a nuclear India. India's nuclear arms status was confirmed by<br />

the 1974 Pokharan test. The search for hegemonic power by one, and <strong>of</strong> parity <strong>of</strong> sorts by the other,<br />

led eventually to Pokharan II and Chagai Hills.<br />

Later in 1979 Soviet armed intervention in Afghanistan set Pakistan and India on divergent courses.<br />

In spite <strong>of</strong> the apparently persistent efforts by the Pakistani military ruler from 1980 onward for a nonaggression<br />

pact with India, and the latter's <strong>of</strong>fer <strong>of</strong> treaty <strong>of</strong> friendship, neither India nor Pakistan<br />

were motivated by any sense <strong>of</strong> the subcontinent's shared destiny. Pakistan had a strategic interest<br />

in the disengagement <strong>of</strong> its forces from its eastern border and, given India's friendly relations with<br />

and dependence on Soviet Russia, Pakistan could not afford to antagonise or even embarrass India.<br />

Pakistan's excessive involvement with the armed-resistance (Jihadi) in Afghanistan, conditions in<br />

Jammu and Kashmir, and India's mishandling <strong>of</strong> the Russian occupation <strong>of</strong> Afghanistan changed the<br />

entire subcontinental scene 1 . India's refusal, especially after Nehru, to heed any voice <strong>of</strong> sanity, like<br />

that <strong>of</strong> Jaya Prakash Narayan (see Narayan, 1964a, 1964b) who in 1964 highlighted the fate <strong>of</strong> the<br />

people <strong>of</strong> Jammu and Kashmir by virtue <strong>of</strong> their accumulated unaddressed anger, found militant<br />

expression between 1989 and 1990. The free flow <strong>of</strong> arms and Jihadi ideology arising in the wake <strong>of</strong><br />

armed resistance in Afghanistan provided fertile soil for the establishment <strong>of</strong> militant groups in<br />

Jammu and Kashmir.<br />

The last thirteen conflict-ridden years have witnessed innumerable episodes <strong>of</strong> brutality by the Indian<br />

state's forces, including torture, custodial and encounter killings, disappearances, reprisal killings <strong>of</strong><br />

innocent civilians and gang rapes <strong>of</strong> women, as well as indiscriminate acts <strong>of</strong> terrorist violence, and<br />

kidnapping and hostage taking <strong>of</strong> innocent people, including foreigners, by militant groups. This<br />

period has also witnessed the mass migration <strong>of</strong> Kashmiri Pandits from the Kashmir valley, bringing<br />

to the fore the communal dimension <strong>of</strong> the problem. In Jammu, militant attacks against innocent<br />

Hindus brought home the same message <strong>of</strong> communal hate 2 . The armies <strong>of</strong> the two countries, fully<br />

prepared for combat, were deployed on the border, facing each other for months. There were<br />

occasions when threats involving the possible deployment <strong>of</strong> nuclear weapons were resorted to.<br />

The search for nationhood: Illusion or reality<br />

Nehru questioned whether Kashmir is the key problem or a symptom <strong>of</strong> the partition <strong>of</strong> minds, lands,<br />

and the shared history and culture <strong>of</strong> a people. Is there a clash <strong>of</strong> civilisations at the heart <strong>of</strong> the<br />

continually conflictual state <strong>of</strong> existence involving vast numbers <strong>of</strong> people? The question acquires<br />

validity and relevance when we find that the creation <strong>of</strong> Pakistan, instead <strong>of</strong> solving British India's<br />

Hindu-Muslim problem, aggravated it, as there are a larger number <strong>of</strong> Muslims in India than there are<br />

in Pakistan. The Muslim community in India is periodically subjected to violence, justified by extremist<br />

65


Hindus who seek legitimation for their aggression in the perceived wrongs committed by British India,<br />

as well as during partition and within the context <strong>of</strong> medieval India when Muslim dynasties ruled over<br />

the country. Medieval Muslim rulers are supposed to have been responsible for destroying temples,<br />

ravaging the modesty <strong>of</strong> Hindu women, and for the forced conversion <strong>of</strong> infidel (Kafir) Hindus to<br />

Islam. However, what is forgotten is that the indigenous overwhelming majority <strong>of</strong> Indian Muslims, on<br />

embracing Islam, did not enjoy any share in power. Power and privilege were the exclusive domain <strong>of</strong><br />

the Muslim nobility from the alien lands and the collaborating Hindu castes.<br />

British administrator-historians who in the wake <strong>of</strong> the 1857 revolt, perceiving Muslims as the greater<br />

destabilising force, encouraged Hindus to revive the memory <strong>of</strong> a golden era <strong>of</strong> ancient Indian<br />

history, which was supposedly destroyed by Muslim rulers. This ideologically suspect venture to<br />

revive history and memory was avowedly motivated by the British policy <strong>of</strong> ``divide and rule'', which<br />

alone could ensure the survival <strong>of</strong> British colonial rule in India 3 (also see Barrier, 1976; Siddiqui,<br />

1993). Extending on its divide and rule policy, the British also in turn encouraged Muslims to develop<br />

an exaggerated fear that their interests will not be adequately protected if the newly formed Indian<br />

National Congress succeeded in securing independence.<br />

However, the entire range, direction and varying intensity <strong>of</strong> Hindu-Muslim conflict in the 19th century<br />

and the first four decades <strong>of</strong> the 20th century cannot only be explained in terms <strong>of</strong> British ``divide and<br />

rule'' policy. During the early decades, independently <strong>of</strong> the British, sections <strong>of</strong> both Hindus and<br />

Muslims had envisioned their separate destinies in exclusivist revivalist terms. Some members <strong>of</strong> the<br />

modern educated elite, familiar with secular democratic parlance, from within the two communities,<br />

were motivated and inspired by respective visions <strong>of</strong> Hindu and Muslim cultural aspirations, some <strong>of</strong><br />

which were traceable to the differences in the two religious traditions. It is possible to trace some <strong>of</strong><br />

the post-1857 Hindu-Muslim conflict to a clash over political and economic interests, described by<br />

sociologists as intra-community and inter-community elites in competition for control over power and<br />

resources. However, it would be a dangerous over-simplification to view the whole conflict over<br />

identity-related issues as nothing more than an economic tool for mobilising the masses. Each <strong>of</strong> the<br />

identity related issues, like cow protection, religious conversion, Urdu script, religious processions,<br />

Bande Mataram (Indian song) and the sanctity <strong>of</strong> holy places and personages, which were<br />

dexterously used for the political mobilisation <strong>of</strong> Hindus and Muslims, have a genuine core with the<br />

capacity to move millions.<br />

It is unfortunate that Nehru, a modernist influenced by Western secular and socialist thought and<br />

practice, had a dismissive attitude to identity related issues. Mahatma Gandhi, whose discourse and<br />

idiom were avowedly Hindu (though with a humane spiritual interpretation) and who conceived <strong>of</strong><br />

resolving communal conflict by recourse to the concept <strong>of</strong> the unity <strong>of</strong> all religions under the slogan <strong>of</strong><br />

Ram-Rahim, failed to touch Muslim imaginations. Hindus and Muslims, with a long history <strong>of</strong> living<br />

together, could have succeeded in evolving a model <strong>of</strong> government and society if institutional<br />

arrangements upheld law and convention, and consensual agreement accommodating both groups'<br />

distinct sectoral and common national values, aspirations and interests.<br />

The Westminster model <strong>of</strong> electoral systems frightened individuals such as Sir Syed Ahmad Khan,<br />

thought to be the originator <strong>of</strong> the idea <strong>of</strong> Muslim nationalism, because <strong>of</strong> the Hindu numerical<br />

dominance in representative institutions. Sir Syed Ahmad Khan feared that Hindus would try to settle<br />

66


old historical scores with Muslims. His fears were rooted in the Hindu elite's desire to replace the<br />

Persian script by the Nagri, and the emergence <strong>of</strong> Hindu revivalist movements, which were perceived<br />

as anti-Muslim and which had caused periodic riots 4 (also see Mohammad, 1972).<br />

One is struck by the lack <strong>of</strong> any creative attempt to develop a consociational model <strong>of</strong> power-sharing<br />

(under the Proportional Representation electoral system and coalition form <strong>of</strong> government), sectoral<br />

cultural autonomy and mutual veto within a federal polity, which could have kept a multi-cultural<br />

country together. The Motilal Nehru Report <strong>of</strong> 1928 made the following significant observation: ``We<br />

have no doubt that proportional representation will in future be the solution <strong>of</strong> our (communal)<br />

problem. It <strong>of</strong>fers the only rational and just way <strong>of</strong> meeting the fears and claims <strong>of</strong> various<br />

communities'' (All Parties Conference, 1975, n.p). However, the Report did not recommend the<br />

proportional representation system due to a lack <strong>of</strong> consensus about its workability.<br />

The history <strong>of</strong> political and constitutional developments during 1927-1946 gives the impression that<br />

the Hindu elite's preference for a strong centralised Indian state, based on what the Congress<br />

resolutions confirmed as ``pure undiluted nationalism'' (Indian National Congress, 1934, n.p.),<br />

contributed to partition becoming a reality. The post-1947 Indian state's experiment <strong>of</strong> managing its<br />

diversity has however convinced everyone that the idea <strong>of</strong> a ``pure undiluted nationalism'' in India is<br />

not workable. The idea <strong>of</strong> India as an undiluted nation state is what tore it apart. The search for parity<br />

with Hindu India on the part <strong>of</strong> the Muslim elite, including Sir Syed and Bhutto, also contributed to<br />

partition. In the rest <strong>of</strong> India, it became clear to the intellectual and political classes that India was not<br />

a nation, but one in the making. Nation-building would have been successfully accelerated if the<br />

concept <strong>of</strong> India's unity in diversity had been allowed to unfold within a plural, humanistic framework,<br />

assuring humane citizen-centred governance, the rule <strong>of</strong> law, and observance <strong>of</strong> human rights<br />

norms.<br />

The nature <strong>of</strong> Hindu-Muslim conflict<br />

In this section I will consider how Muslims have been treated, and examine why pre-independence<br />

Hindu-Muslim conflict has yet to be resolved.<br />

Settling old scores with Muslims and locating them in what is considered to be a proper place in<br />

society started with the process <strong>of</strong> framing the Constitution. Although Mahavir Tyagi's proposal to<br />

make the rights <strong>of</strong> minorities in India dependent on how Pakistan treated its minorities (Constituent<br />

Assembly, 1947) was rejected by Dr. Ambedkar, partition did cast its shadow over the framing <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Constitution. For example, safeguards for political and economic rights, provided for in the earlier<br />

versions <strong>of</strong> Draft Constitution, were finally and unceremoniously scrapped 5 . The demand for the right<br />

<strong>of</strong> the child to receive primary education in the mother tongue, unanimously made by Muslim<br />

members, was not acceded to and included in the Constitution because G.B. Pant maintained that<br />

having separate Urdu sections in schools would cost the exchequer a great deal <strong>of</strong> money. Moreover,<br />

he maintained that Urdu was no different from Hindi and that those who were keen on their children<br />

learning Urdu might send them to madrassas (Islamic schools) (Constituent Assembly, n.d). The<br />

promise contained in Article 29(1), that distinct languages and scripts would be conserved, has<br />

consequently remained a teasing illusion, at least for Urdu-speaking Indians.<br />

67


During the debate a staunch nationalist Muslim, Hasrat Mohani, was told to go to Pakistan when he<br />

made a fervent plea for the protection <strong>of</strong> the Urdu language. Articles 347 and 350(A), providing for<br />

the use <strong>of</strong> minority languages for <strong>of</strong>ficial and instructional purposes, are discretionary and not<br />

mandatory in nature. Though some states, like Bihar and Andhra, Maharashtra and Himachal<br />

Pradesh, have made provision for the <strong>of</strong>ficial use <strong>of</strong> Urdu for specified purposes, the demand for its<br />

becoming the second <strong>of</strong>ficial language in the State <strong>of</strong> Uttar Pradesh has remained unfulfilled, and has<br />

been causing communal tension and violence.<br />

It must be stressed that the loss <strong>of</strong> the Urdu script by its users (who happen to be largely Muslims) is<br />

a genuine grievance. The marginalisation <strong>of</strong> Urdu is best understood in the context <strong>of</strong> the fear <strong>of</strong><br />

cultural assimilation and disregard <strong>of</strong> Islamic religious teachings related to the regulation <strong>of</strong> relations<br />

in the family. It is my contention that from a purely humanistic perspective, cultural pluralism validates<br />

legal pluralism in family laws and so it is for the state to ensure that the right to cultural autonomy is<br />

exercised in a manner consistent with norms <strong>of</strong> equity and justice for all parties, especially women.<br />

In 1961 in Jabalpur communal riots were triggered by the news <strong>of</strong> the suicide <strong>of</strong> a Hindu girl in love<br />

with a Muslim boy. The Hindu Rashtravadis wanted to teach the Muslim community a lesson for their<br />

`historical role' <strong>of</strong> dishonouring Hindu women. Muslim houses were marked, just as was the case in<br />

Gujarat in 2002. The communal violence was marked by killings and large-scale destruction <strong>of</strong><br />

property, especially residential houses.<br />

The riots are reported to have shaken Prime Minister Nehru, who held the opinion that they were preplanned.<br />

The failure <strong>of</strong> the police in intelligence-gathering for the prevention <strong>of</strong> violence and<br />

subsequently in investigation and prosecution, which resulted in the acquittal <strong>of</strong> the rioters, has been<br />

noted by Justice Shiv Dayal Shrivastava, who inquired into the riots at Jabalpur, Sagar, Damoh and<br />

Narsimhapur in February 1961. A National Integration Committee was constituted, which<br />

recommended, among other things, that the district administration should be held responsible for<br />

failure to maintain peace and that appropriate action should be taken. In 1968 the National<br />

Integration Council (NIC) made the recommendation that ``failure to take prompt and effective action<br />

should be considered a dereliction <strong>of</strong> duty and <strong>of</strong>ficers concerned should be dealt with accordingly.<br />

Service rules should be amended, if necessary'' (uncited source).<br />

The 1961 NIC had made a significant recommendation to suitably amend the Section 153(A) <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Indian Penal Code for the prevention and prosecution <strong>of</strong> hate speech. That these recommendations<br />

were not taken seriously is obvious from the observations <strong>of</strong> the Raghubar Dayal Commission Report<br />

on riots in Ranchi, Sholapur, Malegaon and other places in 1967. The Commission noted that ``the<br />

general impression has been that either there was no police force to deal with the mischief makers or<br />

it had direction not to act'' (cited from Noorani, 1997, n.p.).<br />

In Ahmedabad in 1969 a fracas was witnessed between a group <strong>of</strong> boys, enjoying a local fair near<br />

the revered Jagannath Hindu temple, and sadhus returning with their cattle in the evening. The<br />

fracas led to stone throwing, and one stone hit and broke the glass pane <strong>of</strong> the temple's panel, which<br />

contained the revered Murti 6 The word soon went round that malicious Muslims had attacked the<br />

temple and killed sadhus. Retaliatory violence ultimately resulted in the loss <strong>of</strong> 2000 innocent lives,<br />

68


destruction <strong>of</strong> property, and the desecration and damage to holy Muslim shrines. One thousand<br />

people were forced to live in camps, mostly under the open sky.<br />

My investigation revealed that the accidental hitting <strong>of</strong> the panel <strong>of</strong> the temple had been associated<br />

with the destruction <strong>of</strong> the Somnath temple by Mahmood Ghazni about a thousand years ago. The<br />

local Dharm Raksha Samiti and Hindu Sangram Samiti, which campaigned for retaliation, reminded<br />

Hindus <strong>of</strong> the historical role <strong>of</strong> Muslims as destroyers <strong>of</strong> temples, and claimed that again Hindu<br />

Dharma faced a threat from the Muslims. One <strong>of</strong> the leaflets published by Hindu Sangram Samiti<br />

stated: ``Muslims have meanly attacked Ahmedabad's famous Jagannath Temple and desecrated its<br />

idols. Muslims are repeating history. Their main aim is not only to destroy maximum possible Hindu<br />

temples but to destroy Hindu religion and culture and to convert Hindus to Islam'' (Ansari, 1970, n.p.).<br />

The leaflet exhorted Hindu youth to ``avenge insult to our Temples and ladies and rush to Muslim<br />

areas with weapons and finish them'' (Ansari, 1970, n.p.). Apart from the exhumation <strong>of</strong> a thousand<br />

year old `history', Pakistan was a living presence in the minds <strong>of</strong> people who were warned by the<br />

Jana Sangh leader, Balraj Madhok, while addressing the Rifle Training Club on 14 September 1969,<br />

<strong>of</strong> imminent attack from Pakistan in the states <strong>of</strong> Gujarat and Rajasthan. The ensuing violence, apart<br />

from taking a very heavy human toll, destroyed a large number <strong>of</strong> mosques.<br />

In Baroda, another city in Gujarat affected by communal violence, a slogan on the wall asked<br />

Muslims to ``Quit India''. A number <strong>of</strong> posters appeared appealing to Hindus to subject Muslims to<br />

complete social and economic boycott, which was repeated during the communal violence in 2002.<br />

The then military ruler <strong>of</strong> Pakistan, General Yahya Khan, had gone public saying that he had ordered<br />

his men to seal the border with India against any infiltration <strong>of</strong> Muslim refugees. He, however,<br />

exploited the events in Gujarat in 1969 to deny any <strong>of</strong>ficial presence <strong>of</strong> the Indian Muslim delegation<br />

in the Rabat Conference <strong>of</strong> the Organisation <strong>of</strong> Islamic Conference.<br />

The partisan role <strong>of</strong> the police during the initial phase <strong>of</strong> the Gujarat massacre is evident in the title <strong>of</strong><br />

the Asia Watch Report on Gujarat 2002, ``We have no orders to save you'' (Human Rights Watch,<br />

2002). My own inquiry into this first large-scale Gujarat pogrom against Muslims revealed that the<br />

police connivance and complicity were partly caused by communal bias on the part <strong>of</strong> the police<br />

personnel, and mainly by their dependence on policy directions from the political executive.<br />

Bhattacharjea's (1969) report on the 1969 Ahmedabad communal violence does not attribute the first<br />

three days <strong>of</strong> rioting to police inaction, but to the policy <strong>of</strong> the secular Congress Government.<br />

Bhattacharjea's conversations with Congress leaders revealed that if the Congress government had<br />

instructed the police to be firm with the rioters, Congress might have lost the next elections to the<br />

Jana Sangh. No prosecution was lodged against those who had distributed handbills inciting people<br />

to violence in the name <strong>of</strong> protection <strong>of</strong> Dharma. Similarly, the Justice D.P. Madon Commission,<br />

which inquired into riots in Bhiwandi, Jalgaon and Mahad in 1970, reported blatant communal bias<br />

against Muslims to be present in the entire law-enforcement machinery (cited from Ansari, 1997).<br />

That the police force in India does not function as an impartial law enforcement agency, but as a<br />

subordinate body to enforce the policies <strong>of</strong> the government <strong>of</strong> the day, was noted by the Nahond<br />

Police Commission (NPC) in its Reports (1978-81). The Commission attributed police partiality to the<br />

continuation <strong>of</strong> the 1861 Police Act, which formalised the police's command-control system, and<br />

69


oriented it as a ruler-appointed body. The NPC made the recommendation that the police force be<br />

reorganised in order to enable it to function independently <strong>of</strong> government policy, accountable to the<br />

law. The recommendations, endorsed by the National Human Rights Commission (NHRC), the<br />

National Commission for Minorities (NCM) Report on Communal Riots: Prevention And Control<br />

(1999) (Minorities Council, 1999) and by several human rights organisations, have not been<br />

implemented.<br />

Apart from the politics <strong>of</strong> Ram Mandir, the uniform civil code, conversion and other ethno-religious<br />

identity issues, primarily the fragility <strong>of</strong> the institutional mechanism <strong>of</strong> rule <strong>of</strong> law has proved<br />

disastrous for Hindu-Muslim, Hindu-Sikh and Hindu-Christian relations in India. The massacre <strong>of</strong><br />

3000 innocent Sikhs in 1984 in Delhi may be attributed to this system <strong>of</strong> partial policing. Dara Singh,<br />

the killer <strong>of</strong> Graham Staines 7 and his two sons, was emboldened to commit the heinous crime<br />

because he was not brought to justice for his earlier anti-Muslim criminal acts.<br />

As another illustration, the demolition <strong>of</strong> Babri Masjid happened because the district administration<br />

and the police carried out the partisan orders <strong>of</strong> the Chief Minister, disregarding their duty under law.<br />

The justice delivery system is also characterised by a pervasive climate <strong>of</strong> impunity, and distortion<br />

and miscarriage <strong>of</strong> justice, thereby becoming a major source <strong>of</strong> communal and other inter-group<br />

violence in India.<br />

While it is imperative to fully appreciate the historical basis <strong>of</strong> the conflict, we should note that the<br />

contemporary communal conflict in India, which peaked during 1990-1992 in Ayodhya and in Gujarat<br />

in 2002, may be traced back to 1981 when a few hundred former untouchables in Meenakshipuram<br />

in Tamil Nadu converted to Islam en-masse. This mass event seems to have revived and intensified<br />

the sense <strong>of</strong> siege which Hindus have been nursing since the publication <strong>of</strong> census data in 1881,<br />

which showed a gradual decline in the Hindu population. The mass conversion made almost all <strong>of</strong><br />

Hindu India, including Mrs. Indira Gandhi, pay attention. It set the Vishwa Hindu Parishad (VHP) upon<br />

a determined course <strong>of</strong> consolidating the protection <strong>of</strong> Hindus' interests and controlling perceived<br />

Muslim assertiveness and ascendancy. While it may not have been widely and explicitly noted, the<br />

VHP policy <strong>of</strong> observing Muslim population growth invoked possible alarm about the all-time high<br />

percentage <strong>of</strong> Muslim members elected to the Lok Sabha (parliament) in the general elections <strong>of</strong><br />

1980 and 1984. Whereas earlier there were between 21 and 35 Muslim members <strong>of</strong> parliament, their<br />

numbers peaked to 49 in 1980 and 46 members in 1984. This was the time when the VHP initiated<br />

its Hindu mobilisation project over Ayodhya mosque. The mobilisation was intensified by what<br />

appeared to be the secular Congress government's continuing appeasement <strong>of</strong> Muslims, especially<br />

when it enacted a law, Muslim Women (Protection <strong>of</strong> Rights on Divorce) 1986, in accordance with the<br />

Islamic Shariah (law).<br />

The period <strong>of</strong> the 1980s also brought into focus the wider Indo-Pak conflict, intensifying the existing<br />

Hindu sense <strong>of</strong> siege and threat supposedly presented by Islam and Muslims. Violent opposition to<br />

Indian presence in Kashmir further aggravated the sense <strong>of</strong> siege among Hindus.<br />

All <strong>of</strong> the issues like the controversy surrounding the status <strong>of</strong> the Ayodhya, cow, conversion, Bande<br />

Mataram and Personal Law, that have been politically exploited in pursuit <strong>of</strong> a narrow chauvinistic<br />

Hindu agenda and a communalised mythic reading <strong>of</strong> history, characterised Muslim-Hindu relations<br />

70


in India for a long time. During phases <strong>of</strong> the freedom movement they were politically exploited. But<br />

this historical conflict should not make us assume a dismissive attitude in the name <strong>of</strong> secularism.<br />

We must not ignore the fact that Article 48 <strong>of</strong> the Constitution does specially direct the state to take<br />

steps to prohibit the slaughter <strong>of</strong> cows and calves, in the name <strong>of</strong> the science <strong>of</strong> animal husbandry.<br />

State laws providing for the prohibition <strong>of</strong> the slaughter <strong>of</strong> cows have been upheld by the apex court<br />

despite constitutional values favouring secularism and minority rights. Irrespective <strong>of</strong> the legality <strong>of</strong><br />

laws on cow slaughter, the point to be borne in mind is that these laws reflect the strong religious<br />

sentiments <strong>of</strong> large sections <strong>of</strong> the population, leading us to the conclusion that there is a political<br />

cow and a sacred cow. As in the case <strong>of</strong> the cow, there is a political Rama 8 , as admitted by L.K.<br />

Advani in his deposition before the Liberhan Commission, and there is a sacred Rama. To be able to<br />

deal effectively with the political Rama, peacemakers and peacebuilders will have to accommodate<br />

the sacred Rama.<br />

TOWARDS COMMUNAL AND REGIONAL SECURITY AND PEACE<br />

Given our holistic understanding <strong>of</strong> the phenomenon <strong>of</strong> communal violence, we recommend a tw<strong>of</strong>old<br />

approach. First we need the establishment <strong>of</strong> an institutional mechanism supportive <strong>of</strong> the rule <strong>of</strong> law.<br />

Second, we need to tackle aggressive ideologies, including exclusive Hindu militant nationalism and<br />

militant Muslim Jihadist ideologies focused only on armed-struggle. Effective laws to prevent and<br />

punish hate speech, uphold the right to freedom <strong>of</strong> speech, guarantee the rights <strong>of</strong> victims <strong>of</strong> all<br />

public violence, and that enshrines legal procedures to establish <strong>of</strong>ficial responsibility for acts <strong>of</strong><br />

commission or omission are central to the prevention <strong>of</strong> communal violence. In order to use legal<br />

mechanisms effectively, it is necessary that the personnel <strong>of</strong> law-enforcement machinery are not<br />

communalised in their attitudes and composition. Priority should be accorded to making the staff<br />

composition <strong>of</strong> the governance system, including the policing system, socially diverse and free from<br />

biases.<br />

Most <strong>of</strong> these reform measures have already been suggested in the reports <strong>of</strong> the NIC (1961; 1968),<br />

NPC (1978-81), NHRC (1994, 2002), NCM (1999) and the Union Home Ministry's Guidelines (1997).<br />

The most comprehensive is the Report <strong>of</strong> the Concerned Citizens' Tribunal on Gujarat (Concerned<br />

Citizens Tribunal, 2002).<br />

Civil society and peace<br />

However, we need to note that in a traditional society like India contentious ethno-religious issues like<br />

Ayodhya, the cow, conversion, Bande Mataram and Urdu, which have been a source <strong>of</strong> communal<br />

conflict for more than a century and a half, cannot be left to be resolved by law alone. Rule <strong>of</strong> law is a<br />

necessary but not a sufficient condition for durable communal peace. It requires civil society<br />

initiatives to bring about conciliation through dialogue between the parties in an atmosphere <strong>of</strong> trust,<br />

mutual respect and accommodation. A <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n court, giving its decision on a dispute between<br />

Christians and Muslims on the issue <strong>of</strong> use <strong>of</strong> amplifiers for azan (the calling to prayers in the<br />

mosques), ruled that while the Muslims had a right to use amplifiers for azan, the timing and volume<br />

had to be settled by community leaders themselves. In such issues, there is a role for law and a role<br />

71


for dialogue. Without the protection <strong>of</strong> the law, the weaker party will have to submit to the dictates <strong>of</strong><br />

the strong, but absence <strong>of</strong> mechanisms <strong>of</strong> dialogue will make the parties unable to work out a winwin<br />

solution, which can produce peace dividends, especially for the weaker party.<br />

Communal conflict in India will continue to be exacerbated by the absence <strong>of</strong> firm institutional<br />

mechanisms to assure the rule <strong>of</strong> law and <strong>of</strong> dialogue. It should, however, be realised that there can<br />

be no meaningful dialogue between the hate-mongering tormentors, who threaten to impose their<br />

majoritarian will in defiance <strong>of</strong> law onto the minority, and the oppressed weaker party who feels hurt<br />

and humiliated. In order to understand the requisites <strong>of</strong> successful dialogue, it is vital to grasp the<br />

background <strong>of</strong> the two decades <strong>of</strong> confrontation and the politics <strong>of</strong> identity, described earlier.<br />

In particular, conciliation over contentious communal issues is required so that unresolved issues are<br />

not politically exploited in any dubious attempts to polarise the population for electoral gains. Such<br />

conciliation would require inter- and intra-community dialogue around issues related to the equal<br />

rights <strong>of</strong> all persons as citizens and as members <strong>of</strong> identity-based communities, the rule <strong>of</strong> law, and<br />

the censure <strong>of</strong> hate speech.<br />

Other statutory measures<br />

Alongside these recommended civil society initiatives, there is a need for an empowered statutory<br />

Community Relations Commission (CRC) that is focused on the monitoring, prevention, resolution<br />

and review <strong>of</strong> all inter-group conflicts based on religion, language or ethnicity. In a country <strong>of</strong> India's<br />

diversity and history <strong>of</strong> conflict, such a Commission, as opposed to the ad hoc NIC which lacks any<br />

mandate or structure for research and monitoring, will be required to promote social and cultural<br />

harmony, peace and stability. The CRC, which was also recommended by the NCM Report on<br />

Communal Riots (Minorities Council, 1999), could focus on promoting dialogue and upholding the<br />

rule <strong>of</strong> law. In the event <strong>of</strong> facilitating any agreement between parties to a dispute, the CRC and its<br />

regional and local branches, working in liaison with NGOs, may be responsible for enforcing the<br />

terms <strong>of</strong> the agreement. In the event <strong>of</strong> failed dialogue or breach <strong>of</strong> terms <strong>of</strong> an agreement, the CRC<br />

could be empowered to initiate legal action against the erring party and act to censure hate speech.<br />

The CRC could be assisted by special Intelligence Units and Special Prosecutors. The CRC should<br />

also have some influence in the appointment <strong>of</strong> an Inquiry Commission that probes the determinants<br />

<strong>of</strong> communal violence and allocates responsibility. The Commission's apex Advisory Council should<br />

include representatives from all political parties, eminent public figures and intellectuals, all <strong>of</strong> whom<br />

ought to be appointed according to agreed-on procedures, thereby ensuring the independence <strong>of</strong> the<br />

CRC.<br />

The CRC might also consider appointing a Truth and Reconciliation Commission (TRC) if and when<br />

such a TRC is considered advisable by consenting communities, and when the Advisory Council<br />

determines that it would facilitate better and lasting peace and justice.<br />

Indo-Pak-Bangladesh peacebuilding<br />

In order to facilitate Indo-Pak-Bangladesh regional peace, I suggest the adoption <strong>of</strong> the <strong>South</strong> Asian<br />

72


Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC) Human Rights Convention and institutions. Instead <strong>of</strong><br />

limiting measures to an Indo-Pak Confederation or no-war pacts, the European Union may be a<br />

pertinent model for the SAARC to adopt. Such a model could include a focus on regional human<br />

rights conventions, special instruments for the promotion <strong>of</strong> the rights <strong>of</strong> minorities, refugees, migrant<br />

workers, asylum seekers and members <strong>of</strong> divided families, provisions for SAARC Commissioners for<br />

Human Rights, Minorities and Non-Citizens, and SAARC Human Rights Courts. Special attention<br />

needs to be granted to formalising mechanisms for the harmonisation <strong>of</strong> security concerns <strong>of</strong> all<br />

member states and for the resolution <strong>of</strong> inter-state disputes.<br />

The SAARC Charter adopted in Dhaka, Bangladesh on 8 December 1985 is based on recognition <strong>of</strong>,<br />

among other things, the desire to promote peace, stability and amity in the region. The Dhaka<br />

Declaration adopted by heads <strong>of</strong> governments in 1985 makes more explicit that peace and security<br />

are essential prerequisites for the promotion <strong>of</strong> the welfare and prosperity <strong>of</strong> all the region's people.<br />

The Charter also takes due cognisance <strong>of</strong> the fact ``that in an increasingly interdependent world the<br />

objectives <strong>of</strong> peace, freedom, social justice and economic prosperity are best achieved by mutual<br />

understanding, good neighbourly relations and meaningful cooperation among the countries <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong><br />

Asia which are bound by ties <strong>of</strong> history and culture'' (uncited source).<br />

In view <strong>of</strong> these broad principles it would be appropriate for the Charter to include the objective <strong>of</strong><br />

promoting peace in the region and protecting the human rights <strong>of</strong> all individuals and communities.<br />

Disputes among neighbours are bound to arise. If recourse to war is to be replaced by the rule <strong>of</strong> law<br />

in international relations, then the parties to a dispute must be willing to be subjected to the process<br />

<strong>of</strong> adjudication, arbitration and reconciliation through third-party mediation. It does not make any<br />

sense to treat bilateral negotiation as the only lawful method <strong>of</strong> resolving disputes between two<br />

parties, individuals, groups or nations. In this regard, priority needs to be given to a multi-lateral<br />

SAARC treaty on the use <strong>of</strong> force in settling disputes. Such a treaty must be based on the four<br />

Geneva Conventions <strong>of</strong> 1949 and optional protocols. If pursued with genuine commitment to peace,<br />

such a treaty will end all indiscriminate and unlawful use <strong>of</strong> force in the region.<br />

In negotiations regarding Kashmir, Pakistan would be well advised not to adopt a narrow national<br />

perspective based exclusively on legal terms. This article calls on Pakistani people, especially the<br />

more enlightened sections <strong>of</strong> its citizenry and civil society, to assert their voice so that the ruling elites<br />

adopt a more humanistic perspective and consider the welfare <strong>of</strong> all the region's people, including<br />

Indian Muslims, when arriving at an agreement on the Kashmir dispute.<br />

NOTES<br />

1. Unfortunately, unprincipled opportunistic Indian policy <strong>of</strong> appeasement <strong>of</strong> the Soviet Union during<br />

the period <strong>of</strong> its occupation <strong>of</strong> Afghanistan did not elicit any strong protest from the `peace and<br />

democracy' forums in India. India's principled position might have helped Afghan resistance to<br />

become broadly democratic and reconsider its strategy <strong>of</strong> armed-struggle.<br />

2. Under the forum <strong>of</strong> the Coordination Committee on Kashmir, constituted jointly with Justice V.M.<br />

Tarkunde and others, the author inquired into human rights violations by state forces and militant<br />

groups in June-July 1991 and October 1992. The latter inquiry included the case <strong>of</strong> gang rape <strong>of</strong><br />

73


women in Chaksaidapor in Shopian district <strong>of</strong> Kashmir. Besides these two, the Committee<br />

brought out four other reports based on inquiries by teams comprising Justice V.M. Tarkunde and<br />

others. Amnesty International and Asia Watch/Human Rights Watch, New York have also been<br />

publishing periodic reports on human rights violations in Kashmir.<br />

3. ``Divide et impera should be the motto for our Indian administration whether political, civil on<br />

military, wrote a British scholar under the nom-de-plume ``Caranaticus'' in the Asiatic Journal, May<br />

1821.<br />

4. Sir Syed Ahmed Khan believed that the earliest foreboding <strong>of</strong> Hindus and Muslims drifting apart<br />

and seeking their separate destinies emerged with the Nagri Parcharni Sabha resolution<br />

demanding the introduction <strong>of</strong> Hindi as an <strong>of</strong>ficial language in 1967. The controversy over Urdu is<br />

recorded in the Institute Gazethe, Aligarh, edited by Sir Syed Ahmad Khan (24 January 1867; 31<br />

October 1868; 12 November 1868; 27 November 1868; 2 July 1869; 3 January 1873).<br />

Apprehension about out-numbered Muslims living at the mercy <strong>of</strong> the Hindu majority found its<br />

early frank expression in Sir Syed's speech in the Legislative Council on 12 January 1883.<br />

5. Articles 292 and 294, dealing with population-based seats in central and state legislatures; Article<br />

296, dealing with consideration <strong>of</strong> minorities in public services; and Article 299, dealing with<br />

Minority Officers to monitor and supervise implementation <strong>of</strong> safeguards for minorities, adopted in<br />

August 1947, were scrapped in May and October 1949.<br />

6. Murtis are deities or images used by Hindus during worship as points <strong>of</strong> devotional and<br />

meditational focus.<br />

7. Graham Staines was a Christian missionary from Australia who worked with lepers in Orissa, and<br />

was burnt alive in January 1999.<br />

8. In Hindu folklore Rama is the epitome <strong>of</strong> chivalry and courage, and obedience to sacred law.<br />

REFERENCES<br />

All Parties Conference. (1975). The Motilal Nehru Committee Report. New Delhi: Michiko &<br />

Panjathan.<br />

Ansari, I.A. (1970). Ahmedabad riots: Focus on dark corners. Delhi: Radiance Book Depot.<br />

Ansari, I.A. (Ed.) (1997). Communal riots, the state and lawin India. New Delhi: I.O.S.<br />

Bhattacharjea, A. (1969). Report on Ahmedabad. New Delhi: Sampra Dayikta Virodhi Committee.<br />

Barrier, V.G. (Ed.) (1976). Roots <strong>of</strong> communal politics, Bhagwan Das Committee Report. New Delhi:<br />

Bhagwan Das Committee.<br />

Concerned Citizens Tribunal. (2002). Report <strong>of</strong> the Concerned Citizens' Tribunal on Gujarat. India:<br />

Author.<br />

Constituent Assembly. (n.d.). Constituent Assembly debates, II, 891-927.<br />

Constituent Assembly. (1947). Constituent Assembly debates, III, 505.<br />

74


Human Rights Watch. (2002). ``We have no orders to save you'': State participation and complicity in<br />

communal violence in Gujarat. Human Rights Watch Report, 14,3(C).<br />

Indian National Congress (1934, June 12-13). Resolution <strong>of</strong> the Working Committee <strong>of</strong> the Indian<br />

National Congress on the White Paper and the Communal Award. India: Author.<br />

Menon, V.P. (1957). Transfer <strong>of</strong> power in India. Pakistan: Callard.<br />

Minorities Council. (1999). Report on communal riots: Prevention and control, New Delhi: Author.<br />

Mohammad, S. (1972). Speeches and writings <strong>of</strong> Sir Syed Ahmad Khan. Bombay: Nacliketa.<br />

Mosley, L. (1961). The last days <strong>of</strong> the British Raj. London: Harcourt, Brace & World.<br />

Narayan, J. P. (1964a, April 20). Our great opportunity in Kashmir. Hindustan Times, n.p.<br />

Narayan, J. P. (1964b, May 15). Need to rethink. Hindustan Times, n.p.<br />

Noorani, A.G. (1997). Communal riots and the police. In I.A. Ansari (Ed.), Communal riots, the state<br />

and lawin India (pp. 6-7). New Delhi: I.O.S.<br />

Siddiqui, M. A. K. (1993). Hindu-Muslims relations. Calcutta: Abadi.<br />

75


Short Research Reports<br />

REFLECTIONS ON TRUTH AND<br />

RECONCILIATION<br />

Hiren Gohain 1<br />

English Department, Gauhati <strong>University</strong><br />

The <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth and Reconciliation Commission appears to have made a focused endeavour<br />

to heal divisions in a multi-ethnic society. If, as argued, these efforts were based on principles and not<br />

on expediency, it is imperative to identify such principles for application in other contexts and<br />

situations. When a state institution or a community is involved in crimes against its citizens or another<br />

community, is it necessary to investigate those crimes after a political settlement has been achieved,<br />

or turn our back on them and regard them as an episode <strong>of</strong> temporary insanity and a panic reaction?<br />

Or would this be regarded as an attempt to expand our understanding <strong>of</strong> politics through the<br />

application <strong>of</strong> human values?<br />

The modern world is rife with political tensions which frequently erupt into conflict and violence. A<br />

case in point is the ongoing war <strong>of</strong> aggression in the Middle East, which is waged in scornful defiance<br />

<strong>of</strong> world public opinion. Can a dialogue on truth and reconciliation have any relevance against this<br />

backdrop? It could be argued that the legacy <strong>of</strong> violence and conflict has itself been responsible for<br />

placing such endeavours on the agenda. But can there be genuine reconciliation between interests<br />

and views that are irreconcilably opposed? Could this not be interpreted as a disingenuous<br />

suppression <strong>of</strong> fear and resentment, suspicion and pain?<br />

It is necessary to emphasise that reconciliation can occur only in the case <strong>of</strong> antagonists who form<br />

some kind <strong>of</strong> a dialectical unity, say, between a colonial power and a colonised nation 1 , between<br />

imperialism and its victims, or between an oppressive state and a small, weak minority group. Those<br />

who dominate situations <strong>of</strong> conflict and social inequity make large claims about truth, which appear<br />

dubious to impartial outside observers. Such pretence <strong>of</strong> unity, it is perhaps believed, will be replaced<br />

by genuine unity once antagonism has been overcome. Hence, epistemological and social<br />

reconstruction appear to be two aspects <strong>of</strong> the same enterprise.<br />

Reconciliation in this context does not mean wishing away conflict and difference, but engaging the<br />

conflictual situation explicitly with a view to adopting a less partial and broader perspective. Given<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Hiren Gohain, English Department, Gauhati <strong>University</strong>, Guwahati-3, Assam, India.<br />

76


that the basis <strong>of</strong> reconciliation is justice, and not mere accommodation, the replacement <strong>of</strong> a colonial<br />

order by a native regime does not in itself meet the needs <strong>of</strong> justice. Mere withdrawal <strong>of</strong> an aggressor<br />

from a country's soil is also not enough. Remorse should include full compensation for the damage<br />

done, and a confession <strong>of</strong> the injustices committed. Vietnam is a clear example <strong>of</strong> such a lapse,<br />

suggesting that only when arrogance is replaced by tragic acceptance <strong>of</strong> the historical destiny <strong>of</strong><br />

humans, can true reconciliation follow.<br />

T.S. Eliot aptly summed up the situation when meditating on the deep divisions that characterised<br />

English society in the 17th century and still continue to haunt it to this very day.<br />

History may be servitude<br />

History may be freedom ...<br />

We cannot revive old factions<br />

We cannot restore old policies<br />

Or follow an antique drum,<br />

These men and those who opposed them<br />

And those whom they opposed<br />

Accept the Constitution <strong>of</strong> Silence<br />

And are folded in a single party.<br />

Whatever we inherit from the fortunate<br />

We have taken from the defeated<br />

What they had to leave us<br />

A symbol:<br />

A symbol perfected in death.<br />

(Four Quartets: ``Little Gidding'')<br />

Of course the quiet pathos and subdued pain <strong>of</strong> these lines may belong in the context <strong>of</strong> religious<br />

meditation. The suffering and pain <strong>of</strong> history are transfigured, rendered meaningful ex post facto by a<br />

Christian view <strong>of</strong> time redeemed. On a more mundane level, we could say time heals old wounds in<br />

society as much as in the individual. However, the project <strong>of</strong> truth and reconciliation boldly lifts into<br />

consciousness what takes place beneath the threshold <strong>of</strong> consciousness. So justice is what we are<br />

reconciled to, however difficult it is.<br />

The great works <strong>of</strong> literature correct the myopia <strong>of</strong> people who are possessed by confident visions <strong>of</strong><br />

social engineering, without any sense <strong>of</strong> history. Eliot prompts the idea that we inherit the guilt <strong>of</strong> our<br />

fathers in more than a factual sense, and that the project for future life should include coming to<br />

terms with that guilt. It is not religious dogma to hold that social crimes have a tendency to linger long<br />

after the perpetrators and their victims have left the scene. The structure <strong>of</strong> society and the way <strong>of</strong> life<br />

that permitted such crimes <strong>of</strong>ten survive them, are reinforced by them, and may yet again see their<br />

recurrence. In this respect, the communalism that led to the horrendous massacres <strong>of</strong> the partition<br />

days in India has not disappeared despite the best efforts <strong>of</strong> secular-minded leaders for several<br />

decades.<br />

It could even be argued that in any social ideology the prevailing mode <strong>of</strong> rhetoric and reasoning<br />

77


perpetuates implicit violence. An Oriental such as Edward Said was needed to retrace steps into the<br />

past and discover that the self-definition <strong>of</strong> an awakened, modern Europe in the 17th to 18th<br />

centuries required a demonisation <strong>of</strong> its other, the Orient, which it sought to dominate. This image<br />

was the product <strong>of</strong> a particular discourse, but the discourse itself, Said declared, had been intimately<br />

linked to the rise <strong>of</strong> a certain regime <strong>of</strong> power. So as stated earlier, epistemology and social<br />

development coincide.<br />

Some say that we still live in the dark ages <strong>of</strong> history, when the other, against whom we define<br />

ourselves, becomes the enemy, a veritable threat to our existence. We tend to deny his/her human<br />

identity as a matter <strong>of</strong> course. It is <strong>of</strong>ten said that post-modern enlightenment has rid us <strong>of</strong> such<br />

superstitions. But even long before that, Buddhist ethics encouraged the abandonment <strong>of</strong> racial and<br />

cultural pride (see Lessing & Wayman, 1993). The Brahman priests <strong>of</strong> later times also retained<br />

something <strong>of</strong> this ethos. To Francois Bernier, a physician, scientist, and 17th century inquisitive<br />

traveller, who was armed with scientific reason and intolerant Protestant faith, Hindu priests replied<br />

as follows: ``We believe God has given to each people its own path to salvation. We respect the path<br />

you are following to God, but we prefer to follow our own'' (uncited source). But Bernier chose not to<br />

heed this message. Ruth Benedict, in her Patterns <strong>of</strong> culture (1934), quotes an old American Indian<br />

tribal chief who remarked that different peoples <strong>of</strong> the world drew out <strong>of</strong> the same well, the water <strong>of</strong><br />

life, but in cups <strong>of</strong> different shapes. These ideas at least remind us that long before the advent <strong>of</strong><br />

postmodernism, people had from time to time expressed tolerance and respect for traditions other<br />

than their own. Even feudal empires did not attempt cultural hegemony, but cultivated at pluralism<br />

and local autonomy as long as the rulers received tribute. In the state <strong>of</strong> Assam in India, for example,<br />

ethnic self-rule was allowed under the political overlordship <strong>of</strong> the Ahom rulers.<br />

The rise <strong>of</strong> the modern nation-state, however, witnessed an earnest and systematic endeavour to<br />

standardise laws, cultural practices and language. As a result, many smaller and weaker groups<br />

suffered physical and mental humiliation at the hands <strong>of</strong> the hegemonising dominant group. It is on<br />

account <strong>of</strong> this ideal that Bosnian Muslims were nearly exterminated. National oppression has<br />

reached a new level <strong>of</strong> brutality in unstable nation-states that have emerged out <strong>of</strong> arbitrary<br />

arrangements <strong>of</strong> colonial empires. The practice <strong>of</strong> ``ethnic cleansing'' is rooted in the main in the<br />

policies and actions <strong>of</strong> former colonisers. The European eradication <strong>of</strong> so-called ``savages'' in<br />

America is an illustration <strong>of</strong> ethnic cleansing.<br />

This proclivity for ethnic cleansing and associated cycle <strong>of</strong> unending violence continues to dominate<br />

the global scene. Jews, who for ages have endured the agony <strong>of</strong> oppression, now seem intent on<br />

visiting the same horrors on Palestinian Arabs in Israel. In Assam, armed groups <strong>of</strong> ethnic militants<br />

rebelling against the oppression <strong>of</strong> the dominant community, now take it out on equally helpless<br />

families <strong>of</strong> the dominant community in the area <strong>of</strong> their influence. Border wars on a small scale have<br />

become endemic among states <strong>of</strong> the same union in North-East India. Scores <strong>of</strong> Bodos were gunned<br />

down by the police in Assam, and according to a report in the Assam Assembly on 30 March 2003,<br />

the Bodo militants, in turn, killed 923 non-Bodos in the period 1988 to 2003.<br />

Violent domination was set in motion by the colonial empires <strong>of</strong> the 19th century. During the recent<br />

process <strong>of</strong> decolonisation, former colonial powers effected a transfer <strong>of</strong> power to small leading<br />

sections <strong>of</strong> the aggrieved colonised societies on terms advantageous to themselves, disregarding the<br />

78


plight <strong>of</strong> other smaller and even weaker groups settled in the same territory. The new rulers seem to<br />

follow in the footsteps <strong>of</strong> the former masters because they are unwilling to make a radical break with<br />

the historical structures <strong>of</strong> economy and government. This ultimately gives rise to intra-group tension<br />

and disaffection, as well as plots by entrenched groups to divert them into inter-communal violence.<br />

There is strong evidence to suggest that British rulers periodically fomented communal riots in India<br />

by exploiting pre-existing differences to safeguard their domination <strong>of</strong> the country until this culminated<br />

in the pre-partition blood bath.<br />

Many contemporary conflicts and disputes seem to have their genesis in colonial history. It is<br />

customary today to blame Robert Mugabe, President <strong>of</strong> Zimbabwe, for encouraging his followers to<br />

use violent methods to seize farmland from law-abiding British residents. However, those who point<br />

fingers have conveniently forgotten that the most fertile and productive parts <strong>of</strong> the country had been<br />

seized in colonial times through violence and chicanery by the ancestors <strong>of</strong> those settlers, leaving<br />

native Zimbabweans the poorest barren soil.<br />

Therefore the role <strong>of</strong> power in shaping human institutions must be carefully considered in our<br />

deliberations about truth and reconciliation. The author does not, however, subscribe to the anarchist<br />

view that the structure <strong>of</strong> all human relations ranging from parent-child and teacher-pupil to that<br />

between friends and lovers is determined by power relations, because such relations also promote<br />

human growth and well-being to mutual benefit. We must consider why the treatise <strong>of</strong> Kautalya in<br />

ancient India or Machiavelli's treatise in Renaissance Europe, focused on how the consolidation <strong>of</strong><br />

the state led to increasingly vicious and cruel manipulation <strong>of</strong> human beings and public opinion.<br />

The separation <strong>of</strong> the state from society and <strong>of</strong> the pr<strong>of</strong>essions from people at large seems to have<br />

served the imbalances <strong>of</strong> power. While the state still pr<strong>of</strong>essed to serve social goals, it was actually<br />

serving the narrower interests <strong>of</strong> social elites and the ruling classes. Hence, the power <strong>of</strong> the state to<br />

control and hold down the masses, by fair or foul means, gradually becomes the defining<br />

characteristic <strong>of</strong> the state. Yet, it is precisely because <strong>of</strong> this development and consolidation <strong>of</strong> class<br />

power that the danger <strong>of</strong> internal violence increased manifold.<br />

While politics was being reduced to the management, if not worship, <strong>of</strong> the state, there was a rival<br />

tradition marked by social and ethical concern, such as that to be found in the quest for the elusive<br />

Dharma 2 in the Mahabharata, and the Christian Humanism <strong>of</strong> Sir Thomas More. In the Mahabharata,<br />

Yudhisthira questions the dictates <strong>of</strong> the duties <strong>of</strong> Kshatriyas, the warrior-caste, in an unceasing<br />

endeavour to arrive at a universal human ideal. Sir Thomas More sardonically mentions the<br />

encroachment <strong>of</strong> enterprising landlords on the sheep farms <strong>of</strong> the small farmer, reducing him to<br />

beggary. His rationality, unlike capitalist rationality in the 19th century, does not endorse such<br />

practices (see Hooper, 1962; Horkheimer, 1947).<br />

Perhaps we are on the edge <strong>of</strong> a new realisation arising from which the pain and suffering caused by<br />

the age <strong>of</strong> contesting nation-states and aggressive imperialism. Consider the new custom <strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong>fering<br />

apologies and restitution to the descendants <strong>of</strong> victimised groups for the crimes and injustices <strong>of</strong> the<br />

forefathers <strong>of</strong> a group or nation. From the perspective <strong>of</strong> legal rationality, this might appear irrelevant<br />

and meaningless. But if the present generations are beneficiaries <strong>of</strong> privileges established by force,<br />

then this is an acknowledgement <strong>of</strong> material responsibility. Likewise, the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth and<br />

79


Reconciliation Commission (TRC) appears to be an attempt to return to the politics <strong>of</strong> this obscured<br />

ethico-social message.<br />

The fact that all over the world today there is such a massive, spontaneous outcry against the<br />

outrage <strong>of</strong> the war on Iraq, shows that events <strong>of</strong> our time are stretching the narrow bounds <strong>of</strong> the<br />

nation-state towards wider horizons. There is a dawning consciousness that truth is not a power<br />

regime, but a form <strong>of</strong> self-transcendence that <strong>of</strong>fers a fair hearing to all points <strong>of</strong> view. Since truth is<br />

admittedly different from ideology, and there is no immediate, uncontested intuition <strong>of</strong> truth in the<br />

world, an authoritative articulation <strong>of</strong> truth can only come about through patient negotiation <strong>of</strong><br />

difference and conflict <strong>of</strong> interest. This inevitably includes a phase <strong>of</strong> struggle.<br />

Why was it considered necessary to establish a TRC in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>? Why did <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> not<br />

follow the usual practice <strong>of</strong> extending general amnesty to all those guilty <strong>of</strong> brutal violation <strong>of</strong> human<br />

rights and hope that the memory <strong>of</strong> such brutalities would be erased in the near future? The<br />

Commission appears to have been an attempt to reject the secretive and top-down method <strong>of</strong><br />

reaching consensus. The public was taken into confidence so that they set their seal <strong>of</strong> approval on<br />

what was in fact a serious compromise without any reservation. The state was to be reborn as an<br />

instrument <strong>of</strong> society.<br />

Even though force and violence as a means <strong>of</strong> settling disputes have not been eliminated, in most<br />

cases, however bitter and bloody the conflict, there is always hope that one day it will be settled in a<br />

manner acceptable to both parties. The hope <strong>of</strong> reconciliation must be kept alive, and the spirit <strong>of</strong><br />

accommodation must moderate the passion for one's just rights.<br />

Sometimes conflict refers to a past dispute, a dispute that rankles in the present, such as the conflict<br />

between China and Japan on the crimes committed by the invading Japanese army against the<br />

Chinese people in the 1930s and 1940s. Similar disputes exist on the atrocities committed mutually<br />

by rioting Hindus and Muslims during the partition <strong>of</strong> India.<br />

Memories <strong>of</strong> such events are not erased even when we move into a new phase <strong>of</strong> history and attend<br />

to a new agenda. It is always possible for a mischievous party or force to dredge up from a<br />

bottomless reservoir, memories <strong>of</strong> violence, brutality, pain and horror, and the unquenched thirst for<br />

revenge. These tend to fuel the flame <strong>of</strong> ever-recurring hatred and violence.<br />

It is therefore <strong>of</strong> utmost importance to overcome our natural shame and revulsion, and confront the<br />

horror perpetrated by us or by our brethren. To confess to such horrible crimes is to acknowledge the<br />

humanity <strong>of</strong> our victims, rescue them from the anonymity <strong>of</strong> abstract hatred, and realise our own<br />

grievous lapse from humanity. It is to ask forgiveness and seek help from our fellow-beings in our<br />

attempt to recover our lost or impaired humanity. To be able to forgive is also to overcome a blockage<br />

in the heart, and begin the healing <strong>of</strong> a mind divided against itself. It has come to the author's<br />

attention that a number <strong>of</strong> Assamese youths who had participated in a chauvinist frenzy in a<br />

massacre <strong>of</strong> immigrant Muslim children at Nellie 3 in 1983, had been driven insane by the memory <strong>of</strong><br />

the horrors they themselves had perpetrated.<br />

Some might dismiss such stories as sentimental and question whether we can conceive <strong>of</strong><br />

forgiveness for fascist criminals or demented perpetrators inspired by suspect ideologies. There is no<br />

80


question that those guilty <strong>of</strong> mass-murders, <strong>of</strong> diabolical plans to inspire and organise such<br />

massacres, or unleash systematic torture and persecution on selected targets for their views and<br />

thoughts, must be named and brought to book. But will mere punishment suffice if they are regarded<br />

as martyrs by later followers? However romantic it may sound, it would be far better if they are<br />

persuaded to realise the horror <strong>of</strong> what they had done and to express remorse.<br />

After all, the uninvolved German citizen was also guilty. One only has to recall Pastor Niemoller's<br />

admonition: ``When the Gestapo came and took away the Jews from my neighborhood, I did not<br />

bother because it did not concern me. When the Gestapo took the Communists away, again I<br />

remained unconcerned. When they came for the dissident democrat, yet again I remained silent. And<br />

when the Gestapo came to drag me to prison, there was no one around to raise his voice for me''<br />

(uncited source).<br />

We cannot therefore escape guilt and responsibility by pointing to others, or by taking shelter behind<br />

the separation <strong>of</strong> the state from society. We too need forgiveness, as do the perpetrators <strong>of</strong> explicit<br />

crimes. Through the admission <strong>of</strong> our own fallible humanity we earn the right to forgive. To forgive is<br />

therefore not to claim high moral ground, but to recognise the common ground between the so-called<br />

``sinners'' and ourselves.<br />

Truth in this sense is closer to the psychoanalytic idea <strong>of</strong> reality and the prescription to accept such<br />

reality. It means overcoming irresponsible fantasy or regressive blocks. Yet, one is reconciled to<br />

others through reconciliation with the temptations and failings <strong>of</strong> the self. However, here there<br />

appears to be evidence <strong>of</strong> an extension <strong>of</strong> the classical psychoanalytical image <strong>of</strong> the self in sole<br />

confrontation with the world. The world and truth are to be regarded as collaborative constructions <strong>of</strong><br />

many different selves.<br />

The eruptions <strong>of</strong> various terrorist movements 4 all over the world, and their eventual recognition<br />

through deals struck at different stages with states opposed to them, have led to recurring cycles <strong>of</strong><br />

amnesia. Once a political settlement is reached, atrocities committed by both the state and terrorist<br />

movements are all quickly forgotten. However, the costs <strong>of</strong> such an amnesia appear too high in times<br />

<strong>of</strong> inconsolable human suffering and irreparable loss. A point has been reached when some writers,<br />

traditionally the conscience-keepers <strong>of</strong> society, have turned away from highlighting the futility <strong>of</strong><br />

wanton violence. However, the newly devised exercise <strong>of</strong> reaching truth through reconciliation,<br />

properly undertaken and undergone, will be a rite <strong>of</strong> passage for transition to nobler and more mature<br />

human societies.<br />

NOTES<br />

1. Colonialism in disguised forms is still alive and well in many parts <strong>of</strong> the world and bedevils<br />

international politics. <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> may indeed be regarded as a special case <strong>of</strong> colonialism,<br />

where people from metropolitan countries settled in the land <strong>of</strong>, and among the people they<br />

exploited, and deliberately erected barriers against their assimilation into their country <strong>of</strong> adoption.<br />

According to the 1996 Census, the poorest 40% <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> receive 3% <strong>of</strong> the national<br />

income, while the richest 10% enjoy over 50% <strong>of</strong> that income. The weakness <strong>of</strong> the economy<br />

81


inherited from the past compelled the <strong>Africa</strong>n National Congress (ANC) government to adopt the<br />

GEAR (Growth, Employment and Redistribution) policy, which in fact subscribes to the Structural<br />

Adjustment Programme (SAP) <strong>of</strong> the International Monetary fund (IMF).<br />

2. In traditional Hindu discourse such as in the Bhagavad Gita, ``Dharma'' concretely refers to<br />

prescribed rules <strong>of</strong> behaviour and moral ideals appropriate to each <strong>of</strong> the four major Hindu<br />

castes. In the Mahabharata as a whole, however, the Buddhist notion <strong>of</strong> ``Dhamma'', as a<br />

universal policy <strong>of</strong> righteousness, seems to leave strong traces in Yudhisthira's quest, his search<br />

for an ultimate principle <strong>of</strong> social justice and moral rectitude, which transcends caste-specific ideal<br />

behaviour.<br />

3. The Nellie massacre <strong>of</strong> immigrant Muslims by frenzied Assamese mobs, in which hundreds<br />

perished, took place in 1983, following a decision to impose an election on Assam against the<br />

wishes <strong>of</strong> the leaders <strong>of</strong> the Anti-foreigner Movement that was rampant at that time.<br />

4. By the term ``terrorist movement'' the author means a movement that uses indiscriminate terror<br />

and violence inflicted on noncombatant civilian populations or their members as a means <strong>of</strong><br />

propaganda or political pressure. The author deems it necessary to distinguish such tactics from<br />

guerilla warfare which has broad mass-support. Needless to say, this does not imply that vicious<br />

state-terror does not exist.<br />

REFERENCES<br />

Benedict, R. (1934). Patterns <strong>of</strong> culture. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.<br />

Hooper, R. (1962). Right reason in the English Renaissance. Cambridge: Harvard <strong>University</strong> Press.<br />

Horkheimer, M. (1947). The eclipse <strong>of</strong> reason. New York: Continuum International.<br />

Lessing, F.D. & Wayman, A. (Translators) (1993). Introduction to the Buddhist Tantric Systems. Delhi,<br />

India: Motilal Banarsidass.<br />

82


CASTE AND CLASS VIOLENCE IN<br />

CENTRAL BIHAR: RESTRUCTURING<br />

SOCIAL ORDER TOWARDS<br />

RECONCILIATION<br />

Prakash Louis 1<br />

Indian Social Institute<br />

While one death is as tragic and as meaningless as another; over a thousand persons were killed<br />

by the Naxalites in different incidents in Andhra Pradesh during the current decade, and almost as<br />

many have been killed by the state in police encounters during the same period. It goes without<br />

saying that the majority <strong>of</strong> those who lost their lives were poor from the Backward Castes,<br />

Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes. As reports <strong>of</strong> violent deaths occur with nauseating<br />

frequency, people seem to have become increasingly insensitive and the society is getting<br />

progressively brutalised (Committee <strong>of</strong> Concerned Citizens, 1998, n.p.) 1 .<br />

This perception <strong>of</strong> the Committee <strong>of</strong> Concerned Citizens <strong>of</strong> Andhra Pradesh poignantly exposes the<br />

violence being unleashed on the common masses in certain parts <strong>of</strong> India. It underscores the urgent<br />

need to restructure the social order, which will hopefully spur on a reconciliatory process.<br />

In the last four decades, caste and class violence has been endemic in Indian society in general, and<br />

in Central Bihar 2 in particular. The highly rigid, skewed, hierarchical and oppressive caste system<br />

reinforces the idea <strong>of</strong> high and low, privileged and underprivileged social groups at the centre and the<br />

periphery. Feudalism, with its extra-economic coercion and economic monopoly by a few, is<br />

responsible for a divided Indian society. Social inequality and exclusion, which are endemic in the<br />

caste system, are sustained by the denial <strong>of</strong> access to resources by the class system. This castecum-class-based<br />

structure leads to discrimination, deprivation and dispossession. It is this social<br />

reality that has contributed to the emergence <strong>of</strong> an armed struggle and a cycle <strong>of</strong> violence in rural<br />

agrarian Central Bihar. The aim <strong>of</strong> the Naxalite Movement, the radical agrarian movement, which has<br />

functioned unabated in central Bihar for the last four decades, is to seize state power through a<br />

protracted armed struggle and to establish a classless society. Adopting a Marxist-Leninist-Maoist<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Prakash Louis, Indian Social Institute, 10, Institutional Area, Lodi Road, New Delhi, 110003, India; E-mail:<br />

prakash@unv.ernet.in or prakash@hotmail.com.<br />

83


perspective, the Naxalites view the exploited proletarian class as the revolutionised vanguard to be<br />

mobilised to bring about revolutionary change. Since the revolutionary Naxalite-oriented peasant<br />

organisations have started working for the liberation <strong>of</strong> the under-classes, which are almost always<br />

represented by the lower castes or the exploited castes, there has been increased awareness <strong>of</strong> the<br />

structural oppression and a concomitant determination to secure equity and human rights for the<br />

dispossessed in Central Bihar. However, the dominant castes which, in most cases, are also the<br />

feudal landlords have resisted every move by the `subalterns' to introduce change in the oppressive<br />

and unequal social order. Hence the dominant caste landlords have at regular intervals formed<br />

senas, or private caste militia, to unleash terror and perpetrate massacres (Louis, 2002).<br />

Instead <strong>of</strong> fulfilling its role as the arbitrator between the various segments <strong>of</strong> the population, the state<br />

has become the tool in the hands <strong>of</strong> the powerful against the powerless. Adding to the complexity <strong>of</strong><br />

the situation, various splinter groups in the militant peasant groups are also constantly engaged in<br />

internecine violence and feuding. The common masses in central Bihar are thus at the receiving end<br />

in this cycle <strong>of</strong> violence.<br />

The state, the landed gentry and the agents <strong>of</strong> the people's movement have all unleashed violence<br />

on the common masses. While there is ongoing debate about who is initiating the violence or the<br />

factors that are contributing to it, the common masses Ð the victims Ð continue to suffer. The violent<br />

crisis in Central Bihar has led to many people being orphaned, widowed, physically maimed or<br />

incapacitated. The cycle <strong>of</strong> violence has also led to loss <strong>of</strong> property and gainful employment and<br />

stagnation in agricultural growth.<br />

Despite the massive loss <strong>of</strong> life, property and well-being, the embattled parties continue to engage in<br />

accusations and counter-accusations. The landed gentry accuse the oppressed and marginalised<br />

communities <strong>of</strong> having become ugravadi or terrorists, or antisocial elements, expressed in terms<br />

such as naxalvadi, nas katne wala, che inch chota karney wala, all referring to ``one who engages in<br />

annihilation''. The militant peasant organisations on the other hand, blame the dominant landed lords<br />

<strong>of</strong> being atyachari or julmi, that is, oppressors and exploiters. The landed gentry incite violence<br />

through the formation <strong>of</strong> militias such as the Bhumi sena, Lorik Sena (established in the early 1980s)<br />

and the Ranvir Sena (started in the late 1990s). The revolutionary peasant movements have<br />

established their armed wings, which are known as lal senas. All these armed groups spawn terror<br />

and violence, thus minimising any chance <strong>of</strong> peace.<br />

The state, instead <strong>of</strong> addressing the root causes <strong>of</strong> the conflict, fulfils a partisan role, referring to the<br />

cadres, leaders and sympathisers as ``trigger-happy youth'' or ``people bent on disrupting law and<br />

order''. Furthermore, from time to time, the civil and police administration engage in aggressive<br />

operations, blockades, indiscriminate arrests and fake encounters.<br />

Internecine violent conflict in the ranks <strong>of</strong> the revolutionary peasant movements is also characterised<br />

by accusations and counter-accusations. Different groups call one another ``traitors'' or ``revisionists'',<br />

thus not only harming the progress <strong>of</strong> the people's movement, but also creating confusion in the<br />

minds <strong>of</strong> the masses. At times, the feud between these revolutionary groups results in the killing <strong>of</strong><br />

civilians, adding to the trauma and suffering <strong>of</strong> the general population. Therefore, how to impose a<br />

84


moratorium on violent attacks within the ranks <strong>of</strong> the revolutionary peasant movements is a crucial<br />

and central question with which peace and human rights activists have to grapple.<br />

RESTORING HUMAN RIGHTS IN CENTRAL BIHAR<br />

Hence any process <strong>of</strong> assuring reconciliation and human rights in Central Bihar needs to address all<br />

the inter-related features <strong>of</strong> the conflict. In the Central Bihar context, peacebuilding exercises<br />

embracing a human rights perspective need to be comprehensively formulated to focus on the<br />

victims' experiences and rights, the responsibilities and obligations <strong>of</strong> the perpetrators <strong>of</strong> violence, the<br />

role <strong>of</strong> the state administration, and the concerns and rights <strong>of</strong> the unarmed common masses.<br />

Despite the fact that each <strong>of</strong> these social actors has a different perception <strong>of</strong> peace and<br />

reconciliation, it is imperative to provide a common platform and establish sufficient consensus to<br />

ensure human rights in this region <strong>of</strong> Central Bihar.<br />

Peacebuilding is contingent on addressing the following issues: (a) discrimination, segregation and<br />

exclusion, which are the salient features <strong>of</strong> the caste system; (b) the lack <strong>of</strong> access to resources,<br />

non-payment <strong>of</strong> minimum wages, and begari or forced labour, which characterise a feudal economic<br />

order; (c) the sexual exploitation <strong>of</strong> women, which is the legacy <strong>of</strong> patriarchy; and (d) the political<br />

exclusion <strong>of</strong> the marginalised, and the partisan and repressive role <strong>of</strong> the state and local<br />

administration, which are the hallmarks <strong>of</strong> bourgeoisie democracy.<br />

It is thus vital to forge a new vision for democracy and development in the brutalised and victimised<br />

region <strong>of</strong> Central Bihar. Although there have been instances <strong>of</strong> developmental and welfare activities<br />

undertaken by the Naxalite Movement, allegations that some Naxalite groups are appropriating funds<br />

allotted for developmental activities need to be addressed.<br />

Equal distribution <strong>of</strong> resources, another key ingredient <strong>of</strong> peacebuilding, is one <strong>of</strong> the major demands<br />

<strong>of</strong> the Naxalite Movement. As in other parts <strong>of</strong> the country, the lower castes, the landless agricultural<br />

labourers and producing class in Central Bihar do not own the means <strong>of</strong> production. The dominant<br />

castes, which own the resources, deny access to common property resources, gair mazrua zamin or<br />

government land, pasture land and river beds. The little land that some <strong>of</strong> the poor people own is<br />

<strong>of</strong>ten surreptitiously appropriated by the landed gentry. Moreover, vast tracks <strong>of</strong> land remain<br />

unutilised as a result <strong>of</strong> court cases or an ``economic blockade'' imposed by radical peasant<br />

organisations. Hence, once these lands have been liberated and distributed to the landless masses<br />

through the enforcement <strong>of</strong> constitutional provision-enabling land reform, a significant part <strong>of</strong> the<br />

foundation for peace and reconciliation will be established.<br />

It is fitting to conclude this brief article with a quotation from Justice M.N. Rao <strong>of</strong> the Andhra Pradesh<br />

High Court. In his judgment on 1 July 1997 in discharging two prominent Naxalites charged under the<br />

Terrorist and Disruptive Activities Prevention Act (TADA), he stated:<br />

Despite its magnitude and menacing dimension, the problem, we think, does not admit <strong>of</strong> any<br />

solutions. A Peace Commission with representative character inspiring confidence in all sections<br />

<strong>of</strong> the society including the Naxalites and the police and backed by state power and consent, we<br />

believe, can bring about immediate cessation <strong>of</strong> police encounters and violence by Naxalites and<br />

85


then only in the resultant peaceful atmosphere, a meaningful search for permanent solution is<br />

possible (Committee <strong>of</strong> Concerned Citizens 1998, p.7).<br />

NOTES<br />

1. The efforts <strong>of</strong> the Committee <strong>of</strong> Concerned Citizens (CCC) were directed at locating people's<br />

aspirations and the right to live with dignity on the agenda <strong>of</strong> the Naxalite movements and the<br />

government.<br />

2. Until the bifurcation <strong>of</strong> Jharkhand in 2000 as a separate state, Bihar was divided into the North<br />

Ganga plain, the <strong>South</strong> Bihar Plateau and the region between the two, known as the <strong>South</strong><br />

Ganga plain or Central Bihar.<br />

REFERENCES<br />

Committee <strong>of</strong> Concerned Citizens. (1998). In search <strong>of</strong> democratic space. Hyderabad: Author.<br />

Louis, P. (2002). People power: The Naxalite Movement in Central Bihar. New Delhi: Wordsmith.<br />

86


SATYAGRAHA IN<br />

CREATIVE SOCIETY<br />

Manoranjan Mohanty 1<br />

Developing Countries Research Centre, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Delhi<br />

MOMENT OR SHATTERED DREAMS<br />

The one hundred year history <strong>of</strong> Satyagraha (pursuit <strong>of</strong> truth force) for Swaraj (self-rule or self<br />

determination or self-realisation), which began with Gandhi in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> and had guided the<br />

dominant course <strong>of</strong> the Indian freedom struggle, and later had its echoes in Martin Luther King's<br />

campaign against racism in the U.S. and the struggle against apartheid in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, had unfolded<br />

a dream for people's self-determination that stands shattered today as the U.S.-led aggression on<br />

Iraq makes advances with imperialist fury. Yet, the Satyagraha persists as millions <strong>of</strong> people all over<br />

the world demonstrate in protest against this war, which violates all the gains <strong>of</strong> the 20th century, and<br />

especially the Iraqi people's right to Swaraj. After all, it was Tilak's 1 proclamation in the 1890s that<br />

had electrified India's freedom straggle: ``Swaraj is my birth right and I shall have it'' (uncited source).<br />

Hence, the struggle for Swaraj has entered a new phase. Satyagraha, too, has to be comprehended<br />

in the context <strong>of</strong> the experiences <strong>of</strong> the last century.<br />

THEORY OF SATYAGRAHA<br />

Satyagraha is not merely a statement <strong>of</strong> means focusing on the pursuit <strong>of</strong> the path <strong>of</strong> Ahimsa or nonviolence.<br />

There is a theory or a general philosophical principle underlying it. It focuses on satya, or<br />

truth, and agraha, or commitment. In other words, commitment to, or firmly following truth force is at<br />

the centre <strong>of</strong> this perspective. In this understanding, truth has become a truth force or a major force,<br />

which is in fact the main resource or weapon in the course <strong>of</strong> struggle. Here, truth as a value has<br />

also been taken as truth as a force. How does it happen? The abstract value <strong>of</strong> truth becomes a<br />

force when we subject a phenomenon to reason.<br />

Without entering into assessing definitions and propositions on Truth, we can take a working view<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Manoranjan Mohanty, Developing Countries Research Centre, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Delhi, Delhi, 110007, India.<br />

87


that truth is comprehension <strong>of</strong> reality by application <strong>of</strong> reason. Every such comprehension takes into<br />

account the civilisation's accumulated knowledge to tackle the three questions <strong>of</strong> What, Why and<br />

How. It seeks to explain the nature <strong>of</strong> the particular thing in its historical and contemporary context,<br />

why it is so, especially in comparison with others, and how it can be transformed to meet the<br />

requirements <strong>of</strong> other values. It is this act <strong>of</strong> knowing that becomes an act <strong>of</strong> doing.<br />

The basic theory <strong>of</strong> Satyagraha is that reason applied to the truth <strong>of</strong> a situation drives the process<br />

towards freedom. If R is reason, T stands for Truth and F represents freedom, we can suggest the<br />

following proposition: R x T= F.<br />

Take for example slavery, which objectifies human beings as physical bodies to be bought and sold,<br />

or commandeered for labour. At some point in the human history <strong>of</strong> a society, this reality was<br />

comprehended as truth <strong>of</strong> denial <strong>of</strong> the value <strong>of</strong> a human being and human dignity, which had<br />

evolved over centuries. As distinct from the slaves, there were free men and some women. The<br />

system <strong>of</strong> slavery was sustained by a certain kind <strong>of</strong> economy, politics and culture. With new values<br />

<strong>of</strong> freedom and rational re-organisation <strong>of</strong> production, there was a move to abolish slavery. The truth<br />

<strong>of</strong> a situation was comprehended not just by abstract reason, but also by historical struggle that<br />

constantly tested the reasoning challenging slavery. The outcome was freedom not only for the<br />

slaves, but also for the social order as a whole, the latter gradually absorbing the general principle,<br />

which became relevant to other spheres in the future.<br />

PROPOSITION ON TRUTH, PEACE AND VIOLENCE<br />

The Satyagraha perspective seeks to discover the truth <strong>of</strong> a conflict situation, thus underlining<br />

questions about `the truth'. It is obvious that the oppressor and the oppressed have different notions<br />

<strong>of</strong> truth. The slave-owning class had thought that they were the men <strong>of</strong> reason and had the right to<br />

rule. The Brahmins <strong>of</strong> the Indian caste order considered themselves repositories <strong>of</strong> wisdom.<br />

European colonialism claimed that it had a civilising mission in Asia, <strong>Africa</strong> and Latin America. The<br />

white racist regime in yesterday's <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> thought it to be unreasonable to <strong>of</strong>fer universal<br />

franchise to all the `races'. Forces <strong>of</strong> capitalist globalisation argue that this process would be in the<br />

interest <strong>of</strong> all in the `Third World'. Finally, the Bush-Blair rhetoric hawks the slogan <strong>of</strong> `liberation' <strong>of</strong> the<br />

Iraqi people. On the other hand, the struggling forces have different voices <strong>of</strong> reason and present<br />

truth <strong>of</strong> the conflict situation in markedly different terms. Although notions <strong>of</strong> truth are not just twopronged,<br />

but are multiple, the overall struggle involves contradictions between two broad sets <strong>of</strong><br />

forces, which are connected with other contradictions in many complex ways. Hence, articulation <strong>of</strong><br />

truth is always contested from a variety <strong>of</strong> vantage points. In the course <strong>of</strong> struggle the historical<br />

process tilts in favour <strong>of</strong> one vantage point. It is by no means resolved forever, and the contestation<br />

continues. The dialectical notion <strong>of</strong> truth is neither absolutist Ð always subject to testing in practice<br />

Ð nor is it relativist Ð so relative to ideology, culture, communication or interest that is so uncertain<br />

that it cannot be the basis <strong>of</strong> political action.<br />

Therefore, we can only have propositions on the relationship between truth and peace. The<br />

proposition is: If truth <strong>of</strong> a conflict situation is comprehended by the parties to the conflict, prospects<br />

88


<strong>of</strong> peaceful resolution <strong>of</strong> the conflict are greater. Conversely: If truth <strong>of</strong> a conflict situation is contested<br />

by the parties to the conflict, prospects <strong>of</strong> violence persist.<br />

The key variable in these propositions is political practice by the struggling forces. To what extent the<br />

civilisation's values are strongly pursued and what effects it has on the dominant forces determines<br />

the degree to which there is common ground in grasping the truth. This is where the success <strong>of</strong><br />

Satyagraha depends on the effectiveness <strong>of</strong> the force <strong>of</strong> the people's movement.<br />

Satyagraha as truth force has been based on another perspective <strong>of</strong> Gandhi's values, namely<br />

Ahimsa. But this is where the debate will continue. What if the gap in the understanding <strong>of</strong> truth<br />

persists? History provides numerous examples <strong>of</strong> use <strong>of</strong> brute force, which has been contained only<br />

when people's movements, with both armed struggle and non-violent struggle, have turned the tide.<br />

However, one proposition <strong>of</strong> Satyagraha has to be seriously considered, namely: resorting to<br />

violence creates its own unreason and untruth generating spirals <strong>of</strong> untruths as it ``violates<br />

humanness''.<br />

Therefore, even while comprehending the history <strong>of</strong> struggle for liberation, it has to be asserted that<br />

violence cannot be a creed <strong>of</strong> freedom as it violates humanness while truth enhances humanness.<br />

Structures, policies and practices <strong>of</strong> violence, by definition, embody unreason and therefore<br />

humankind always attempts to seek the path <strong>of</strong> peaceful resolution <strong>of</strong> conflicts. In that sense,<br />

Satyagraha and peace are interconnected.<br />

An important implication <strong>of</strong> this understanding <strong>of</strong> Satyagraha is that it aims at making the adversary<br />

see reason and grasp truth embedded in the conflict. Once this is accomplished, the structure <strong>of</strong> that<br />

relationship <strong>of</strong> oppression is transformed and the parties are likely to shift towards a process <strong>of</strong><br />

reconciliation. The process <strong>of</strong> transformation is a complex one, involving discovery <strong>of</strong> truth,<br />

establishing guilt, punishing the guilty, forgiving those who grasp the truth, and positively creating<br />

bonds <strong>of</strong> love and solidarity in the new situation. Reconciliation is thus not about disregarding crime,<br />

but treating crime as a deviation.<br />

Reconciliation among contending parties is facilitated by a common grasping <strong>of</strong> truth through new<br />

structures, policies and a culture <strong>of</strong> transformation. Humankind is struggling for liberation from<br />

bondages based on colonialism, class, `race', ethnic, caste, gender and other forms <strong>of</strong> domination,<br />

and for positive fulfillment <strong>of</strong> multiple urgings <strong>of</strong> the creative self. Against this backdrop, Satyagraha<br />

for Swaraj is emerging as the most powerful current in the 21st century.<br />

NOTES<br />

1. Tilak, Bal Gangadhar (1856-1920) was the leader <strong>of</strong> the extreme wing <strong>of</strong> the Indian National<br />

Congress and the foremost nationalist before Mohandas Gandi. Tilak, a journalist, initiated the<br />

Ganapati festival and the Shivaji festival to inspire patriotism. He was imprisoned by the British for<br />

sedition because <strong>of</strong> his critical writings. Tilak organised an extreme wing <strong>of</strong> the Congress Party<br />

that demanded complete independence for India. His advocacy <strong>of</strong> independence was adopted by<br />

the Congress only after his death.<br />

89


Short communications<br />

INTERNATIONAL COLLABORATIVE<br />

EFFORT ON INJURY STATISTICS<br />

MEETING, 1-2 JUNE 2005,<br />

CUERNAVACA, MEXICO<br />

Richard Matzopoulos 1<br />

MRC-UNISA Crime, Violence & Injury Lead Programme<br />

Medical Research Council<br />

The International Collaborative Effort (ICE) on Injury Statistics Meeting, which was held in<br />

Cuernavaca, Mexico from 1 to 2 June 2005, was hosted by the US Department <strong>of</strong> Health and Human<br />

Services Centres for Disease Control and Prevention National Centre for Health Statistics. The<br />

meeting brought together delegates from 17 countries and several multilateral organisations. The<br />

meeting focused on the primary goals <strong>of</strong> the ICE on Injury Statistics, which include the facilitation <strong>of</strong><br />

(1) exchange and collaboration among injury researchers who develop and promote international<br />

standards in injury data collection and analysis; and (2) the comparability and improved quality <strong>of</strong><br />

injury data.<br />

The availability <strong>of</strong> accurate surveillance data fulfils one <strong>of</strong> the first steps in the public health approach<br />

to violence and injury prevention. However, as in many other low-income settings, injury surveillance<br />

is still in its infancy in <strong>Africa</strong> Ð hence the current lack <strong>of</strong> accurate and reliable data on which policies<br />

and interventions can be based. Collaborative meetings such as those presented by the ICE afford<br />

individuals an opportunity to inform the establishment <strong>of</strong> surveillance systems, which in turn can<br />

provide a more complete pr<strong>of</strong>ile <strong>of</strong> continental injury patterns.<br />

However, surveillance experts in low- and middle-income countries are <strong>of</strong>ten exposed to a level <strong>of</strong><br />

discourse which, although important for the injury prevention sector in general and pertinent to some<br />

<strong>of</strong> the cutting-edge research being conducted in high-income countries, does not appear to have<br />

much relevance in their own contexts. Hence, one <strong>of</strong> the most positive aspects <strong>of</strong> the Mexico ICE<br />

meeting was its attention to inclusiveness, with delegates attending from each <strong>of</strong> the WHO regions.<br />

Although there were several participants from high-income countries, such as the USA, Canada,<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Richard Matzopoulos, MRC-UNISA Crime, Violence & Injury Lead Programme, P.O. Box 19070, Tygerberg, 7505,<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>; Tel: + 27 21 938-0536; Fax: +27 21 938-0381; E-mail: richard.matzopoulos@mrc.ac.za<br />

90


Australia and the Netherlands, as well as international agencies such as the WHO and PAHO, lowand<br />

middle-income countries were well represented. <strong>South</strong> and Central America were represented by<br />

participants from Argentina, Brazil, Chile, Colombia, Mexico and Nicaragua; the Caribbean by<br />

participants from Barbados, Dominica, Puerto Rico and St Lucia; Asia by two participants from<br />

Thailand; and <strong>Africa</strong> by a <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n participant. WHO AFRO presented a paper in absentia that<br />

focused on various surveillance initiatives currently in progress on the continent.<br />

The meeting started with introductory presentations for first-time participants by a group <strong>of</strong> delegates<br />

who regularly contribute to the ICE meetings. Additionally, information updates were provided on<br />

topics currently being investigated by several ICE working groups focused on:<br />

1. International Classification <strong>of</strong> External Causes <strong>of</strong> Injury (ICECI)<br />

2. US National Electronic Injury Surveillance System Ð All Injury Programme<br />

3. Injury indicators<br />

4. Occupational injuries<br />

5. Hospitalisation data<br />

6. Selecting a main injury<br />

7. ICE web pages<br />

8. Overview <strong>of</strong> ICE-related surveillance activities<br />

During the remainder <strong>of</strong> the meeting, the participants presented papers on country-specific<br />

surveillance research, methodologies for data collection and comparative data. The presentations<br />

were thus wide-ranging in subject matter, and included a focus on injury information systems in<br />

Mexico; mortality data collection and public hospitalisation data in Brazil; firearm injury in Brazil; the<br />

role <strong>of</strong> PAHO and CDC in Ministry <strong>of</strong> Health hospitals; injury surveillance in Nicaragua; application <strong>of</strong><br />

surveillance systems in mortality data and domestic violence ICECI in Colombia; violence and injury<br />

surveillance in the Caribbean; injury surveillance on violence in <strong>South</strong> America and <strong>Africa</strong>; injury<br />

surveillance efforts in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> and other parts <strong>of</strong> the <strong>Africa</strong> region; injury surveillance in Thailand;<br />

morbidity and mortality in Chile; injury mortality and injury surveillance in Argentina; and paediatric<br />

trauma registry and information systems for epidemiology and surveillance.<br />

Many <strong>of</strong> the presentations listed above are to be made available online. <strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion<br />

readers interested in viewing these presentations, subscribing to the listserv or learning more about<br />

the work <strong>of</strong> the ICE on Injury Statistics are referred to the ICE website: http://www.cdc.gov/nchs/<br />

about/otheract/ice/meetings.htm<br />

Importantly, an envisaged output from the meeting is a document to be jointly compiled by the<br />

participants, which will compare the injury mortality rates in their countries for a selection <strong>of</strong> high<br />

priority injury subsets.<br />

91


INJURY PREVENTION AND SAFETY<br />

PROMOTION EVENTS HELD UNDER<br />

THE AUSPICES OF THE INJURY<br />

PREVENTION INITIATIVE FOR AFRICA,<br />

3-10 JULY 2005, PORT-SAID, EGYPT<br />

Fatma Hassan 1<br />

Faculty <strong>of</strong> Medicine, Suez Canal <strong>University</strong><br />

Wilson Odero<br />

School <strong>of</strong> Public Health, Moi <strong>University</strong><br />

Ashley Van Niekerk<br />

MRC-UNISA Crime, Violence & Injury Lead Programme<br />

Medical Research Council<br />

The Injury Prevention Initiative for <strong>Africa</strong> (IPIFA) and its partners coordinated three injury prevention<br />

and <strong>safety</strong> promotion initiatives in July 2005 in Port-Said, Egypt. These included the 4th <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

Regional Safe Communities Conference (3-5 July); the Authorship Development and Writing Skills<br />

Workshop (6 July); and the Injury Epidemiology and Prevention Course (7-10 July).<br />

THE 4TH AFRICAN REGIONAL SAFE COMMUNITIES CONFERENCE<br />

Port-Said follows Harare, Johannesburg and Mauritius, as the most recent location for the biennial<br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n Regional Safe Communities Conference. These conferences have afforded <strong>Africa</strong>n <strong>safety</strong><br />

promotion researchers, policy makers and practitioners the opportunity on a regular basis to:<br />

. exchange their most recent scientific findings and practices in all fields <strong>of</strong> injury prevention and<br />

<strong>safety</strong> promotion;<br />

. present their own outcome- or process-oriented research;<br />

. promote evidence-based practice;<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

1. Please direct all correspondence to Pr<strong>of</strong>. Fatma Hassan, Community Medicine Department, Faculty <strong>of</strong> Medicine, Suez Canal <strong>University</strong>, Ismailia, Egypt;<br />

E-mail: fatmahassan1@yahoo.com<br />

92


. increase synergy and foster partnerships between pr<strong>of</strong>essionals across the continent and different<br />

regions <strong>of</strong> the world; and<br />

. promote the formulation <strong>of</strong> appropriate and effective <strong>Africa</strong>n injury prevention projects.<br />

The following institutions collaborated to organise the 4th <strong>Africa</strong>n Regional Safe Communities<br />

Conference: the Port-Said Governorate, Suez Canal <strong>University</strong>, the Red Crescent Society, the<br />

<strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> Institute for Social and Health Sciences (ISHS), the Injury Control Centre-<br />

Uganda (ICC-U) and IPIFA. The theme <strong>of</strong> the conference was Safe Communities: Communities for<br />

Injury and Violence Prevention. The sessions focused on injury surveillance, violence prevention,<br />

safe communities, safe schools, road traffic injuries, road <strong>safety</strong> and home visitation for the<br />

prevention <strong>of</strong> childhood injuries. More than 35 papers were accepted for presentation by<br />

representatives from various <strong>Africa</strong>n countries, including Ethiopia, Egypt, Ghana, Kenya, Nigeria,<br />

Ghana, Mauritius, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, Tanzania, Uganda and Bangladesh. One hundred delegates<br />

attended the three-day conference.<br />

The conference was <strong>of</strong>ficially opened by the Port-Said Governor, His Excellency, Dr. Mostafa Kamel,<br />

and Dr. Yehia Tomom who represented Pr<strong>of</strong>. Mamdouh Gabr, the head <strong>of</strong> the Egyptian Red<br />

Crescent, Pr<strong>of</strong>. Farouk Abd Elkader, President <strong>of</strong> the Suez Canal <strong>University</strong>, Pr<strong>of</strong>. Mohamed Shoair,<br />

Dean <strong>of</strong> the Faculty <strong>of</strong> Medicine, Suez Canal <strong>University</strong>, Pr<strong>of</strong>. Mohamed Seedat <strong>of</strong> UNISA, and IPIFA<br />

President, Pr<strong>of</strong>. Fatma Hassan.<br />

During the opening ceremony, the delegates witnessed the signing <strong>of</strong> a Regional Safe Community<br />

Statement <strong>of</strong> Understanding. According to this Statement, the Governorate <strong>of</strong> Port-Said in Egypt<br />

agreed to implement an ongoing programme <strong>of</strong> injury control and community <strong>safety</strong> in Port-Said,<br />

Egypt. This safe community initiative will cover the entire community in Port Said, including people in<br />

all age groups, environments and situations. The Governorate and the Red Crescent Society agreed<br />

to document and evaluate their efforts, and to actively disseminate their experiences both nationally<br />

and across the <strong>Africa</strong>n continent with a view to seeking international designation in the near future.<br />

The Governorate and the Red Crescent Society also agreed to draw on the UNISA Affiliate Support<br />

Centre as a resource.<br />

AUTHORSHIP DEVELOPMENT AND WRITING SKILLS WORKSHOP<br />

The one-day workshop on authorship development and writing skills was conducted by a team <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n injury researchers, including the following: Pr<strong>of</strong>. Wilson Odero <strong>of</strong> Moi <strong>University</strong>, Dr. Olive<br />

Kobusingye <strong>of</strong> WHO-AFRO, Pr<strong>of</strong>. Mustafa Abolfotouh from Alexandria <strong>University</strong>, and journal editors<br />

Dr. Babatunde Solagberu from the <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Ilorin and editor <strong>of</strong> the <strong>Africa</strong>n Journal <strong>of</strong> Trauma, as<br />

well as Mr. Garth Stevens <strong>of</strong> the UNISA ISHS and Mr. Ashley Van Niekerk from the MRC-UNISA<br />

Crime, Violence and Injury Lead Programme, both <strong>of</strong> whom are on the editorial committee <strong>of</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

Safety Promotion: A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention (ASP). The workshop was <strong>of</strong>fered in<br />

recognition <strong>of</strong> the significance <strong>of</strong> publishing to the functioning <strong>of</strong> the <strong>safety</strong> promotion sector on the<br />

continent. It is largely through publications that <strong>safety</strong> promotion pr<strong>of</strong>essionals disseminate their<br />

ideas, opinions and research findings to other researchers, practitioners, policy makers, and<br />

ultimately even to the general public.<br />

93


The aim <strong>of</strong> the workshop was to improve the capacity for writing research articles for publication in<br />

scientific journals, with particular emphasis on improving the quality <strong>of</strong> papers presented at the 4th<br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n Regional Safe Communities Conference and ensuring subsequent submission to the ASP.<br />

The workshop focused on the motivations for publishing, the generation <strong>of</strong> research ideas, the<br />

process <strong>of</strong> literature search and reviews, the structure and formats <strong>of</strong> scientific papers, the writing<br />

and rewriting process, the peer review process, journal selection and submission <strong>of</strong> manuscripts,<br />

authorship ethics, and technical requirements for articles submitted specifically to the ASP. The<br />

workshop concluded with some <strong>of</strong> the more experienced researchers agreeing to mentor the<br />

participating authors in their submission <strong>of</strong> articles to the ASP. The workshop generated a great deal<br />

<strong>of</strong> interest and was highly rated among the 33 participants.<br />

AFRICAN INJURY EPIDEMIOLOGY AND PREVENTION COURSE<br />

The <strong>Africa</strong>n Injury Epidemiology and Prevention Course provided exposure to emerging and midlevel<br />

researchers and programme managers to good injury surveillance practices. The focus on<br />

injury surveillance systems is critical because it can help us to quantify, cost and monitor trends and<br />

priorities for different injury sub-categories. Surveillance is the cornerstone <strong>of</strong> the public health<br />

approach to injury prevention, and the resultant development and expansion <strong>of</strong> <strong>safety</strong> promotion<br />

efforts. The first two days <strong>of</strong> the course were devoted to general injury epidemiology and violence<br />

prevention, while the last two days focused specifically on road traffic injury prevention. The course<br />

was attended by 29 participants, and was conducted by injury researchers and experts who are also<br />

active members <strong>of</strong> IPIFA. These included Pr<strong>of</strong>. Fatma Hassan, Pr<strong>of</strong>. Wilson Odero, Dr. Ronald Lett,<br />

Dr. Babatunde Solagberu, Pr<strong>of</strong>. Enas El-Sheikh and Mr. Erastus Njeru, who collaborated with two<br />

WHO members <strong>of</strong> staff, Dr. Olive Kobusingye and Dr. Meleckidzedeck Khayesi from Geneva. The<br />

course topics focused on the regional injury burden and epidemiology, concepts and strategies for<br />

injury prevention, surveillance systems, injury severity, trauma registries, pre-hospital and hospital<br />

trauma care, injury research in <strong>Africa</strong> and data management. The Violence and Injury Prevention<br />

Department <strong>of</strong> the WHO and WHO's Regional Office for <strong>Africa</strong> assisted in the funding and<br />

presentation <strong>of</strong> this course.<br />

CONCLUSION<br />

The successful seven-day programme signified a further milestone for IFIPA, the UNISA Safe<br />

Communities Affiliate Support Centre, and their <strong>safety</strong> promotion partners. In recent years IPIFA,<br />

UNISA's ISHS, the ICC-U, WHO-AFRO and others have combined efforts with a small but growing<br />

group <strong>of</strong> communities from across the region, and taken on the challenge <strong>of</strong> injury control on a<br />

continent where the injury problem remains largely unrecognised, despite its massive toll on <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

lives. Such training and exchange programmes serve to strengthen and expand a critical mass <strong>of</strong><br />

<strong>safety</strong> promotion researchers and practitioners who have invested in prioritising injury prevention<br />

across <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

94


ABSTRACTS<br />

The dissertation citations and abstracts contained here are published with permission <strong>of</strong> ProQuest<br />

Information and Learning. Further reproduction is prohibited without permission.<br />

Copies <strong>of</strong> dissertations may be obtained by addressing your request to UMI 1 Dissertation Services,<br />

300 North Zeeb Road, Ann Arbor, MI 48106-1346, USA. Telephone 091 (734) 761-7400; Web-page:<br />

wwwlib.umi.com/dissertations.<br />

Factors in the Liberian national conflict: Views from Liberian expatriates. Samuel Kpehe<br />

Ngaima, Sr., PhD, WALDEN UNIVERSITY, 2003. 217 pages. Adviser: Earl Joseph. Publication<br />

Number: AAT 3085839.<br />

This study analyzed the historical, social, ethnic, political, and international factors that contributed to<br />

the Liberian national conflict, which resulted in rampant violence, genocide, destruction, and<br />

displacement <strong>of</strong> more than half the population <strong>of</strong> the country and threatened the security <strong>of</strong> West<br />

<strong>Africa</strong>. No previous work had identified the major causes <strong>of</strong> the Liberian civil war. The researcher<br />

used a random sampling selection to locate 60 Liberian expatriates and conducted in-depth<br />

interviews in Ghana and the United States. The findings revealed that nearly all <strong>of</strong> those interviewed<br />

considered the prime factors in the civil conflict to be the perpetuation <strong>of</strong> Americo-Liberian<br />

governance over the indigenous <strong>Africa</strong>ns for more than a century and the resulting disparities in<br />

political, educational, and economic opportunities among Liberian citizens <strong>of</strong> different ethnic groups.<br />

Religion, which has been a major cause <strong>of</strong> internal conflicts in the developing world, was the least<br />

mentioned factor in the Liberian civil war. The findings suggest that an end to the violence and return<br />

<strong>of</strong> the vast numbers <strong>of</strong> Liberians in exile will result only when Liberians unite across class and ethnic<br />

divisions against individuals who victimize their own people to obtain power and wealth. The<br />

international community must provide logistical and economic support for rebuilding the country and<br />

creating the conditions for lasting peace and stability. A new society with policies <strong>of</strong> inclusion and<br />

equal opportunity must be implemented to bring about reconciliation among all Liberians.<br />

95


ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Civilization and genocide (France, Guatemala, Tasmania, India, Turkey, Rwanda). Christopher<br />

John Powell, PhD, Carleton <strong>University</strong> (Canada), 2005. 448 pages. Adviser: Bruce Curtis, Publication<br />

Number: AAT NR00806<br />

This dissertation argues that civilization produces genocides. It begins by considering the obstacles<br />

to a sociological understanding <strong>of</strong> genocide. First among these is the metaphysics <strong>of</strong> rupture that<br />

situates genocide radically outside the field <strong>of</strong> ordinary social relations, treating it as a breakdown,<br />

rather than as a product, <strong>of</strong> social relations. A second obstacle is the essentially contested status <strong>of</strong><br />

the concept <strong>of</strong> ``genocide'', which must be understood historically, through genealogical and<br />

figurational analysis. A third obstacle is the relative over-development <strong>of</strong> heroic sociologies <strong>of</strong><br />

genocide, which focus on the production <strong>of</strong> an intending collective subject, and the relative underdevelopment<br />

<strong>of</strong> anti-heroic sociologies that attend to difference, to relations, and to strategies <strong>of</strong> unmaking.<br />

I theorize genocide using Norbert Elias's figurational analysis <strong>of</strong> the European civilizing<br />

process, which traces the intertwined growth <strong>of</strong> state institutions, particularly the state's territorial<br />

monopoly <strong>of</strong> military force, and <strong>of</strong> forms <strong>of</strong> self-regulation and habitual conduct that have come to be<br />

seen as civilized behaviour. Through a deconstructive reading <strong>of</strong> Elias's texts, I overcome the limits<br />

set by Elias's residual essentialism and Eurocentrism, which naively equates civilization with<br />

pacification, to produce instead an account <strong>of</strong> how the expansion <strong>of</strong> the civilizing process involves the<br />

reproduction <strong>of</strong> social violence on an ever-expanding scale. Under some circumstances, this process<br />

<strong>of</strong> ``barbarous civilization'' is realized through genocidal violence, or ``civilizing genocides''. Finally, I<br />

apply this framework to the analysis <strong>of</strong> six historical examples <strong>of</strong> civilizing genocides: in Languedoc,<br />

Guatemala, Tasmania, India, Turkey, and Rwanda. I show that these examples, some <strong>of</strong> which are<br />

not usually considered genocides, can fruitfully and appropriately be treated as such, and how each<br />

<strong>of</strong> these events, usually considered examples <strong>of</strong> the failure or the breakdown or the limits <strong>of</strong><br />

European civilization, are better understood as instances <strong>of</strong> its expansion.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Buddhists in ethnopolitical conflict: Examining belief systems <strong>of</strong> non-violence and<br />

compassion (Sri Lanka, India). Terri D. MacKinnon, MA, Royal Roads <strong>University</strong> (Canada),<br />

2004. 88 pages. Adviser: Hrach Gregorian, Publication Number: AAT MQ93831.<br />

The purpose <strong>of</strong> this research project is to identify how Buddhists view and manage conflict, in<br />

particular during the reconciliation phase. Through two field case studies the research analyzes how<br />

Tibetan refugees in India and Sinhalese Buddhists in Sri Lanka have managed ethnopolitical conflict,<br />

particularly the reconciliation phase, by applying Buddhist beliefs and principles. Further research<br />

objectives include defining which Buddhist principles they are utilizing in managing conflict and to<br />

establish if commonalities exist between those <strong>of</strong> differing Buddhist traditions in applying Buddhist<br />

principles to conflict; and whether these methods can be used by conflict specialists within secular<br />

contexts to help others affected by violent conflict reach forgiveness and reconciliation. The research<br />

also examines literature relevant to Buddhist teachings on conflict, and literature concerning<br />

ethnopolitical conflicts involving Buddhists. Additionally, several Buddhist organizations working with<br />

96


conflict resolution are studied to determine how they incorporate Buddhist principles into their<br />

activities.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

By violent means only? A comparative analysis <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n agrarian labour relations, c.<br />

1900Ð2003. Luke Michael Radoux, MA, Dalhousie <strong>University</strong> (Canada), 2003. 161 pages. Adviser:<br />

Gary Kynoch, Publication Number: AAT MQ83594.<br />

In the last twenty years there has been much scholarly discussion regarding violence within <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n farm labour relations, yet little comparative analysis has been conducted to date. Studies<br />

addressing violence between white masters and black labour tenants, sharecroppers and<br />

wageworkers have remained isolated regionally and have neglected to address this phenomenon's<br />

changing nature over a protracted timespan. To that end, this thesis examines three <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

agricultural regions comparatively during the period c. 1900-2003 and reveals that violence varies<br />

over time and is employed by white farmers to various degrees, in a number <strong>of</strong> ways, and for a wide<br />

array <strong>of</strong> reasons. As a feature <strong>of</strong> rural labour relations in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> during the twentieth century,<br />

violence was shaped by specific economic, social, ideological, and political conditions present at<br />

certain times and places. These included types <strong>of</strong> farming practiced, modes <strong>of</strong> labour utilized, levels<br />

<strong>of</strong> white agrarian capital accumulation, and the rise <strong>of</strong> Afrikaner nationalism, among many others. Yet<br />

violence within the black/white, master/servant, landlord/tenant nexus was neither sufficient to<br />

maintain absolute dominance <strong>of</strong> the countryside nor the sole means <strong>of</strong> ensuring white hegemony.<br />

The development and entrenchment <strong>of</strong> an ethos <strong>of</strong> paternalism in rural <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> <strong>of</strong>ten placated<br />

the more violent tendencies <strong>of</strong> white masters. But paternalistic relationships were also, at times,<br />

violent themselves and paternalism as an ideology did not in itself preclude the use <strong>of</strong> violence. In<br />

regions where paternalism existed, violence was mediated and less common; where a sense <strong>of</strong><br />

paternalism was absent, violence was more pervasive. Paternalism and violence were not mutually<br />

exclusive. They interacted in an intricate manner and constituted the core <strong>of</strong> a highly complex and<br />

diverse power relationship also grounded in notions <strong>of</strong> patriarchy, coercion and control.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

A place-in-between: Narratives <strong>of</strong> gender, violence and identity in a <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n township.<br />

Upjeet Chandan, PhD, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong>ern California, 2004. 386 pages. Adviser: Janet Hoskin,<br />

Publication Number: AAT 3155389.<br />

Located within the historical framework <strong>of</strong> apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> and the contemporary conundrums<br />

<strong>of</strong> its post-liberation transition, this study analyzes the peculiar predicaments <strong>of</strong> gendered race, place<br />

and identity in post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> from the perspectives <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Indians, the<br />

smallest <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s historically racialized groups. Set primarily in Chatsworth, Durban the first<br />

large-scale working class township built by the apartheid government in the 1960s specifically for<br />

persons racially defined as ``Indian,'' this ethnography contextualizes the ruptures and reversals <strong>of</strong><br />

post-apartheid political-economic transformations within a historical framework <strong>of</strong> spatialized racial<br />

domination and forced culture change. It traces the historically produced, everyday gendered<br />

experiences and effects <strong>of</strong> legalized racial segregation, spatial control, and dislocation at the level <strong>of</strong><br />

community, family, and gender relationships and formations. Examining stories <strong>of</strong> violation and<br />

97


violence within their particular apartheid and post-apartheid contexts <strong>of</strong> spatial, political and cultural<br />

change, this study illustrates how racial and masculine domination were interwoven in the making <strong>of</strong><br />

Chatsworth as a modern township and how its legacies continue to shape the pervasiveness <strong>of</strong><br />

gender violence in the present day. This ethnography argues that while post-apartheid narratives <strong>of</strong><br />

decay and decline and feelings <strong>of</strong> racial ``stuck-in-betweenness'' that predominate among Durban<br />

Indians speak fundamentally about the uncertain ``place'' <strong>of</strong> this racialized community within the new<br />

post-apartheid body politic, these narratives must also be contextualized within a longer history <strong>of</strong><br />

political insecurity, displacement, and exclusion on <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n soil. In addition, these narratives <strong>of</strong><br />

in-betweenness simultaneously reflect gendered cultural tensions between ``tradition'' and<br />

``modernity'' and nostalgia for previous hierarchies <strong>of</strong> identity and certainty within a context <strong>of</strong><br />

rapid political change, globalization, and economic struggle. While post-apartheid democratic rule has<br />

created new opportunities for self-making through the universalist discourse <strong>of</strong> citizenship,<br />

contemporary economic conditions and political reconfigurations from White minority rule to Black<br />

majority governance have also provoked new dilemmas <strong>of</strong> place.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Healing violence in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: A textual reading <strong>of</strong> Kentridge's `Drawings for Projection'<br />

(William Kentridge). Vanessa Thompson, PhD, Duquesne <strong>University</strong>, 2005. 179 pages. Adviser:<br />

Leswin Laubscher, Publication Number: AAT 3162814.<br />

While the literature appears to understand trauma and violence as experienced singularly, and as<br />

effecting intrapsychic changes or reactions, latterly there has been a recognition that this<br />

understanding <strong>of</strong> the term ``trauma'' may not be adequate to describe violence suffered over a<br />

prolonged period <strong>of</strong> time. Further, psychology tends to avert our attention from healing by attending to<br />

symptomatology. In <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, during the apartheid years (1948-1994), violence was constituted<br />

by an extraordinary threat to ongoing being and was informed by a totalitarian prejudice. Creative<br />

texts, unlike traumatic texts, show how many artists have worked with <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n traumas in an<br />

effort to understand, and come to terms with them. This dissertation is a textual reading <strong>of</strong> Drawings<br />

for Projection (1989-1999) by William Kentridge (1955-), an acclaimed <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n artist. The<br />

approach <strong>of</strong> this study is broadly hermeneutic, phenomenological, and semiological. The reading<br />

suggests that the healing <strong>of</strong> violence is circular and continuous, and includes our remembering the<br />

past, and our humanity as ethical beings on both personal and collective levels. Additionally, the<br />

recognition <strong>of</strong> the Face, and the breath <strong>of</strong> the Other, contributes to the reconstitution <strong>of</strong> our ethics;<br />

conversely the counter pull to erasure, reconstitutes violence.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Inside rebellion: The political economy <strong>of</strong> rebel organization. Jeremy Matthew Weinstein, PhD,<br />

Harvard <strong>University</strong>, 2003. 561 pages. Adviser: Robert H. Bates, Publication Number: AAT 3106714.<br />

Civil war is now the most common form <strong>of</strong> violent conflict: all but seven <strong>of</strong> the 110 conflicts recorded<br />

between 1989 and 2000 were civil wars. While significant attention has focused on the macro-level<br />

factors that explain where these conflicts break out, how long they last, and why they come to an<br />

end, comparatively little research has been done at the micro-level on a central question with<br />

significant implications for policy: how do rebel groups organize violence? Why do rebel groups<br />

98


employ high levels <strong>of</strong> indiscriminate violence against civilians in some conflicts, while they<br />

demonstrate restraint in others? What factors shape and constrain the behavior <strong>of</strong> rebel leaders and<br />

their combatants? Why do some groups use methods <strong>of</strong> social mobilization while others rely on<br />

means <strong>of</strong> social control? This study approaches these questions through an examination <strong>of</strong> the<br />

internal organizational structure <strong>of</strong> rebel groups. It characterizes five organizational challenges that<br />

groups face: how to recruit combatants, control their behavior, govern the civilian population, punish<br />

defectors, and maintain the organization over time. Then, drawing on evidence gathered in <strong>Africa</strong> and<br />

Latin America in interviews with combatants and civilians, it explores how organizations respond to<br />

each <strong>of</strong> these challenges and identifies the factors that shape their divergence in strategy. The<br />

central argument is that two distinct types <strong>of</strong> rebel groups emerge to wage civil war Ð opportunistic<br />

and activist insurgencies Ð and their formation hinges on the type <strong>of</strong> opportunity that rebellion<br />

provides to potential participants. Where rebellion provides short-term rewards and risks are<br />

relatively low, opportunistic joiners flood rebel groups, causing severe principal agent problems that<br />

give rise to strategies <strong>of</strong> authoritarian governance and high levels <strong>of</strong> violence. By contrast, where<br />

rebellion is costly and the risk <strong>of</strong> death is significant, only the most committed activists are attracted<br />

to rebellion, making social mobilization the central organizational strategy. In these contexts, the<br />

costs <strong>of</strong> organization are overcome where groups emphasize identities or ideologies to elicit and<br />

sustain individual participation.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Performing the signs <strong>of</strong> injury: Critical perspectives on traumatic storytelling after apartheid<br />

(<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>). Christopher James Colvin, PhD, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Virginia, 2004. 409 pages. Adviser:<br />

Richard Handler, Publication Number: AAT 3137288<br />

Since the end <strong>of</strong> apartheid, those who suffered human rights violations during apartheid became the<br />

objects <strong>of</strong> a great deal <strong>of</strong> attention, both inside and outside <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Victims have been<br />

repeatedly approached for their stories and experiences, asked permission to record and circulate<br />

these narratives, and, <strong>of</strong>ten, promised a range <strong>of</strong> benefits. These promises typically go unfulfilled and<br />

victims have grown increasingly impatient with the next person who arrives on their doorstep,<br />

speaking about the miracle <strong>of</strong> testimony and reconciliation. This dissertation traces the ambivalent<br />

testimonial practice <strong>of</strong> ``traumatic storytelling'' in the work <strong>of</strong> Khulumani, a victim support and<br />

advocacy group, and the Cape Town Trauma Centre, a psychological trauma clinic that <strong>of</strong>fered<br />

counseling services to Khulumani members. Traumatic storytelling was frequently a point <strong>of</strong> conflict<br />

and debate between Khulumani and the many individuals and institutions Ð both local and foreign Ð<br />

that sought out their traumatic narratives. These tensions were heightened as Khulumani pursued a<br />

high-pr<strong>of</strong>ile political battle for reparations from the government, and increasingly drew attention, both<br />

welcome and unwelcome, from journalists, academics, and politicians. The chapters move roughly<br />

chronologically through a broad, two-year ethnographic account <strong>of</strong> the work <strong>of</strong> Khulumani and the<br />

Trauma Centre. Each chapter also highlights one or more <strong>of</strong> the various ``domains'' in which<br />

traumatic storytelling operated. Chapters 1 and 2 examine traumatic storytelling as a product <strong>of</strong> a<br />

number <strong>of</strong> political, religious and scientific discourses that came together in the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth<br />

and Reconciliation Commission (TRC). Chapter 3 examines debates around the psychological<br />

dimensions <strong>of</strong> traumatic storytelling. Chapter 4 moves from the psychological to the social and moral<br />

aspects <strong>of</strong> traumatic storytelling. Chapter 5 looks at the ``political economy <strong>of</strong> traumatic storytelling''<br />

99


while Chapter 6 considers the relationship between traumatic storytelling and political action. Chapter<br />

7 considers the kinds <strong>of</strong> subjectivity promoted by traumatic storytelling. The final chapter examines<br />

the question <strong>of</strong> ``memory, power, and subjectivity'' in traumatic storytelling and discusses the<br />

emerging politics <strong>of</strong> trauma and memory in post-apartheid <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Setting the stage for a `new' <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: A cultural approach to the Truth and Reconciliation<br />

Commission. Tanya Goodman, PhD, Yale <strong>University</strong>, 2004. 228 pages. Adviser: Jeffrey C.<br />

Alexander; Kai Erikson, Publication Number: AAT 3152936.<br />

This dissertation argues that the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Truth and Reconciliation Commission (TRC) should<br />

be viewed as a modern ritual <strong>of</strong> performance which enabled the nation's apartheid past to be<br />

constructed as a ``cultural trauma'' and by so doing to create a new collective narrative <strong>of</strong> inclusion. In<br />

contrast to traditional accounts <strong>of</strong> ritual that assume there are pre-existing bonds <strong>of</strong> solidarity in<br />

society which are reinvigorated by recalling the sacred center <strong>of</strong> a community, my work seeks to<br />

show how a performance like the TRC, while still relying on the processes <strong>of</strong> demarcating the sacred<br />

from the pr<strong>of</strong>ane, can also be a forward-looking enterprise in which the construction <strong>of</strong> a new sense<br />

<strong>of</strong> connectedness can emerge. The TRC relied primarily on testimonies from victims and perpetrators<br />

<strong>of</strong> apartheid violence who came forward to tell their stories in a public forum. Rather than simply<br />

serving as data for setting the historical record straight, I demonstrate that these testimonies and the<br />

effervescent foundational moment in which the TRC operated, the ceremonial attention it gained from<br />

the media, and the affective engagement it initiated because <strong>of</strong> its emphasis on the horrific stories <strong>of</strong><br />

everyday people helped to perform and then designate the past as pr<strong>of</strong>ane and to imagine, through a<br />

process <strong>of</strong> performance as well, a future community clothed in sacred qualities. Seeking to<br />

understand how this process was enacted, I examine not only the content <strong>of</strong> the testimonies which<br />

were given but also how these stories were told and what values were attached to them. As a result,<br />

I identify a series <strong>of</strong> performance cycles, including the forums <strong>of</strong> the TRC hearings, the modes<br />

through which the testimonies were represented in the public sphere, and how audiences responded.<br />

I also determine that third parties Ð ``empathic interlocutors'' and ``sympathetic rapporteurs'' Ð were<br />

critical players not only as mediators for the claims made in the TRC hearings, but also in how the<br />

work <strong>of</strong> the TRC was translated for a broader audience.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

The role <strong>of</strong> empathy in facilitating forgiveness: The lived experience <strong>of</strong> six political<br />

perpetrators in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Ida Marleen Ramsey, PhD, Gonzaga <strong>University</strong>, 2003. 261 pages.<br />

Adviser: Shann Ferch, Publication Number: AAT 3116073<br />

This study investigated the lived experience <strong>of</strong> perpetrators who received empathy and forgiveness<br />

from a person or persons they had deeply harmed. The study utilized a hermeneutic<br />

phenomenological approach in interviewing six political perpetrators who were found guilty <strong>of</strong><br />

crimes against humanity during the apartheid era <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, five <strong>of</strong> whom applied for and were<br />

granted amnesty for these crimes. The nature <strong>of</strong> the public confessions, apologies, and bestowal <strong>of</strong><br />

forgiveness by victims during the Truth and Reconciliation process in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> created an<br />

environment that necessitated the use <strong>of</strong> a hermeneutic phenomenological methodology. Interviews<br />

100


involving both structured and unstructured questions were used in obtaining the recorded text <strong>of</strong> the<br />

experience <strong>of</strong> each person included in this study. A review <strong>of</strong> the literature provided the philosophical<br />

and psychological background for understanding the role empathy and Ubuntu in facilitating the<br />

giving and receiving <strong>of</strong> unconditional forgiveness. The findings from this study suggest that the<br />

perpetrator may be deeply harmed by the violence or injury that they enact upon the other. The<br />

findings also imply that the perpetrator's outward appearance <strong>of</strong> arrogance, defensiveness, and<br />

insensitivity to the plight <strong>of</strong> the victim may be defense mechanisms to protect the ego from deep<br />

shame and humiliation. Finally, the study suggests that empathy and Ubuntu facilitate the <strong>of</strong>fering<br />

and receiving <strong>of</strong> unconditional forgiveness, which then opens the doorway for the possibility <strong>of</strong><br />

reconciliation for the perpetrator. This reconciliation may be threefold; reconciliation with the victim,<br />

reconciliation with the self as in the form <strong>of</strong> self-forgiveness, and reconciliation with a wider<br />

community <strong>of</strong> people. This dissertation opens both theoretical and therapeutic discussion <strong>of</strong> the role<br />

<strong>of</strong> empathy, Ubuntu, and forgiveness in bringing healing to both the victim and perpetrator. The<br />

findings point towards the need to explore these human phenomena in terms <strong>of</strong> reconciliation and<br />

redemption for perpetrators, regardless <strong>of</strong> how insignificant or significant the injury.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Through the public/private lens: Reconciliation, responsibility and democratization in <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>. Rosemary Lynne Nagy, PhD, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Toronto (Canada), 2003. 301 pages. Adviser:<br />

Melissa Williams, Publication Number: AAT NQ78446.<br />

Democratization in the wake <strong>of</strong> state violence necessarily involves the (re) construction <strong>of</strong> a strong<br />

public/private distinction. Following Shklar's principle <strong>of</strong> ``putting cruelty first,'' the prevention <strong>of</strong><br />

injustice requires, at a minimum, some sort <strong>of</strong> boundary between the public and the private. An<br />

expansive understanding <strong>of</strong> the public/private distinction is proposed: procedural mechanisms <strong>of</strong><br />

accountability are underpinned by ethical-political commitments to democratic principles and<br />

practices. A robust public/private distinction is dependent upon the integrity <strong>of</strong> its ``constituent''<br />

elements: ``selfhood privacy'' and solidarity. In state violence, institutional abuses are supported by<br />

ethical failings on the part <strong>of</strong> ``private'' citizens and enabled by damage to personal capacities to<br />

resist. The erosion <strong>of</strong> social solidarity and violations <strong>of</strong> an integral sense <strong>of</strong> self corrupt or destroy the<br />

sense <strong>of</strong> injustice among victims and passive bystanders. Thus, transitional nations must attend to<br />

the institutional or political requirements <strong>of</strong> democracy and to the ethical or personal requirements <strong>of</strong><br />

democracy. In both violence and transition, there is an interrelationship between the personal and the<br />

political, or the individual and systemic. The challenge in making a clean break with the past is finding<br />

an appropriate balance between political change and personal transformation that does not repeat or<br />

mimic the injustices <strong>of</strong> the past. The dissertation views the process <strong>of</strong> democratization in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

through the public/private lens. Analysis <strong>of</strong> the breakdown <strong>of</strong> the public/private distinction under<br />

apartheid reveals that egregious violence was inscribed within apartheid's structural violence.<br />

Responsibility for gross violations <strong>of</strong> human rights therefore cannot be dissociated from responsibility<br />

for human rights violations under basic apartheid law. The Truth and Reconciliation Commission<br />

(TRC) appeared well situated to establish accountability and to restore solidarity and selfhood<br />

privacy. However, narratives <strong>of</strong> forgiveness, healing and heroism glossed over the responsibility <strong>of</strong><br />

apartheid beneficiaries and placed the burden <strong>of</strong> reconciliation upon victims. This detracted from the<br />

paramount task <strong>of</strong> affirming the personal dignity <strong>of</strong> victims and cannot be considered a clean break<br />

101


with the past. In post-Commission <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, the efficacy <strong>of</strong> new institutions and the advancement<br />

<strong>of</strong> democracy are partly dependent upon continued reconciliation and responsibility on the part <strong>of</strong><br />

``private'' citizens.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Peasant unrest, community warriors and state power in India: The case <strong>of</strong> private caste senas<br />

(armies) in Bihar. Ashwani Kumar, PhD, The <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Oklahoma, 2003. 322 pages. Adviser:<br />

Robert H. Cox, Publication Number: AAT 3082961<br />

Using the case study <strong>of</strong> private caste armies in Bihar, a state in eastern part <strong>of</strong> India, this dissertation<br />

attempts to describe and explain the dynamics <strong>of</strong> caste, class and state power in post-independence<br />

India. This study revolves around a fundamental question: what are the causes and outcomes <strong>of</strong><br />

emergence and proliferation <strong>of</strong> private caste armies in Bihar? Using a process oriented state-insociety<br />

perspective, this dissertation attempts to analyze interactions between state power and social<br />

forces in Bihar. The state and society are embedded in each other rather than being dichotomously<br />

related. In contrast to usual portrayal <strong>of</strong> the state as a monolith and the central actor <strong>of</strong> social<br />

transformation, the empirical evidence from Bihar presents an alternative interpretation. The<br />

emergence <strong>of</strong> private caste senas (armies) has resulted from the ineffectiveness <strong>of</strong> state power and<br />

the increasing peasant unrest in the state <strong>of</strong> Bihar since independence. Further, the emergence <strong>of</strong><br />

Ranvir Sena, a caste army <strong>of</strong> the landed Bhumihar caste, as the ruthless and dreaded community<br />

warriors in Bihar also points to the continuing influence <strong>of</strong> caste in structuring state-society outcomes<br />

in post-independence India. Evoking the spirit <strong>of</strong> selfless piety, Ranvir Sena claims to protect the<br />

caste as a community <strong>of</strong> merit and worth against the so-called depredations <strong>of</strong> lower castes (Dalits).<br />

In this sense, the frequent outbreak <strong>of</strong> caste wars between landowning castes and landless lower<br />

castes is not brought about by ancient caste hatred but by the modernity <strong>of</strong> caste wars rooted in the<br />

dynamics <strong>of</strong> political and agrarian struggles in post-independence India. In many places in Asia,<br />

<strong>Africa</strong>, and Latin America, militias, guerrillas, terrorists, vigilante groups, mafias, paramilitary groups<br />

have emerged and defined themselves in terms <strong>of</strong> ethnicity, language, region or religion. Seen as<br />

``irregular armed forces'', they have <strong>of</strong>ten challenged state's monopoly <strong>of</strong> coercion. From a<br />

comparative perspective, the case <strong>of</strong> private caste armies in Bihar suggests that the seemingly<br />

endless cycle <strong>of</strong> violence in many societies is rooted in the limited and fragmented nature <strong>of</strong> the state<br />

power to mediate power struggles; part political and part economic.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Reporting ethnic violence: Context, text and practice <strong>of</strong> journalism in an Indian city. Aloke<br />

Thakore, PhD, The <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Wisconsin Ð Madison, 2004. 338 pages. Adviser: Hemant G. Shah,<br />

Publication Number: AAT 3155209<br />

This dissertation examines the reporting <strong>of</strong> ethnic violence, which in Indian English is called<br />

communal riots, in Ahmedabad, India. The research is premised on the model that journalism like<br />

any cultural product is best understood in its relationship with the social world, the creator and the<br />

receiver. The study <strong>of</strong> the creators, or journalism practice, is based on a theoretical framework <strong>of</strong><br />

influences on media content that includes the individual orientations, media routines, organizational<br />

pressures, extra media factors, and ideologies. Addressing the lacuna in research on media and<br />

102


ethnic violence, the research is conducted as a case study with three parts. First, the context <strong>of</strong> the<br />

reporting is presented using historical, geographical, economic, demographic, marketing and survey<br />

data. Second, a close textual analysis, which draws upon different strands <strong>of</strong> discourse analysis, <strong>of</strong><br />

the reporting <strong>of</strong> the violence in five newspapers, three Gujarati (Gujarat Samachar, Sandesh, and<br />

Gujarat Today) and two English (Times <strong>of</strong> India and Indian Express), is presented. Lastly, long<br />

interviews are used to show how an interaction between the backgrounds <strong>of</strong> the journalists, beliefs<br />

about journalism and its ethics, and pr<strong>of</strong>essional routines come together to result in the texts <strong>of</strong><br />

violence that are analyzed earlier. The findings suggest that the reporting <strong>of</strong> the violence was<br />

uneven. The same incidents were differently accented and the journalistic genres <strong>of</strong> news and views<br />

were blurred. Such a style shows the privileging <strong>of</strong> authority, the importance <strong>of</strong> geographic location<br />

and identity in covering incidents and different modes <strong>of</strong> blame or causality. Theoretically, the<br />

research suggests, albeit tentatively, that the media be construed not as causing riots but as working<br />

to harden identities among ethnic groups. Also, the study shows that reading coverage about ethnic<br />

violence <strong>of</strong>f the ideologies <strong>of</strong> journalists or <strong>of</strong> ownership structures is not useful. Rather it is the<br />

interaction between individuals, organizations, routines and contexts that have to be closely<br />

examined. Hence, normatively this research <strong>of</strong>fers multilevel suggestions for an ethical coverage<br />

which is rooted in the Gandhian idea <strong>of</strong> trusteeship instead <strong>of</strong> a purely consequentialist view <strong>of</strong> media<br />

coverage.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

The everyday life <strong>of</strong> Hindu nationalism: An ethnographic account, 1990-1994 (India). Shubh<br />

Mathur, PhD, Newschool <strong>University</strong>, 2004. 238 pages. Adviser: Rayna Rapp, Publication Number:<br />

AAT 3118788<br />

This dissertation looks at factors behind the rise <strong>of</strong> Hindu nationalism in India and at the changes that<br />

take place in culture and civil society before the movement can gain political power. It is an<br />

ethnographic study <strong>of</strong> a popular, right-wing movement and documents the progress <strong>of</strong> the Hindu right<br />

through the lives <strong>of</strong> its actors and the experience <strong>of</strong> the victims <strong>of</strong> anti-minority violence. It focuses on<br />

the state <strong>of</strong> Rajasthan, which does not have a history <strong>of</strong> Hindu nationalism; and is based on fieldwork<br />

conducted in ``social welfare'' projects run by Hindu nationalist organizations in tribal districts in the<br />

state and in urban slums in Jaipur, the state capital. It also tracks the anti-minority violence occurring<br />

in different parts <strong>of</strong> the state between 1990 and 1992, based on interviews with survivors and relief<br />

workers, the hearings <strong>of</strong> the Inquiry Commission investigating the events <strong>of</strong> the I 990 ``riots'' in Jaipur,<br />

and on personal experience <strong>of</strong> relief work carried out in the wake <strong>of</strong> the anti-Muslim riots <strong>of</strong> 1992. It<br />

attempts to understand the success <strong>of</strong> Hindu nationalism through its appeal beyond dominant groups<br />

to disprivileged and marginalized social groups, such as tribals, the urban poor, women, dalits, trade<br />

unions etc. It views the ideology <strong>of</strong> Hindutva (``Hinduness) as a form <strong>of</strong> symbolic capital, which is<br />

accepted by subordinated groups as a means <strong>of</strong> advancing their claims to a higher status within a<br />

system which disprivileges them in very comprehensive ways. It examines the patterns <strong>of</strong> violence in<br />

Jaipur in 1990 and 1992, and argues that while the conditions <strong>of</strong> this violence are made possible by<br />

the development <strong>of</strong> Indian capitalism within the globalized economy, the violence follows not a<br />

political or economic but a cultural logic.<br />

103


ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

The relationship between protest and repression: An empirical analysis <strong>of</strong> domestic conflict<br />

in <strong>Africa</strong> and Latin America. Sabine C. Carey, PhD, <strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> Essex (United Kingdom), 2003.<br />

Publication Number: Not Available from UMI.<br />

This dissertation analyses the dynamics that underlie domestic conflict and cooperation in the<br />

developing world. It investigates how protest and repression influence each other. The theoretical and<br />

empirical models that it develops incorporate both cooperative and conflictual behaviours <strong>of</strong> the state<br />

and the opposition into the analysis <strong>of</strong> domestic conflict. The empirical part <strong>of</strong> the dissertation is<br />

divided into two parts. The main analysis uses daily data from six Latin American and three <strong>Africa</strong>n<br />

countries between the late 1970s and early 1990s. It employs vector autoregression analysis to<br />

account for the two-way interactions between the government and the opposition. The analysis is<br />

performed separately for democracies and non-democracies in order to account for the differing<br />

characteristics <strong>of</strong> interaction between the state and the population under different institutional<br />

settings. The second part <strong>of</strong> the analysis employs ordered probit techniques to investigate a larger<br />

dataset, which includes most Latin American and <strong>Africa</strong>n countries over the same time period. Apart<br />

from studying the relationship between protest and repression, it focuses on the impact <strong>of</strong> different<br />

political regime characteristics on the interaction between the government and non-governmental<br />

actors, as well as on the effect <strong>of</strong> protest and repression on the level <strong>of</strong> democracy. The results from<br />

the two analyses suggest that both protest and repression are highly interdependent. Conflictual<br />

behaviour <strong>of</strong> one actor leads to conflictual behaviour <strong>of</strong> the other actor. In general, both actors seem<br />

to imitate each other's behaviour. The vector autoregression shows that the responses are most<br />

intense during the first four to ten days after a violent or non-violent attack from the opponent. The<br />

results from the wider analysis suggest that although democracies use less violence in their<br />

responses to domestic protest, they are very likely to respond with sanctions and limited coercion to<br />

popular dissent.<br />

ÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐÐ<br />

Violence in the midst <strong>of</strong> peace negotiations. Cases from Guatemala, Northern Ireland, <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong> and Sri Lanka. Kristine Hoglund, PhD, Uppsala Universitet (Sweden), 2004. 232 pages.<br />

Publication Number: Not Available from UMI.<br />

Why do peace talks fall apart as a result <strong>of</strong> violence? The present study addresses the question <strong>of</strong><br />

why and how violence sometimes changes the dynamics <strong>of</strong> peace negotiation processes. Incidents<br />

<strong>of</strong> violence may produce friction between and within parties. As a result, violence can make parties<br />

reluctant to continue peace negotiations if it increases the risk and fears <strong>of</strong> reaching a peace<br />

agreement with the enemy. Twelve high-pr<strong>of</strong>ile incidents <strong>of</strong> violence, including political<br />

assassinations, massacres, and bomb explosions, are analysed with the aim <strong>of</strong> probing the causal<br />

patterns that emerge in the aftermath <strong>of</strong> violence. Cases are selected from four intra-state negotiation<br />

processes: Guatemala, Northern Ireland, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, and Sri Lanka. The patterns <strong>of</strong> actions and<br />

responses, indicate that violence <strong>of</strong>ten symbolises a breach <strong>of</strong> faith between the parties. This is a<br />

main reason why violence is sometimes followed by a crisis. In addition, low intra-party cohesion<br />

regarding the peace negotiations, constrains the efforts <strong>of</strong> the decision makers to pursue peace. The<br />

104


study underlines the relationship between the parties, within each party, and the interaction between<br />

the two levels <strong>of</strong> analysis. The research further suggests that the destructive effect <strong>of</strong> violence can be<br />

counteracted by mutual certainty about where the negotiation process is heading, by confidencebuilding<br />

measures by the parties themselves, and through actions by third party mediators and<br />

monitors. Peace negotiations are also driven forward by the fears the parties have about continued<br />

armed conflict, a fear that commonly is exacerbated by the continued existence <strong>of</strong> violence.<br />

105


CALL FOR SUBMISSIONS<br />

<strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion: A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention (ASP) will be published twice a<br />

year. Submissions within the following guidelines are welcome. Please submit your contributions or<br />

any related queries to Pr<strong>of</strong>essor Mohamed Seedat, Editor-in-Chief, <strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion: A<br />

Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention, P.O. Box 1087, Lenasia, 1820, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>, or via E-mail<br />

to seedama@unisa.ac.za<br />

GUIDE TO AUTHORS<br />

There are five categories <strong>of</strong> submissions accepted for publication in the ASP. These include original<br />

contributions, short research reports, literature reviews, book reviews and short communications. The<br />

journal is multisectoral, and welcomes contributions from individuals or organisations interested or<br />

involved in the injury and violence prevention and containment sector in <strong>Africa</strong>. The sectors most<br />

closely related to the focus <strong>of</strong> the journal include the behavioural and social sciences, health<br />

sciences, engineering, educational sciences and the humanities.<br />

MANUSCRIPT PREPARATION<br />

The manuscript must be accompanied by a letter indicating that the article has not been published<br />

elsewhere. This letter must be signed by all listed authors to indicate their agreement with the<br />

submission. All manuscripts should be typed in double spacing with a margin <strong>of</strong> 3.5 cm on the left<br />

and right sides <strong>of</strong> the page. The manuscripts should be in 12 point Courier font, with the main<br />

headings in capitals and bold, and sub-headings in capitals. No enumerations and section numbering<br />

should be included, and all graphs and tables should be inserted at the end <strong>of</strong> the document.<br />

106


ORIGINAL CONTRIBUTIONS<br />

Full scientific manuscripts accepted for this category should not exceed 25 pages, including the title<br />

page, references, figures and tables.<br />

SHORT RESEARCH REPORTS<br />

Shorter scientific manuscripts, reporting on studies utilising limited samples, new methodologies, or<br />

replication studies, submitted for this category should not exceed 12 pages, including tables and<br />

figures.<br />

LITERATURE REVIEWS<br />

Manuscripts submitted as a literature review should not exceed 30 pages in total.<br />

BOOK REVIEWS<br />

Copies <strong>of</strong> books may be sent to the Editor-in-Chief at P.O. Box 1087, Lenasia, 1820, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

SHORT COMMUNICATIONS<br />

These communications include commentaries on events in the injury prevention sector, and<br />

organisation or programme reports. These should not exceed four pages, inclusive <strong>of</strong> references.<br />

All original contributions and short research reports should have the following sections:<br />

1. Title Page. This page should include the title <strong>of</strong> the manuscript, all authors and their affiliations.<br />

Full contact details should be included for the corresponding author. The category in which the<br />

manuscript is to be submitted should be indicated at the top <strong>of</strong> the page. The appropriate types <strong>of</strong><br />

articles for the ASP can be found in this issue <strong>of</strong> the journal.<br />

2. Abstract. All manuscripts, except short communications and book reviews should include an<br />

abstract placed before the main text <strong>of</strong> the article. This abstract should not exceed 250 words in<br />

length. While all abstracts need to be submitted in English, authors are also allowed to submit<br />

translations <strong>of</strong> these abstracts in French or Swahili.<br />

3. Main Text. The main text <strong>of</strong> the article should, as far as is appropriate, be divided into the<br />

following sections: Introduction, Methods, Results, Discussion, and Prevention Implications.<br />

STYLE AND REFERENCES<br />

All contributions should follow the American Psychological Association style. This format can be<br />

found in:<br />

107


American Psychological Association (2001). Publication Manual <strong>of</strong> the American Psychological<br />

Association (5th ed.). New York: Author.<br />

Please note the format for the Reference List. For example:<br />

Bender, S., van Niekerk, A., Seedat, M., & Atkins, S. (2002). A review <strong>of</strong> best practice home visitation<br />

in low-income contexts. <strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion: A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention, 1(1),<br />

35-67.<br />

Kibel, M.A. & Wagstaff, L.A. (Eds) (1993). Child health for all. A manual for southern <strong>Africa</strong>. Cape<br />

Town: Oxford <strong>University</strong> Press.<br />

SUBMISSIONS<br />

Three copies <strong>of</strong> the manuscript must be submitted to the Editor-in-Chief, <strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion: A<br />

Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention, P.O. Box 1087, Lenasia, 1820, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>. Contributors<br />

may submit the names and contact details <strong>of</strong> two referees competent to review their manuscript.<br />

Authors will be asked to respond to the editors and reviewers comments within four weeks. Upon<br />

acceptance <strong>of</strong> the revision for publication, an electronic copy in either Windows Word or WordPerfect<br />

will be requested.<br />

If you have any queries please contact The Editors: ASP at P.O. Box 1087, Lenasia, 1820, <strong>South</strong><br />

<strong>Africa</strong>; Tel. +27 +11 857-1142; Fax. +27 +11 857-1770; E-mail: seedama@unisa.ac.za<br />

108


CONTENTS OF PREVIOUS ISSUES OF<br />

AFRICAN SAFETY PROMOTION:<br />

A JOURNAL OF INJURY AND<br />

VIOLENCE PREVENTION<br />

VOL. 1 NO 1 2003<br />

EDITORIAL<br />

A New Journal for the Promotion <strong>of</strong> Injury Prevention in <strong>Africa</strong> Ð A. Van Niekerk and N. Duncan<br />

ORIGINAL CONTRIBUTIONS<br />

Extending the Boundaries <strong>of</strong> Injury Prevention Theory, Research and Practice in <strong>Africa</strong> Ð M. Seedat<br />

A Pr<strong>of</strong>ile <strong>of</strong> Fatal Injuries in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: Towards a Platform for Safety Promotion Ð R. Matzopoulos,<br />

A. Van Niekerk, S. Burrows and H. Donson<br />

A Qualitative Evaluation <strong>of</strong> Medico Legal Services in Gauteng, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: Service Accessibility and<br />

Quality <strong>of</strong> Care to Rape Survivors Ð S. Suffla, M. Seedat and A. Nascimento<br />

SHORT RESEARCH ARTICLES<br />

Patterns <strong>of</strong> Road Traffic Injuries and Associated Factors among School-aged Children in Dar es<br />

Salaam, Tanzania Ð L.M. Museru, M.T. Lesbabari and N.A.A. Mbembati<br />

Childhood Burn Injuries in Children in Dar es Salaam: Patterns and Perceptions <strong>of</strong> Prevention Ð<br />

N.A.A. Mbembati, L.M. Museru and M.T. Leshabari<br />

LITERATURE REVIEWS<br />

A Review <strong>of</strong> Best Practice Home Visitation Interventions for Childhood Injury Reduction Ð S. Bender,<br />

A. Van Niekerk, M. Seedat and S. Atkins<br />

109


Towards a <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Injury Costing Model: A Review <strong>of</strong> the Literature for the Development <strong>of</strong> a<br />

Process Path Ð B. Bowman<br />

BOOK REVIEWS<br />

The Anatomy <strong>of</strong> Power: European Constructions <strong>of</strong> the <strong>Africa</strong>n Body Ð A. Butchart; reviewed by M.<br />

Terre Blanche<br />

Community Psychology Theory, Method and Practice. <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n and Other Perspectives Ð M.<br />

Seedat (Editor) and N. Duncan and S. Lazarus (Consulting Editors); reviewed by A. Naidoo<br />

SHORT COMMUNICATIONS<br />

Injury Prevention Initiative for <strong>Africa</strong>: Achievements and Challenges Ð R. Lett and O. Kobusingye<br />

Considerations and Limitations to the Development <strong>of</strong> a Global Injury Costing Model: Conference<br />

Report Ð S. Bender and B. Bowman<br />

Injury Control and Traffic Safety Training Course Report Back Ð S. Atkins and A. Sukhai<br />

Montreal Declaration: People's Right to Safety Ð 6th World Conference on Injury Prevention and<br />

Control<br />

VOL. 1 NO 2 2003<br />

EDITORIAL<br />

Building and Consolidating the Injury Prevention Sector in <strong>Africa</strong> Ð G. Stevens<br />

ORIGINAL CONTRIBUTIONS<br />

Social Disorganisation, Social Capital and Violence Prevention in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> Ð T. Emmett<br />

The Magnitude <strong>of</strong> Firearm Homicide in Cape Town, 2001 Ð M. Prinsloo, R. Matzopoulos and A.<br />

Sukhai<br />

Occupational Injuries Among Physiotherapists: A Case Study in Zimbabwe Ð U. Useh, E.U. Igumbor<br />

and D.M. Madzivire<br />

SHORT RESEARCH REPORTS<br />

WHO-Supported Injury Surveillance Activities in <strong>Africa</strong>: Mozambique and Ethiopia Ð K. Bartolomeos<br />

and M. Peden<br />

Violence and Alcohol: A Study <strong>of</strong> Injury Presentations to Emergency Departments in Eldoret, Kenya<br />

Ð W. Odero and D. Ayuku<br />

110


Ingestion and Aspiration <strong>of</strong> Foreign Bodies in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Children Ð A.B. Van As, X. Chen, A.J.<br />

Millar and H. Rode<br />

BOOK REVIEWS<br />

Peace, Conflict and Violence: Peace Psychology for the 21st Century, D.J. Christie, R.V. Wagner and<br />

D. DuNann Winter (Editors). Reviewed by S. Suffla<br />

Security and Politics in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: The regional dimension, P Vale. Reviewed by T. Swart<br />

SHORT COMMUNICATIONS<br />

Injury Prevention Initiative for <strong>Africa</strong>: 2003 Update Ð R. Lett and W. Odero<br />

World Health Day 2004 to Highlight Road Safety Ð Department <strong>of</strong> Injuries and Violence Prevention,<br />

World Health Organisation, Geneva<br />

An Interrogation <strong>of</strong> Urban Safe Community Model Integration: A Conference Report from Calgary,<br />

Canada, 2-4 April 2003 Ð B. Bowman<br />

Indo-<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> Dialogue on Truth, Reconciliation and Human Rights: A Conference Report from<br />

Delhi, India, 4-7 April 2003 Ð M. Seedat<br />

VOL. 2 NO 1 2004<br />

ORIGINAL CONTRIBUTIONS<br />

Community Volunteerism in Safety Promotion and Implications for Sustained Participation<br />

L. Swart, M. Seedat and F. Sader<br />

The Epidemiology <strong>of</strong> Childhood Burn Injuries in <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>: A Review <strong>of</strong> the Evidence<br />

A. Van Niekerk<br />

ROUNDTABLE DISCUSSION<br />

WHO Communique on Violence and Health<br />

Department <strong>of</strong> Injuries and Violence Prevention, World Health Organisation<br />

Engaging Utopia through Evidence<br />

M. Seedat<br />

Violence involving Children and Youth<br />

C. Higson-Smith<br />

Intimate Partners and Sexual Violence: Implications for the Prevention <strong>of</strong> Violence against Women in<br />

<strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

S. Suffla<br />

111


Collective Violence<br />

M. SchoÈnteich<br />

A Response to the <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Responses<br />

S. Van Tuyll van Serooskerken and E. Krug<br />

SHORT RESEARCH REPORTS<br />

Critical Lessons from a Schools-based Injury Surveillance Initiative<br />

T. Swart and G. Stevens<br />

Children as Unintended Victims: The Shielding Phenomenon<br />

S. Van As, G. Fieggen, M. Wiemann and J. Peter<br />

The Importance <strong>of</strong> Oral and Facial Injuries in Child Abuse<br />

S. Naidoo<br />

Igun iflop: Gun Free <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong> Work with Youth in Schools<br />

M. Keegan<br />

SHORT COMMUNICATIONS<br />

Trauma Team Training Course: Evaluation <strong>of</strong> Ugandan Implementation<br />

R. Lett, O. Kobusingye, N. Asingwire and F. Ssengooba<br />

Design and Implementation <strong>of</strong> a Child Injury Prevention Resource Pack for Primary Schools<br />

N. Du Toit and B. Prince<br />

First Indian Ocean and the Third <strong>Africa</strong>n Safe Communities Conference, 8-10 October 2003,<br />

Mauritius<br />

R. Ahmed and W.M. Senyonjo<br />

Call for Expression <strong>of</strong> Interest Ð 2006 8th World Conference Injury Prevention and Safety Promotion<br />

EDITORIAL<br />

Making <strong>Africa</strong> Safer for Children<br />

R. Matzopoulos and O. Kobusingye<br />

VOL 2, NO 2 2004<br />

ORIGINAL CONTRIBUTIONS<br />

Gunshot Wounds in Children: Epidemiology and Outcome<br />

J. Hutt, A.B. Van As, L.A. Wallis, A. Numanoglu, A.J.W. Millar and H. Rode<br />

112


Home Visitation: A <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Process Evaluation<br />

W. Odendaal, S. Atkins, A. Van Niekerk and M. Seedat<br />

SHORT RESEARCH REPORTS<br />

Domestic Energy Use, Time Activity Patterns and Risk <strong>of</strong> Burns Amongst Children Less Than Five<br />

Years <strong>of</strong> Age in Rural <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

B. Barnes and K. Moiloa<br />

Partnership and Dialogue for Implementation <strong>of</strong> New Road Safety Rules in Kenya<br />

M. Khayesi<br />

LITERATURE REVIEW<br />

Review <strong>of</strong> Childhood Burn Injuries in Sub-Saharan <strong>Africa</strong>: A Forgotten Public Health Challenge<br />

A.A. Hyder, K.S. Kashyap, S. Fishman and S.A. Wali<br />

BOOK REVIEWS<br />

World Report on Road Traffic Injury Prevention: Its Implications for Low-Income Countries<br />

Y. Holder<br />

A <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>n Perspective on the World Report on Road Traffic Injury Prevention from a<br />

Multidisciplinary Team Context<br />

E. de Beer, K. Groenewald, S. Nkosi, E. van Niekerk and L. Vermaak<br />

SHORT COMMUNICATIONS<br />

The 7th World Conference on Injury Prevention and Safety Promotion: A report from Vienna<br />

B. Bowman<br />

The 13th International Conference on Safe Communities: Prague, Czech Republic<br />

M. Prinsloo and S. Bulbulia<br />

Vulnerability, Resilience and Coping <strong>of</strong> Communities and Health Systems in Responding to Infectious<br />

Diseases in the Context <strong>of</strong> War/Conflict: Kandy, Sri Lanka<br />

S. Bulbulia and F. Alvarez-Castillo<br />

<strong>University</strong> <strong>of</strong> <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>'s Department <strong>of</strong> Communication Science's Annual Postgraduate Winter<br />

School: Pretoria, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

L. Baadjies, S. De Freitas and S. MacKenzie<br />

17th International Conference on Alcohol, Drugs And Traffic Safety: Glasgow, United Kingdom<br />

A. Sukhai<br />

Security 2004: ISSUP Conference: Pretoria, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

S. MacKenzie<br />

Injury Control and Traffic Safety Training Course: Johannesburg <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong><br />

L. Baadjies, S. De Freitas and S. MacKenzie<br />

113


<strong>Africa</strong>n Safety Promotion<br />

A Journal <strong>of</strong> Injury and Violence Prevention<br />

ORDER FORM<br />

Subscription fee: ZAR 250 per individual subscription<br />

ZAR 500 per group or organisational subscription<br />

US$ 150 per international subscription<br />

Please fill in details <strong>of</strong> person/organisation responsible for payment in block letters:<br />

.....................................................................................................................................................................<br />

Tel number: ..............................................................................................................................................<br />

Fax number: .............................................................................................................................................<br />

Postal address: ........................................................................................................................................<br />

.....................................................................................................................................................................<br />

E-Mail address: ........................................................................................................................................<br />

PARTICULARS OF PAYMENT<br />

Payments must be made in favour <strong>of</strong>: UNISA ISHS/CPA<br />

Bank account:: ABSA. Sunnyside, Pretoria, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>,<br />

Branch code: 33 4545 Account number: 0100 00114<br />

Cash ................................. Cheque ..................................<br />

Bank draft ........................ Transfer ..................................<br />

Please fax or post your order form and pro<strong>of</strong> <strong>of</strong> payment to Ms. Lyndsey Lourie.<br />

%<br />

CONTACT DETAILS<br />

Ms Lyndsey Lourie, P.O. Box 1087, Lenasia 1820, <strong>South</strong> <strong>Africa</strong>.<br />

Tel: + 27 +11 857-1142 Fax: +27 +11 857-1770 E-Mail: lourilc@unisa.ac.za<br />

Web pages: http://www.ishs.org.za<br />

http://www.mrc.ac.za/crime.crime.htm<br />

114

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!